703598
225
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/230
Pagina verder
COMAND
Supplement
Order no. P222 0057 13 Part no. 222 584 07 06 Edition B-2017
É2225840706_ËÍ
2225840706
COMAND Supplement
Publication details
Internet
Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi-
cles and about Daimler AG can be found on the
following websites:
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)
Editorial office
You are welcome to forward any queries or sug-
gestions you may have regarding this Operator's
Manual to the technical documentation team at
the following address:
Daimler AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service,
70546 Stuttgart, Germany
Daimler AG: Not to be reprinted, translated or
otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, with-
out written permission from Daimler AG.
Vehicle manufacturer
Daimler AG
Mercedesstrae 137
70327 Stuttgart
Germany
Symbols
In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol-
lowing symbols:
G
WARNING
Warning notes make you aware of dangers
which could pose a threat to your health or
life, or to the health and life of others.
H
Environmental note
Environmental notes provide you with infor-
mation on environmentally aware actions or
disposal.
!
Notes on material damage alert you to dan-
gers that could lead to damage to your vehi-
cle.
i
Practical tips or further information that
could be helpful to you.
X
This symbol indicates an instruction
that must be followed.
X
Several of these symbols in succession
indicate an instruction with several
steps.
(Y
page)
This symbol tells you where you can find
more information about a topic.
Dis‐
play
This text indicates a message in the
multimedia display.
Parts of the software in the vehicle are protected
by copyright
2005 The FreeType Project
http://www.freetype.org. All rights reserved.
As at 10.02.2016
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
First of all, familiarize yourself with your multi-
media system. Read these operating instruc-
tions, particularly the safety and warning notes,
before you drive off.
This will help you to obtain the maximum pleas-
ure from your multimedia system and avoid
endangering yourself and others.
The equipment level and functions of your mul-
timedia system may differ depending on:
R
Model
R
Order
R
Country specification
R
Availability
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to
introduce changes in the following areas:
R
design
R
equipment
R
technical features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore
differ from that shown in the descriptions and
illustrations.
Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center if
you have further questions.
The Operator's Manual and all supplements are
integral parts of the vehicle. You should always
keep it in the vehicle and pass it on to the new
owner if you sell the vehicle.
The technical documentation team at
Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant motor-
ing.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
A Daimler Company
2225840706
É2225840706_ËÍ
Index ....................................................... 4
Introduction ......................................... 15
Operating safety .................................... 15
Data stored in the vehicle ...................... 16
Information on copyright .......................18
Your multimedia system equipment ...... 18
Overview and operation ..................... 19
Overview ................................................ 19
Basic functions ...................................... 24
SPLITVIEW .............................................25
Touchpad ............................................... 28
Rear Seat Entertainment System ........... 33
Character entry (telephony) ...................34
Character entry (navigation) .................. 35
Favorites ................................................ 37
System settings .................................. 39
Your multimedia system equipment ...... 39
Important safety notes .......................... 39
Display settings .....................................39
Time settings ......................................... 41
Text reader settings ...............................43
Voice Control System settings ............... 43
Wi-Fi ...................................................... 43
Remote control ...................................... 45
Bluetooth
®
settings ............................... 45
Automatic volume adjustment ............... 46
Setting the system language .................46
Assigning a favorites button .................. 46
Importing/exporting data ...................... 48
Reset function ....................................... 49
Vehicle functions ................................ 51
Your multimedia system equipment ...... 51
Important safety notes .......................... 51
Vehicle settings .....................................51
Seats ..................................................... 56
Climate control settings ........................ 59
Child-proof locks ................................... 63
360° camera ......................................... 64
Rear view camera .................................. 65
Navigation ........................................... 66
Your multimedia system equipment ...... 66
Introduction ........................................... 66
Basic settings ........................................ 69
Destination entry ................................... 71
Personal POIs and routes ...................... 83
Route guidance ...................................... 86
Real-time traffic reports ......................... 96
Storing destinations ............................... 99
Map functions ...................................... 101
Navigation functions ............................ 109
Problems with the navigation system .. 110
Telephone .......................................... 112
Your multimedia system equipment .... 112
Important safety notes ........................ 112
General notes ...................................... 112
Telephone menu .................................. 113
Connecting/disconnecting a mobile
phone .................................................. 113
Reception and transmission volume .... 118
Using the telephone ............................ 118
Mobile phone voice recognition ........... 122
Phone book ......................................... 123
Call lists ............................................... 126
Speed dial lists .................................... 128
Messages (text messages and e-
mails) ................................................... 129
Address book ...................................... 135
Online and Internet functions .......... 142
Your multimedia system equipment .... 142
Important safety notes ........................ 142
General notes ...................................... 142
Conditions for access .......................... 142
Setting up an Internet connection
(Canada) .............................................. 143
Establishing/ending the connection .... 146
Mercedes-Benz Apps ........................... 147
Mercedes-Benz Companion ................. 147
Web browser ....................................... 149
Radio .................................................. 154
Your multimedia system equipment .... 154
Switching on the radio ......................... 154
2
Contents
Overview ..............................................154
Switching HD Radio on/off .................. 155
Setting the waveband .......................... 155
Station ................................................. 155
Tagging music tracks ........................... 157
Displaying station information ............. 157
Calling up sound settings .................... 157
Displaying information ......................... 158
Satellite radio ...................................... 158
Media ................................................. 164
Your multimedia system equipment .... 164
Activating media mode ........................ 164
Audio/video mode ............................... 166
Media search ....................................... 173
Media Register ....................................174
Bluetooth
®
audio mode ....................... 178
Operation with the Media Interface ..... 182
Audio AUX mode ................................. 185
Video AUX mode ................................. 185
Video DVD mode ................................. 187
Picture viewer ...................................... 191
Sound ................................................. 193
Your multimedia system equipment .... 193
Sound settings ..................................... 193
Burmester
®
surround sound system .... 194
Burmester
®
high-end 3D surround
sound system ...................................... 196
SIRIUS Weather ................................ 199
Your multimedia system equipment .... 199
SIRIUS Weather ................................... 199
Rear Seat Entertainment System .... 209
Your multimedia system equipment .... 209
Rear Seat Entertainment System
overview .............................................. 209
System settings ................................... 216
Vehicle settings ................................... 218
Climate control settings via the Rear
Seat Entertainment System ................. 218
Navigation mode ................................. 219
Online and Internet functions .............. 220
Radio mode ......................................... 220
Media mode ......................................... 220
Audio/video mode ............................... 221
Video DVD mode ................................. 223
AUX mode ...........................................227
Contents
3
1,2,3...
360° camera
Displaying images ............................ 64
Settings ...........................................64
Switching on/off .............................. 64
A
Access data of the mobile phone
network provider
Deleting ......................................... 146
Editing ........................................... 145
Making entries ............................... 144
Selecting ........................................ 144
Acoustic locking confirmation
Activating/deactivating
(COMAND) ....................................... 53
Activating media mode
General notes ................................ 164
Adding bookmarks ............................ 151
Address book
Adding a new contact .................... 137
Adding information to a contact .... 137
Automatically importing contacts
from the phone .............................. 140
Browsing ........................................ 136
Calling up ....................................... 136
Changing the category of an entry .. 138
Changing the display and sorting
criteria for contacts ....................... 139
Deleting contacts ........................... 140
Deleting imported contacts ........... 141
Displaying contact details .............. 137
Editing a contact ............................ 138
Entering characters ......................... 34
Importing contacts ........................ 140
Introduction ................................... 135
Making a call ................................. 138
Receiving vCards ........................... 141
Saving a contact ............................ 140
Searching for a contact ................. 136
Sending e-mails ............................. 138
Sending text messages .................. 138
Starting route guidance ................. 137
Storing a phone number as a
speed dial number ......................... 139
Voice tags ...................................... 139
Address entry menu ............................ 72
Adjusting the volume
COMAND ......................................... 24
Traffic announcements .................... 24
Alternative Route ................................ 93
Ambient lighting
Setting (COMAND) ........................... 51
Audio AUX
Setting options .............................. 185
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
Gracenote
®
Media Database ......... 172
Playback options ........................... 170
Switching to (Rear Seat Entertain-
ment System) ................................ 221
Automatic folding mirror function
Activating/deactivating
(COMAND) ....................................... 53
Automatic locking feature
Activating/deactivating
(COMAND) ....................................... 54
Automatic time
Switching on/off .............................. 41
Automatic volume adjustment
General information ......................... 46
Switching on/off .............................. 46
AUX (audio)
Notes/socket ................................ 185
Switching to ................................... 185
AUX jacks
CD/DVD drive ............................... 213
Avoiding an area ................................ 106
B
Back button ......................................... 23
Blootooth
®
Connecting a different mobile
phone ............................................ 117
Bluetooth
®
Activating audio mode ................... 179
Activating/deactivating ................... 45
Audio device mode and searching
for mobile phones .......................... 182
Basic display (audio mode) ............ 178
Connecting audio devices .............. 179
De-authorizing (de-registering) a
device ............................................ 182
Device list ...................................... 179
4
Index
Displaying connection details ........ 118
Displaying details ........................... 180
Entering the passcode ................... 116
External authorization (audio
device) ........................................... 180
Increasing the volume using
COMAND ....................................... 181
Interface ........................................ 112
Playback options ........................... 181
Preparation .................................... 178
Reconnecting an audio device ....... 182
Searching for a mobile phone ........ 115
Selecting a playback option ........... 181
Selecting a track ............................ 181
Starting and stopping playback ..... 180
Starting playback if the Blue-
tooth
®
audio device has been
stopped ......................................... 180
Telephony ...................................... 113
Telephony notes ............................ 112
Burmester
®
high-end 3D surround
sound system
Balance/fader ............................... 197
Calling up the sound menu ............ 196
Changing the loudspeaker source .. 197
Equalizer ........................................ 197
Equipment ..................................... 196
Setting the sound profile ............... 198
VIP & BAL selection ....................... 198
Burmester
®
surround sound sys-
tem
Balance/fader ............................... 195
Calling up the sound menu ............ 194
Changing the loudspeaker source .. 195
Equalizer ........................................ 195
Equipment ..................................... 194
Surround sound ............................. 196
Buttons and controller ........................ 22
C
Call lists
Displaying details ........................... 127
Opening and selecting an entry ..... 126
Saving an entry in the address
book .............................................. 127
Car pool lanes ...................................... 70
Category list (music search) ............ 173
CD
Inserting ........................................ 168
Inserting/loading (DVD changer) ... 169
Inserting/loading (Rear Seat
Entertainment System) .................. 221
Notes on discs ............................... 167
Removing/ejecting (Rear Seat
Entertainment System) .................. 221
Selecting a track ............................ 172
Sound settings (balance, bass,
fader, treble) .................................. 193
Characters
Entering (navigation) ........................ 35
Climate control
Activating/deactivating cooling
with air dehumidification ................. 61
Calling up climate control
(COMAND) ....................................... 60
Climate control bar (COMAND) ........ 59
Cooling with air dehumidification
(COMAND) ....................................... 61
Ionization (COMAND) ....................... 62
Perfume atomizer (COMAND) .......... 62
Pre-entry climate control at
departure time (COMAND) ............... 63
Pre-entry climate control using
the key (COMAND) .......................... 63
Rear-compartment climate con-
trol (COMAND) ................................. 61
Setting the air distribution
(COMAND) ....................................... 60
Setting the airflow (COMAND) ......... 60
Setting the climate mode
(COMAND) ....................................... 62
Setting the footwell temperature
(COMAND) ....................................... 62
Setting the temperature
(COMAND) ....................................... 60
Switching ionization on/off
(COMAND) ....................................... 62
Switching on/off (COMAND) ........... 61
Climate control bar
Calling up ......................................... 59
Climate control system
Rear Seat Entertainment System ... 218
COMAND
Active multicontour seat .................. 57
Basic functions ................................ 24
Index
5
Controller .........................................23
Display ............................................. 20
Multicontour seat ............................ 57
Seat functions .................................. 56
Settings ......................................... 151
Switching on/off .............................. 24
Telephone keypad overview .............23
COMAND display
Additional display area .....................40
Cleaning instructions .......................21
Setting ............................................. 39
Contacts
Deleting ......................................... 140
Importing ....................................... 140
Cordless headphones
Changing batteries ........................ 215
Setting the volume ......................... 214
D
Date format, setting ............................ 42
Day design, setting ............................. 39
Delayed switch-off time
Setting (COMAND) ........................... 54
Deleting
Call lists ......................................... 128
Destination
Saving to an SD card ..................... 100
Storing in the address book ............. 99
Destination (navigation)
Entering a destination using the
map ................................................. 80
Entering a point of interest .............. 77
Entering using geo-coordinates ....... 83
Entering using Mercedes-Benz
Apps ................................................ 82
Keyword search ............................... 75
Saving .............................................. 99
Selecting an address book con-
tact as a destination ........................ 77
Selecting from the list of last des-
tinations ........................................... 76
Dialing a number (telephone) ........... 119
Display
Selecting the design ........................ 39
Switching on/off .............................. 41
DVD
Inserting/loading (Rear Seat
Entertainment System) .................. 221
Notes on discs ............................... 167
Removing/ejecting (DVD
changer) ........................................ 169
Removing/ejecting (Rear Seat
Entertainment System) .................. 221
E
E-mail
Answering ...................................... 133
Calling up the settings menu ......... 129
Changing the name of the e-mail
account .......................................... 130
Configuring an e-mail account ....... 130
Configuring the e-mails displayed .. 130
Deactivating the e-mail function .... 130
Deleting ......................................... 135
Displaying details ........................... 132
Downloading e-mails manually ...... 130
Editing text templates .................... 134
Forwarding ..................................... 133
Inbox .............................................. 131
Reading .......................................... 131
Saving the sender in the address
book .............................................. 135
Settings ......................................... 129
Storing the sender as a new entry
in the address book ....................... 135
Using a phone number in the text .. 134
Using text templates ...................... 134
Writing ........................................... 133
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
Activating/deactivating
(COMAND) ....................................... 52
Entering the address (example) ......... 72
Entering the city .................................. 72
Exterior lighting delayed switch-
off time
Setting (COMAND) ........................... 54
F
Factory setting (reset function) ......... 49
Favorites
Adding ............................................. 38
6
Index
Deleting ........................................... 38
Displaying and calling up ................. 37
Moving ............................................. 38
Overview .......................................... 37
Renaming ......................................... 38
Favorites (Internet) ........................... 153
Favorites button .................................. 46
G
GPS reception ...................................... 66
Gracenote
®
Media Database ............ 172
H
Handwriting recognition
Switching text reader function
on/off .............................................. 31
Touchpad ......................................... 30
Heading up (navigation) ................... 102
Home address
Entering and saving ......................... 73
I
Incident (traffic report) ....................... 96
Indicator lamp
Remote control .............................. 212
Interior lighting delayed switch-off
time
Setting (COMAND) ........................... 54
Interior motion sensor
Arming/disarming (COMAND) ......... 55
Intermediate destinations
Accepting for the route .................... 82
Creating ........................................... 80
Editing .............................................. 81
Entering ........................................... 80
Searching for a gas station when
the fuel level is low .......................... 82
Internet
Conditions for access .................... 142
Creating favorites .......................... 153
Entering the URL ............................ 149
Favorites manager ......................... 153
Favorites menu .............................. 153
Menu functions .............................. 150
Options menu ................................ 151
Selecting/setting access data ....... 143
Setting automatic disconnection
of the Internet connection ............. 146
Setting up an Internet connection .. 143
K
Keyword search (navigation)
Selecting search options ................. 76
Selecting search results ................... 75
L
Lane recommendations
Explanation ...................................... 89
Presentation .................................... 89
Lights
Setting the ambient lighting
(COMAND) ....................................... 51
List of access data
New provider ................................. 144
List of mobile phone network pro-
viders
With the selected provider ............. 144
Locator lighting
Setting (COMAND) ........................... 53
Lumbar support
Adjusting (COMAND) ....................... 57
M
Making a call
Using speed dial ............................ 119
Using the call lists ......................... 120
Using the phone book .................... 120
Map (navigation)
Adjusting the scale ........................ 101
Building images ............................. 105
Displaying the next intersection .... 103
Elevation modeling ........................ 105
Heading ......................................... 102
Map settings .................................. 101
Moving ............................................. 68
North orientation ........................... 102
Notes ............................................. 101
Rotating the 3D map ...................... 104
Selecting POI symbols on the
map ............................................... 102
Selecting text information on the
map ............................................... 103
Index
7
Showing the map version ............... 103
Switching highway information
on/off ............................................ 103
Updating ........................................ 108
Map functions .................................... 101
Massage
Selecting a program ......................... 58
Media Interface
Basic display .................................. 183
Mode ............................................. 182
Playback options ........................... 184
Search ........................................... 184
Selecting a music file ..................... 184
Switching to Media Interface ......... 183
Video function ............................... 184
Media mode
Bluetooth
®
Audio ........................... 178
Connections for external media
sources .......................................... 164
Switching on .................................. 164
Media Register
Basic display .................................. 175
Calling up memory space informa-
tion ................................................ 177
Copying files .................................. 175
Deleting all files ............................. 177
Renaming/deleting files ................ 176
Selecting a playback mode ............ 178
Switching on .................................. 174
Media search
By folder ........................................ 173
Category list .................................. 173
Current track list ............................ 173
General notes ................................ 173
Keyword search ............................. 174
Music genres ................................. 174
Selecting by cover ......................... 174
Starting the media search .............. 173
Menu overview
CD/DVD audio and MP3 mode ...... 168
Mercedes-Benz Apps
Calling up ....................................... 147
Mercedes-Benz Companion
Authorizing .................................... 148
Displaying vehicle data .................. 149
Door-to-door navigation (transfer-
ring a destination from an external
device) ........................................... 148
Door-to-door navigation (transfer-
ring a destination from the vehi-
cle) ................................................ 148
Introduction ................................... 147
Navigating to the vehicle ............... 149
Requirements ................................ 148
Microphone, switching on/off ......... 121
Mobile phone
Authorizing .................................... 116
Connecting (Bluetooth
®
inter-
face) .............................................. 113
Connecting another mobile
phone ............................................ 117
De-authorizing ............................... 117
Displaying Bluetooth
®
connection
details ............................................ 118
Enabling for Internet access .......... 143
MP3
Copyright ....................................... 167
Notes ............................................. 166
Safety notes .................................. 166
Stop and playback function ........... 171
Multi-Seat Entertainment System
Adjusting sound settings ............... 217
AUX mode ...................................... 227
Changing the picture format .......... 218
Cordless headphones .................... 214
Overview ........................................ 209
Picture settings .............................. 217
Replacing batteries ........................ 215
Setting the brightness ................... 218
Setting the color ............................ 218
Setting the contrast ....................... 218
System settings ............................. 216
Video DVD mode ........................... 223
N
Navigation
Adjusting the volume of the navi-
gation announcements .................... 24
Alternative route .............................. 93
Avoiding an area ............................ 105
Basic settings .................................. 69
Blocking a route section affected
by a traffic jam ................................. 95
Calling up the compass display ..... 109
Calling up the menu ....................... 109
8
Index
Drive Information ........................... 109
Entering a destination ...................... 71
Entering a destination using the
map .................................................80
Entering a point of interest .............. 77
Entering characters (character
bar) .................................................. 35
GPS reception .................................. 66
Important safety notes .................... 66
Info on navigation .......................... 110
Lane recommendation ..................... 89
Off-road/Off-map (off-road desti-
nation) ............................................. 95
Online map display ........................ 109
Reading out traffic reports ............... 98
Repeating announcements .............. 91
Route flight .................................... 110
Selecting a destination from the
list of last destinations ..................... 76
Setting route options (avoiding:
highways, toll roads, tunnels, fer-
ries) ................................................. 69
Setting the route type (short
route, fast route, dynamic route or
economic route) ............................... 69
Showing/hiding the menu ............... 67
Starting route calculation ................ 74
Switching announcements
on/off .............................................. 92
Switching to ..................................... 67
Navigation announcements
Switching off .................................... 24
Near Field Communication
Switching on/off .............................. 46
NFC (Near Field Communication)
Connecting a mobile phone ........... 115
Switching on/off .............................. 46
North orientation (navigation) ......... 102
O
Off-road ................................................ 95
Online and Internet functions
Calling up the device list ................ 145
Enabling a mobile phone for Inter-
net access ..................................... 143
Ending the connection ................... 147
Establishing a connection .............. 146
Managing all Internet devices ........ 146
Manually setting the access data
of the mobile phone network pro-
vider .............................................. 144
Mercedes-Benz Apps ..................... 147
Selecting the access data of the
mobile phone network provider ..... 144
Setting automatic disconnection
of the Internet connection ............. 146
Setting up an Internet connection .. 143
Web browser .................................. 149
P
Panel heating
Activating/deactivating
(COMAND) ....................................... 52
Parental control
Locking/unlocking rear compart-
ment displays .................................. 63
Switching the rear compartment
displays on/off ................................ 63
Pause function
Video DVD ..................................... 191
Perfume atomizer
Setting the perfume intensity
(COMAND) ....................................... 62
Personal POIs and routes
Alert when approaching (personal
POI) .................................................. 84
Displaying on the map ..................... 83
Editing .............................................. 85
Importing via Mercedes-Benz
Apps ................................................ 85
Recording the route ......................... 86
Saving .............................................. 84
Selecting .......................................... 85
Settings for personal POIs ............... 83
Phone book
Adding a new contact .................... 125
Adding information to a contact .... 125
Calling up ....................................... 123
Deleting a contact ......................... 126
Displaying the details of an entry ... 124
Entering characters ......................... 34
Saving a contact ............................ 125
Searching for a contact ................. 124
Symbol overview ............................ 123
Index
9
Phone call
Dialing ...........................................119
Picture viewer
Changing view ............................... 192
Displaying pictures ........................ 192
Exiting the picture viewer .............. 192
POI (navigation)
Category .......................................... 77
Defining the position for the POI
search .............................................. 78
Entering ...........................................77
Pre-entry climate control
Via key (COMAND) ........................... 63
Previous destinations (navigation) .. 100
Q
Quick access for audio and tele-
phone
Changing the station/music
track ................................................ 32
Sending DTMF tones ........................ 32
R
Radio
Activating/deactivating the sta-
tion presets display ....................... 157
Deleting a station .......................... 156
Displaying information ...................158
Displaying station information ....... 157
Displaying the artist and track ....... 157
Overview ........................................ 154
Setting the waveband .................... 155
Sound settings (balance, bass,
treble) ............................................ 157
Storing stations .............................156
Switching on .................................. 154
Tagging music tracks (download-
ing/purchasing tracks from the
iTunes Store
®
) ............................... 157
Radio station
Storing ...........................................156
Read-aloud function
Automatic ........................................ 99
Read-aloud function for e-mails ....... 132
Reading out
Traffic reports on the route .............. 98
Real-time traffic reports ..................... 96
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Adjusting sound settings ...............217
Adjusting the brightness ................ 218
Adjusting the color ........................ 218
Adjusting the contrast ................... 218
AUX jacks ...................................... 213
AUX mode ...................................... 227
Calling up the climate control bar .. 219
Changing the batteries .................. 215
Changing the picture format .......... 218
Climate control system .................. 218
Cordless headphones .................... 214
Device list ...................................... 220
DVD video mode ............................ 223
Media mode ................................... 220
Music search ................................. 221
Operation via smartphone ............. 212
Overview ........................................ 209
Pause function ............................... 223
Picture settings .............................. 217
Playback options ........................... 223
Radio mode ................................... 220
Selecting a folder .....................
...... 222
Selecting a track ............................ 222
Setting the air conditioning ............ 219
Setting the air distribution ............. 219
Setting the airflow ......................... 219
Setting the cooling ......................... 219
Setting the temperature ................ 219
System settings .............................216
Rear view camera
Displaying the image ........................ 65
Object detection .............................. 65
Opening the camera cover for
cleaning (COMAND) ......................... 65
Switching object detection
on/off .............................................. 65
Switching on/off (COMAND) ........... 65
Rear-compartment screens .............. 209
Receiving vCards ............................... 141
Redialing (telephone) ........................ 120
Remote control
Authorizing a new remote control .... 45
Button lighting ............................... 211
Multi-Seat Entertainment System .. 210
Rear Seat Entertainment System ... 210
10
Index
Reserve fuel level
Switching the function on/off in
COMAND ......................................... 70
Resetting (factory settings) ............... 50
Route (navigation)
Selecting an alternative route .......... 93
Setting route options (avoiding:
highways, toll roads, tunnels, fer-
ries) ................................................. 69
Setting the route type (short
route, fast route, dynamic route or
economic route) ............................... 69
Starting calculation .......................... 74
Route guidance
Continue .......................................... 92
Freeway information ........................ 90
General notes .................................. 86
Lane recommendations ................... 89
Off-road ........................................... 95
Traffic reports .................................. 96
S
Safety notes
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode ..... 166
Using the telephone ....................... 112
Satellite radio
Displaying information ................... 162
Overview ........................................ 159
Presets menu view ......................... 161
Registering .................................... 158
Switching to ................................... 159
SatRadio
Channel list updates ...................... 163
Memory functions .......................... 161
Music and sports alerts ................. 161
Notes ............................................. 158
Selecting a category ...................... 160
Selecting a channel ....................... 160
Tagging music tracks ..................... 162
Screen
Selecting for the remote control .... 210
SD card
Inserting ........................................ 170
Removing ....................................... 170
Seat
Massage function ............................ 58
Seat-belt adjustment function
Activating/deactivating
(COMAND) ....................................... 53
Seats
Adjusting the lumbar support
(COMAND) ....................................... 57
Balance (seat heating) ..................... 58
Resetting settings ............................ 59
Seat functions (COMAND) ............... 56
Selecting for adjustment
(COMAND) ....................................... 56
Selecting stations
Radio ............................................. 155
Selecting the country .......................... 73
Sending DTMF tones ......................... 121
Setting access data
Online and Internet ........................ 144
Setting the audio format
Multi-Seat Entertainment System .. 226
Rear Seat Entertainment System ... 226
Setting the language
COMAND ......................................... 46
Multi-Seat Entertainment System .. 226
Rear Seat Entertainment System ... 226
Setting the night design ..................... 39
Setting the text reader speed ............ 43
Setting the volume
Telephone calls ................................ 24
Settings
Sound settings ............................... 193
SIRIUS weather display
5-day forecast ................................ 199
Daily forecast ................................. 199
Detail information .......................... 200
Information chart ........................... 199
Sel
ecting a location for the
weather forecast ............................ 200
Switching on/off ........................... 199
Weather map ................................. 202
Sound
Switching on/off .............................. 24
Sound settings
Balance/fader ............................... 193
Calling up the sound menu ............ 193
Changing the loudspeaker source .. 194
Equalizer ........................................ 193
Speed dial
Deleting ......................................... 128
Index
11
Setting up ...................................... 128
SPLITVIEW
From the driver's side ...................... 26
Switching on/off .............................. 26
Transferring a destination to the
driver ............................................... 27
State/province
Selecting .......................................... 76
Station list ......................................... 156
Stop function
Video DVD ..................................... 191
Storing stations
Radio ............................................. 156
Switching between summer time
and standard time ............................... 41
Switching on media mode
Starting at a different seat ............. 166
Using the Media button ................. 164
Via the device list .......................... 165
Via the main function bar ............... 165
Via the number keypad .................. 165
System settings
Automatic volume adjustment ......... 46
Bluetooth
®
....................................... 45
Date ................................................. 41
Importing/exporting data ................ 48
Language ......................................... 46
Text reader speed ............................ 43
Time ................................................. 41
Time zone ........................................ 41
Voice Control System ...................... 43
T
Telephone
Accepting a call (COMAND) ........... 118
Adding a call .................................. 121
Adjusting the volume for calls .......... 24
Authorizing a mobile phone (con-
necting) ......................................... 116
Call lists ......................................... 126
Call waiting .................................... 122
Calls with several participants ....... 121
Conference calls ............................ 122
Connecting a mobile phone (gen-
eral information) ............................ 113
De-authorizing (disconnecting) a
mobile phone ................................. 117
Deleting a speed dial preset .......... 128
Deleting messages ........................ 135
Displaying Bluetooth
®
connection
details ............................................ 118
Downloading messages manually .. 130
E-mail ............................................. 129
E-mail requirements ....................... 129
E-mail settings ............................... 129
Ending an active call ...................... 122
Entering a number ......................... 119
Entering phone numbers ................ 119
Establishing the connection from
the mobile phone ........................... 116
Function restrictions ...................... 113
Functions available during a call .... 120
General notes ................................ 112
Incoming call during an existing
call ................................................. 122
Making a call ................................. 119
Message conditions ....................... 129
Message settings ........................... 129
Operating options .......................... 113
Phone book .................................... 123
Reading messages ......................... 131
Reception and transmission vol-
ume ............................................... 118
Reconnecting a mobile phone
automatically ................................. 117
Rejecting a call (COMAND) ............ 119
Safety notes .................................. 112
Sending DTMF tones ...................... 121
Setting up a speed dial .................. 128
Switching between calls (call wait-
ing) ................................................ 121
Switching between mobile
phones ........................................... 117
Switching the microphone on/off..121
Telephone menu overview .......
...... 113
Text message conditions ...............129
Text message settings ................... 129
Text messages (SMS) .................... 129
Toggling ......................................... 121
Using the telephone ....................... 118
Writing e-mails ............................... 133
Writing text messages ................... 132
Telephone keypad overview
COMAND ......................................... 23
12
Index
Telephone number
Entering ......................................... 119
Text messages (SMS)
Calling the sender .......................... 134
Calling up the settings menu ......... 129
Configuring the text messages
displayed ....................................... 130
Deleting ......................................... 135
Displaying details ........................... 132
Downloading manually ................... 130
Editing text templates .................... 134
Inbox .............................................. 131
Reading .......................................... 131
Reading aloud ................................ 132
Settings ......................................... 129
Storing sender in address book ..... 135
Storing the sender as a new
address book entry ........................ 134
Using a phone number in the text .. 134
Using text templates ...................... 134
Writing ........................................... 132
Time
Setting ............................................. 42
Setting the format ............................ 42
Setting the time ............................... 42
Setting the time zone ....................... 41
Setting the time/date format .......... 42
Switching automatic time on/off ..... 41
Touchpad
Calling up quick access for audio
and telephone .................................. 29
Changing the input language for
handwriting recognition ................... 32
Changing the station/music
track ................................................ 32
Character suggestions ..................... 31
Deleting characters ......................... 31
Entering a space .............................. 31
Entering characters ......................... 31
Gesture control ................................ 28
Handwriting recognition ................... 30
Moving the map ............................... 30
Operating the touchpad ................... 28
Overview .......................................... 28
Quick access for audio and tele-
phone .............................................. 32
Switching ......................................... 28
Switching input line ......................... 31
Zooming in on the map .................... 30
Zooming out of the map ................... 30
Tow-away alarm
Arming/disarming (COMAND) ......... 55
Track information .............................. 223
Traffic jam function ............................. 95
Traffic reports
Calling up a li
st ................................ 97
Real-time traffic report .................... 97
Trunk lid opening height restric-
tion
Activating/deactivating
(COMAND) ....................................... 55
U
Updating the digital map .................. 108
USB audio mode
Selecting a track ............................ 172
USB devices
Connecting to the Media Inter-
face ............................................... 170
V
Vehicle
Data acquisition ............................... 16
Vehicle settings
Calling up ......................................... 51
Video
see Video DVD
Video AUX
Activating/deactivating full
screen mode .................................. 186
Setting options .............................. 186
Video DVD
Control option ................................ 187
DVD functions ............................... 190
DVD menu ..................................... 190
DVD's control menu ...................... 190
Function restrictions ...................... 188
Menu options ................................. 189
Notes on discs ............................... 187
Operation ....................................... 187
Overview ........................................ 188
Pause function ............................... 191
Picture settings .............................. 189
Playing conditions .......................... 187
Index
13
Safety notes .................................. 187
Selecting a scene/chapter ............ 191
Stop function ................................. 191
Switching to ................................... 188
Video menu ................................... 190
Video-AUX
Connecting an external video
source ............................................ 185
Switching to ................................... 186
Voice amplification
Switching on/off .............................. 56
Voice Control System
Settings ........................................... 43
Volume, adjusting
Navigation messages ....................... 24
W
Weather map (SIRIUS)
Activating/deactivating display
levels ............................................. 203
Calling up ....................................... 202
Legend ........................................... 207
Moving ........................................... 202
Showing/hiding the menu ............. 202
Storm overview .............................. 208
Storm watch areas ......................... 208
Time stamp .................................... 207
Weather memory (SIRIUS)
Selecting an area ........................... 202
Storing an area .............................. 202
Web browser
Entering a web address ................. 149
WiFi
Activating ......................................... 43
Connecting the device ..................... 44
14
Index
Operating safety
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
cle while driving, you will be distracted from
traffic conditions. You could also lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate the equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
ment when the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
The multimedia system calculates the route to
the destination without taking account of the
following, for example:
R
traffic lights
R
stop and yield signs
R
merging lanes
R
parking or stopping in a no parking/no stop-
ping zone
R
other road and traffic rules and regulations
R
narrow bridges
The multimedia system can give incorrect navi-
gation commands if the actual street/traffic sit-
uation does not correspond with the digital
map's data. Digital maps do not cover all areas
nor all routes in an area. For example, a route
may have been diverted or the direction of a one-
way street may have changed.
For this reason, you must always observe road
and traffic rules and regulations during your
journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations
always have priority over the system's driving
recommendations.
Navigation announcements are intended to
direct you while driving without diverting your
attention from the road and driving.
Please always use this feature instead of con-
sulting the map display for directions. Looking
at the icons or map display can distract you from
traffic conditions and driving, and increase the
risk of an accident.
Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle covers a
distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every
second.
This equipment complies with FCC radiation
exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equip-
ment and meet
sthe FCC radio frequency (RF)
Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65.
This equipment has very low levels of RF energy
that is deemed to comply without maximum
permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). How-
ever, it is recommended to install it at a distance
of at least 8 inches (approx. 20 cm) between the
radiation source and a person's body (not
including limbs such as hands, wrists, feet and
legs).
G
WARNING
Modifications to electronic components, their
software as well as wiring can impair their
function and/or the function of other net-
worked components. In particular, systems
relevant to safety could also be affected. As a
result, these may no longer function as inten-
ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of
the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an
accident and injury.
Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-
tronic components or their software. You
should have all work to electrical and elec-
tronic equipment carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Declarations of conformity
Vehicle components which receive
and/or transmit radio waves
USA only: The wireless devices of this vehicle
comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1) These devices may not cause interference,
and
2) These devices must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment.
Introduction
15
Z
Canada only: The wireless devices of this vehi-
cle comply with Industry Canada license-
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
1) These devices may not cause interference,
and
2) These devices must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Correct use
You need to observe the following information
when using the multimedia system:
R
the safety notes in this manual
R
traffic rules and regulations
R
laws and safety standards pertaining to motor
vehicles
Using roof carriers may impair the correct func-
tioning of a roof antenna (phone, satellite radio,
GPS).
Attaching metalized retrofit film to the wind-
shield may affect radio reception. This can have
a negative impact on all other antennas (e.g.
emergency call antenna) in the vehicle interior.
Protection against theft: this device is equip-
ped with technical provisions to protect it
against theft. Further information on protection
against theft can be obtained from an author-
ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Qualified specialist workshop
Read the information on qualified specialist
workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Function restrictions
For safety reasons, some functions are restric-
ted or unavailable while the vehicle is in motion.
You will notice this, for example, because either
you will not be able to select certain menu items
or a message will appear to this effect.
Data stored in the vehicle
Data recording
A wide range of electronic components in your
vehicle contain data memories.
These data memories temporarily or perma-
nently store technical information about:
R
the vehicle's operating state
R
events
R
malfunctions
In general, this technical information docu-
ments the state of a component, a module, a
system or the surroundings.
These include, for example:
R
operating conditions of system components,
e.g. fluid levels
R
the vehicle's status messages and those of its
individual components, e.g. number of wheel
revolutions/speed, deceleration in move-
ment, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedal
position
R
malfunctions and defects in important system
components, e.g. lights, brakes
R
vehicle reactions and operating conditions in
special driving situations, e.g. air bag deploy-
ment, intervention of stability control sys-
tems
R
ambient conditions, e.g. outside temperature
This data is of an exclusively technical nature
and can be used to:
R
assist in detecting and rectifying faults and
defects
R
analyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an acci-
dent
R
optimize vehicle function
The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's
movements.
When your vehicle is serviced, technical infor-
mation can be read from the event data memory
and fault data memory.
Services include, for example:
R
repair services
R
service processes
R
warranty events
R
quality assurance
The vehicle is read out by employees of the ser-
vice network (including the manufacturer) using
special diagnostic testers. You can obtain more
information there, if required.
16
Introduction
After a malfunction has been rectified, the infor-
mation is deleted from the malfunction memory
or is continually overwritten.
When operating the vehicle, situations are con-
ceivable in which this technical data, in connec-
tion with other information (if necessary, after
consultation with an authorized expert), could
be traced to a person.
Examples include:
R
accident reports
R
damage to the vehicle
R
witness statements
Further additional functions that have been con-
tractually agreed upon with the customer allow
certain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehi-
cle as well. The additional functions include, for
example, vehicle location in case of an emer-
gency.
COMAND/mbrace
If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or
mbrace, additional data about the vehicle’s
operation, the use of the vehicle in certain sit-
uations, and the location of the vehicle may be
compiled through COMAND or the mbrace sys-
tem.
For additional information please refer to the
COMAND User Manual and/or the mbrace
Terms and Conditions.
Event data recorders
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record data that will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as dur-
ing air bag deployment or when hitting a road
obstacle. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
R
how various systems in your vehicle are oper-
ating
R
whether or not the driver and passenger seat
belts are fastened
R
how far (if at all) the driver is depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal and
R
how fast the vehicle is traveling
This data can help provide a better understand-
ing of the circumstances in which crashes and
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data is recorded by
your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no personal data
(e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, can combine the EDR data wi
th
the type of personal identification data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip-
ment is required, and access to the vehicle or
the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties that have the spe-
cial equipment, such as law enforcement, can
read the information by accessing the vehicle or
the EDR.
EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat-
ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci-
dent claims, and vehicle safety. Since the Crash
Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extract
data from the EDR is commercially available,
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly
disclaims any and all liability arising from the
extraction of this information by unauthorized
Mercedes-Benz personnel.
MBUSA will not share EDR data with others
without the consent of the vehicle owners or, if
the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the
lessee. Exceptions to this representation
include responses to subpoenas by law enforce-
ment; by federal, state or local government; in
connection with or arising out of litigation involv-
ing MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or,
as required by law.
Warning: The EDR is a component
of the Sup-
plemental Restraint System ("SRS") Module.
Tampering with, altering, modifying or removing
the EDR component may result in a malfunction
of the SRS Module and other systems.
State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that
conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted.
This means that in the event of such conflict, the
federal regulation governs. As of February 2013,
13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.
Introduction
17
Z
Information on copyright
Information on licenses for free and Open
Source software used in your vehicle and in the
electronic components can be found on this
website: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/
opensource.
Your multimedia system equipment
These operating instructions describe all the
standard and optional equipment of your multi-
media system, as available at the time of going
to press. Country-specific differences are pos-
sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not
feature all functions described here. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and func-
tions.
Read the information on qualified specialist
workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
18
Introduction
Overview
Components
:
Display
;
DVD changer or single DVD drive
=
Controller and buttons
The image shows the equipment with telephone keypad.
The multimedia system consists of:
R
the display
The display has 1440 x 540 pixels
R
the DVD changer or single DVD drive
R
the controller
R
the touch-sensitive telephone keypad or the touchpad
R
the buttons
R
ports in the center console (2x USB, AUX)
An iPod
®
is connected via a USB cable.
R
headphones for the front passenger (cordless or connected by means of a cable to the audio jack
in the footwell)
i
The multimedia system can be operated from the front-passenger side using the corresponding
remote control if your vehicle is equipped with the front-passenger entertainment system. The
display can show separate information for the driver and the front passenger. The front passenger
views the display in SPLITVIEW.
Functions
R
HD FM radio and HD AM radio/satellite
radio
R
Media
-
Media support: audio CD, MP3 CD, DVD
video, 2x USB, SD card, iPod
®
, Bluetooth
®
audio, 10.8 GB Media Register on the hard
drive
-
Music search using all media
R
Sound system
Overview
19
Overview and operation
You can select from three sound systems:
-
Standard sound system
-
Burmester
®
surround sound system
-
Burmester high-end 3D surround sound
system for ultimate listening pleasure
R
Navigation system
-
Destination entry using keyword search
-
Realistic 3D map with textured city models
-
Personal POIs and routes using SD memory
card
-
Navigation functions for passengers, e.g.
Drive Information
-
Dynamic route guidance via SIRIUS satel-
lite radio
R
Communication
-
Data transfer via NFC
-
Messaging functions (text messages,
email)
-
Address book
-
Internet browser
-
Mercedes-Benz Apps with online search,
weather, Facebook, stock prices, news and
much more
-
Wi-Fi interface for connecting a smart-
phone to the multimedia system and the
option of remote control for the front
passenger (SPLITVIEW) and the Rear Seat
Entertainment System
-
Mercedes-Benz Mobile Website
-
Wi-Fi hotspot functionality to connect a
tablet PC or laptop in order to enable
access to the Internet using the customer's
mobile phone
-
Mercedes-Benz Companion app
R
SIRIUS Weather
-
Weather data as an information chart (cur-
rent forecast, 5-day preview, detailed infor-
mation)
-
Weather data on the weather map, e.g. rain
radar data, storm characteristics and the
track of tropical cyclones (hurricanes,
typhoons)
R
Vehicle functions
-
Vehicle settings, such as ambient lighting,
belt adjustment and tow-away alarm
-
360° camera
-
Rear view camera
-
Climate control functions, e.g. climate
mode, perfume atomizer
-
Setting the multicontour seat with new
massage program
R
Favorites button
-
Faster access to up to twelve favorite func-
tions using the favorites button and the
number keys on the telephone keypad or
the favorites button on the touchpad.
R
Multi-Seat Entertainment System
-
All passengers have access to the multi-
media system's entertainment sources
-
Digital remote control operation and digital
cordless headphones
Display
General notes
!
Do not use the space in front of the display
for storage. Objects placed here could dam-
age the display or impair its function. Avoid
any direct contact with the display surface.
Pressure on the display surface may result in
impairments to the display, which could be
irreversible.
Wearing polarized sunglasses may impair your
ability to read the display.
The display has an automatic temperature-con-
trolled switch-off feature. The brightness is
automatically reduced if the temperature is too
high. The display may temporarily switch off
completely.
20
Overview
Overview and operation
Overview
:
Status bar with time, can show other displays
;
Main display field
=
Climate control status display
?
Context display in additional display area
The example shows audio CD mode.
Cleaning instructions
!
Do not touch the display. The display has a
very sensitive high-gloss surface; there is a
risk of scratching. If you have to clean the
screen, however, use a mild cleaning agent
and a soft, lint-free cloth.
The display must be switched off and have
cooled down before you start cleaning. Clean
the display screen, when necessary, with a com-
mercially available microfiber cloth and cleaning
agent for TFT and LCD displays. Do not apply
pressure to the display surface when cleaning it,
as this could cause irreversible damage. Then,
dry the surface with a dry microfiber cloth.
Avoid using alcoholic thinners, gasoline or abra-
sive cleaning agents. These could damage the
display surface.
Overview
21
Overview and operation
Buttons and controller
Overview
:
Switches the multimedia system on/off
;
Adjusts the volume or mutes
=
Telephone keypad
?
Back button
A
Seat adjustment button
B
Navigation button
C
Radio button
D
Media button
E
Telephone, address book and Internet button
F
Vehicle and system settings button
G
Controller
H
g Favorites button
The image shows the equipment with telephone keypad.
22
Overview
Overview and operation
:
Switches the multimedia system on/off
;
Adjusts the volume or mutes
=
Touchpad
?
Back button
A
Seat adjustment button
B
Navigation button
C
Radio button
D
Media button
E
Telephone, address book and Internet button
F
Vehicle and system settings button
G
Controller
The image shows the equipment with touchpad.
Back button
You can use the % button to exit a menu or to
call up the basic display of the current operating
mode.
X
To exit the menu: briefly press the %
button.
The multimedia system changes to the next
higher menu level in the current operating
mode.
X
To call up the basic display: press the %
button for longer than two seconds.
The multimedia system changes to the basic
display of the current operating mode.
Telephone keypad
The telephone keypad is touch-sensitive: as
soon as one or several of the keys are gently
touched, the telephone keypad is shown in the
multimedia system's display. The key being
touched is highlighted.
The multimedia system can be equipped with a
touchpad instead of a telephone keypad.
Controller
The controller in the center console lets you:
R
select menu items on the display
R
enter characters
R
select a destination on the map
R
save entries
The controller can be:
R
turned
R
slid left or right1
R
slid forwards or back 4
R
slid diagonally 2
R
pressed briefly or pressed and held
Overview
23
Overview and operation
Touchpad
The multimedia system can be equipped with a
touchpad as an alternative to the telephone key-
pad.
As an alternative to the controller, the touchpad
enables menu items to be selected and charac-
ter entry including handwriting recognition, for
example.
X
To activate the touchpad: press the surface
of the touchpad.
Further information (
Y page 28).
Basic functions
Switching the multimedia system on/
off
X
Press the Ü button on the center console
to the right of the controller.
When you switch the multimedia system on, a
warning message will appear. The multimedia
system calls up the previously selected menu.
If you switch the multimedia system off, play-
back of the current media source will also be
switched off.
Adjusting the volume
Adjusting the volume for media sources
X
Turn the thumbwheel to the right of the con-
troller.
or
X
Press the W or X button on the multi-
function steering wheel.
The volume of the media source currently
selected changes.
Adjusting the volume for traffic
announcements and navigation
announcements
During traffic or navigation announcements:
X
Turn the thumbwheel to the right of the con-
troller.
or
X
Press the W or X button on the multi-
function steering wheel.
i
You can set the volume for navigation
announcements to be different from the vol-
ume of the respective media source.
Adjusting the volume for phone calls
You can adjust the volume for hands-free mode
during a telephone call.
X
Turn the thumbwheel to the right of the con-
troller.
or
X
Press the W or X button on the multi-
function steering wheel.
i
Setting the volume for the Voice Control
System voice output; see the separate oper-
ating instructions.
Switching the sound on or off
Media source sound
X
Press the thumbwheel beside the controller.
or
X
Press the 8 button on the multifunction
steering wheel.
i
If the audio output is switched off, the status
line will show the 8 symbol. If you switch
the media source or change the volume, the
sound is automatically switched on.
i
Even if the sound is switched off, you will still
hear navigation system announcements.
Switching navigation announcements
off and on again
X
To switch off navigation announcements:
press the thumbwheel beside the controller
during the announcement.
The Spoken driving recommendations
have been deactivated. message
appears.
X
To switch navigation announcements on
again: switch the multimedia system off and
then on again (
Y page 24).
or
X
Start a new route calculation (Y page 74).
24
Basic functions
Overview and operation
or
X
Select +: while route guidance is active,
show the menu and press the controller
(
Y page 91).
Function menu
X
Press the Õ button or the ß, $,
%, or Ø button.
Media: the basic display for the last media
source set appears.
Navigation: the map or the last navigation
menu called up appears.
Radio: the basic menu of the last radio mode
set appears.
Telephone: the basic menu of the telephone
menu appears.
Vehicle functions: the basic display
appears.
X
For radio, media and telephone: press the
$, Õ or % button repeatedly.
The menu for the available radio modes,
media sources or communication functions is
displayed.
X
To show the menu: slide 4 the controller.
The menu appears. Depending on the opera-
tion, the marking is shown in main function
bar : or menu bar ;.
X
To select a menu item: turn and press the
controller.
Once you have selected a menu item in the
upper menu bar, the last menu set for the
selected function appears.
The lower menu bar shows functions within
the current media mode.
Selecting the operating mode for a
main function
You can select the available operating modes for
the main functions, e.g. telephone.
In the telephone menu, you can:
R
switch to telephone mode
R
call up the address book
R
call up the Digital Operator's Manual for the
telephone
X
Press the % button.
If telephone mode was the last mode selec-
ted, the last telephone display selected will
appear.
X
To select Phone: slide 5 and press the con-
troller.
The menu appears. Phone
is at the front.
X
For example, to select Address Book: turn
and press the controller.
The address book appears.
SPLITVIEW
Method of operation
SPLITVIEW allows the front passenger to simul-
taneously use different multimedia systems
SPLITVIEW
25
Overview and operation
than the driver. Different content is seen
depending on your perspective when viewing
the display.
The navigation function, for example, can be
used from the driver's side while a video is
watched from the front-passenger side.
SPLITVIEW is operated with the COMAND
remote control from the front-passenger side.
To do so, use the special radio headphones.
Using the headphones on the correct sides
ensures an optimal sound.
You can connect your own headphones to a
special headphones jack. You can use the
COMAND remote control to operate them.
Points to remember
R
You can only adjust the volume for the head-
phones supplied, directly on the headphones.
R
Only entertainment functions, i.e. radio, TV,
video and Internet, for example, may be used
with SPLITVIEW.
R
Videos cannot be shown on the driver's side
while the vehicle is in motion.
R
If media from different sources are used,
these can be used separately from the driv-
er's and front-passenger sides.
Example:
A medium is being played on the DVD changer
on the driver's side. It is not possible for the
front passenger to play any other medium
that is inserted in the DVD changer from the
front-passenger side. However, other media
can be used on the front-passenger side at
the same time, including the radio, memory
card, MEDIA REGISTER, Media Interface, USB
or AUX.
R
If you use the same medium on both the driv-
er's and front passenger sides, settings can
be made from both sides. In this case, the last
setting made takes precedence.
R
Requirement for Internet use (USA): mbrace
must be activated for Internet access in the
multimedia system on the driver's side
(
Y page 142).
R
Requirement for Internet use (Canada): a
mobile phone must be connected via Blue-
tooth
®
or USB to the multimedia system on
the driver's side (
Y page 142).
R
The Internet can be separately used by both
the driver and front passenger at the same
time.
R
The multifunction steering wheel can be used
to control the functions which relate to the
driver's side, but not for the front-passenger
side.
R
The driver can lock or unlock the other
screens (override feature) (
Y page 63).
Switching SPLITVIEW on/off
From the driver's side
X
To activate: press the Ø button.
The Vehicle menu appears.
X
Slide 6 the controller.
The menu bar is shown.
X
To select ù On, turn and press the con-
troller.
The ù SPLITVIEW symbol appears in the
status bar. The menu item in the lower menu
bar switches to ù
Off.
The front passenger sees the display of the
function last activated. If the switch-on time
was longer than 30 minutes previously, the
display from the driver's side is shown.
X
To switch off: to select ù Off, turn and
press the controller.
The display changes to ù
On.
ù is hidden in the status bar.
X
To lock/unlock SPLITVIEW: proceed as
described under "Locking/unlocking the
rear-compartment displays" (
Y page 63).
Instead of selecting a rear-compartment dis-
play, select SplitView
.
26
SPLITVIEW
Overview and operation
From the front-passenger side
Operation takes place via the COMAND remote
control (
Y page 210).
X
To activate: select the SPLITVIEW display by
turning thumbwheel : until the SPLITVIEW
symbol appears in the window.
X
Press the u button.
X
To deactivate: press button u.
The display changes to ù
On.
The SPLITVIEW symbol is hidden in the status
bar.
The menu called up on the driver's side is
shown.
SPLITVIEW is activated with the last settings, if:
R
the multimedia system is switched off by
removing the SmartKey from the ignition lock
while SPLITVIEW is activated
R
and switched on again within 30 minutes
If the multimedia system is switched on again
after more than 30 minutes, SPLITVIEW is not
activated.
If SPLITVIEW is activated on the front-passenger
side, the settings from the driver's side will be
used.
In media mode
SPLITVIEW can be activated from any media
mode (e.g. Media Interface).
X
To activate: slide 6 the controller.
The menu bar is shown.
X
To select Options, turn and press the con-
troller.
A menu appears.
X
Select Start this Application in
SplitView.
A window with the Starting
Application
in SplitView... message appears.
SPLITVIEW switches on. The ù symbol
appears in the status bar.
X
To deactivate: from the driver's side, use the
Ø button(
Y page 26).
X
From the front-passenger side, use the
COMAND remote control.
X
Additional options: to select Additional
Options…, turn and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To switch SPLITVIEW on/off: proceed as
described under "Switching the rear-com-
partment displays on/off"(
Y page 63).
Instead of selecting a rear-compartment dis-
play, select SplitView
.
X
To lock/unlock SPLITVIEW: proceed as
described under "Locking/unlocking the
rear-compartment displays" (
Y page 63).
Instead of selecting a rear-compartment dis-
play, select SplitView
.
Transferring a destination to the
driver
Using SPLITVIEW you can select a destination
from the front-passenger side and transfer this
to the driver's side.
X
Switch on SPLITVIEW (Y page 26).
X
To select ù On, turn and press the con-
troller.
The SPLITVIEW symbol appears in the display
and the ù display switches to ù
Off.
X
Select ® in the main function bar with the
COMAND remote control.
A menu appears.
X
Using the COMAND remote control, select
Mercedes-Benz Apps
.
You see the selection of Mercedes-Benz
Apps.
X
Select Google Local Search with the
COMAND remote control.
A menu appears.
SPLITVIEW
27
Overview and operation
X
Select a search position, e.g. In the Vicin‐
ity of the Destination.
A menu appears.
X
Select the type of search query.
An input field appears.
X
Enter the destination using the COMAND
remote control and press the b button.
The Google™ results list appears.
X
Select the destination using the COMAND
remote control.
A menu appears.
X
Select Set as Destination.
X
A prompt appears on the driver's side.
X
Select Yes or No.
If you select Yes
, the navigation data is used
for route guidance.
Touchpad
Touchpad overview
!
Do not use any sharp objects on the touch-
pad. This could damage the touchpad.
:
Touch-sensitive surface
;
Favorites button
=
Calls up quick access for audio and tele-
phone
?
Back button
Using the touchpad, you can:
R
select menu items in the display
(
Y page 28)
R
enter characters (handwriting recognition)
(
Y page 30).
R
control the active audio source
(
Y page 32)
R
create, manage and call up favorites
(
Y page 37)
R
enter destinations in the navigation system
R
save entries
Further information on operating the touchpad
(
Y page 28).
Switching the touchpad on/off
X
Press the Ø button.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To select System Settings: slide 6, turn
and press the controller.
X
To select Touchpad: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Activate Touchpad.
The touchpad is switched on O or off ª.
Operating the touchpad
Selecting a menu item
X
Use one finger to touch the touch-sensitive
surface.
X
Swipe your finger up, down, to the left or right.
The selection in the display moves in accord-
ance with the direction of movement.
You can navigate in lists or menus in this way.
28
Touchpad
Overview and operation
Confirming a selection
Do not press your finger too hard on the touch-
pad. This could cause malfunctions.
X
Use one finger to press the touch-sensitive
surface until you reach the pressure point.
A menu, an option or an application is started.
Calling up quick access for audio and
telephone
X
Use two fingers to touch the lower part of the
touch-sensitive surface.
X
Swipe your fingers up.
Quick access is displayed.
Further information on quick access:
R
for audio (Y page 32)
R
for telephone (Y page 32)
Hiding the quick access for audio and
telephone
X
Use two fingers to touch the touch-sensitive
surface.
X
Swipe your fingers down.
Quick access is hidden.
Operating the control for vehicle and
sound settings
X
Touch the touch-sensitive surface with two
fingers, spaced slightly apart.
X
Turn both fingers clockwise.
The control setting is increased.
or
X
Turn both fingers counter-clockwise.
The control setting is decreased.
Touchpad
29
Overview and operation
Moving the map
X
Use one finger to press the touch-sensitive
surface until you reach the pressure point.
The crosshair is shown.
X
Touch the touch-sensitive surface again with
one finger.
X
Swipe your finger in any direction.
The map is moved is the direction of move-
ment.
Zooming in on the map
X
Touch the touch-sensitive surface with two
fingers, spaced slightly apart.
X
Glide your fingers away from each other.
The map scale is magnified.
Zooming out of the map
X
Touch the touch-sensitive surface with two
fingers, spaced far apart.
X
Glide your fingers towards each other.
The map scale is reduced.
Handwriting recognition
Handwriting recognition overview
You can use handwriting recognition for text,
numbers or characters in any input line.
:
Active input line
;
Inserts a space (Y page 31)
=
Illustration of the touch-sensitive surface
?
Deletes characters (Y page 31)
If the character that you have entered can be
interpreted in different ways, these options are
displayed. More information on the character
suggestions (
Y page 31).
You can additionally switch the handwriting rec-
ognition read-aloud function on and off.
30
Touchpad
Overview and operation
:
To exit the menu
;
To return to handwriting recognition
=
To use the phone book or text templates
?
To change the input line or the position of
the cursor
A
To change the input language
B
To finish character entry
X
To display the menu: press the touchpad.
Switching the text reader function of
the handwriting recognition on/off
You can switch the text reader function of the
handwriting recognition on or off.
X
Press the Ø button.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To select System Settings: slide 6, turn
and press the controller.
X
To select Touchpad: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Read Out Handwriting Recog‐
nition, turn and press the controller.
The text reader function is switched on O or
off ª.
Entering characters
Prerequisite: an input line for text, numbers or
characters has been selected.
X
Use one finger to draw the desired character
on the touch-sensitive surface.
The character recognized is entered in the
input line. You can draw the next character on
the touch-sensitive surface.
If the character can be interpreted in different
ways, these options are displayed.
More information on the character suggestions
(
Y page 31).
Character suggestions
If a character is not clearly recognized, hand-
writing recognition suggests a range of charac-
ters.
X
To select a character suggestion: turn the
controller.
The selected character is entered instead of
the automatically recognized character. Char-
acter entry can be continued.
Inserting a space
Prerequisite: an input line for text, numbers or
characters has been selected.
X
Use your finger to touch the touch-sensitive
surface and swipe to the right.
A space is entered into the input line.
Deleting characters
Prerequisite: an input line for text, numbers or
characters has been selected.
X
Use your finger to touch the touch-sensitive
surface and swipe to the left.
The character last entered is deleted.
Switching input lines
X
Press the touchpad.
A symbol is shown.
X
To select p: swipe your finger to the left or
right and press.
X
To select the input line: swipe up or down and
press.
The selected input line is active and character
entry can be continued.
Touchpad
31
Overview and operation
Moving the cursor within the input line
X
Press the touchpad.
A symbol is shown.
X
To select p: glide your finger to the left or
right and press.
X
To move the cursor: glide to the left or right.
Changing the input language for hand-
writing recognition
Prerequisite: an input line for text, numbers or
characters has been selected.
X
Press the touchpad.
A symbol is shown.
X
To select B: glide your finger to the left or
right and press.
The list of available input languages appears.
X
To select a language: swipe up or down and
press.
The input language for handwriting recogni-
tion has been changed.
Searching in lists
The phone book search is used as an example.
You determine the first letter of the contact you
are looking for with the first character you enter.
X
Draw a letter on the touchpad surface.
The first contact with the selected first char-
acter is highlighted in the phone book.
Further information on handwriting recogni-
tion on the touchpad (
Y page 30).
X
Draw additional letters on the touchpad sur-
face one after another.
X
To complete the search and return to the
phone book: press the touchpad.
Switching between the controller and
the touchpad as input device
Prerequisite: an input line for text, numbers or
characters has been selected.
X
To switch from character entry using the
controller to handwriting recognition on
the touchpad: use one finger to press the
touchpad.
Handwriting recognition on the touchpad is
active.
X
To switch from handwriting recognition
on the touchpad to character entry using
the controller: press the controller.
Character entry using the controller is active.
Quick access for audio and telephone
Changing the station/music track
Depending on the audio source that is currently
activated, you can use this function to select the
next station or music track.
X
Call up quick access (Y page 29).
The current audio source is displayed.
X
To select the previous or next station or music
track: swipe to the left or right.
The selected station or music track is played.
Sending DTMF tones
The function is not supported by all mobile
phones (see the manufacturer's operating
instructions).
X
Call up quick access during a call (Y page 29).
X
To select characters: glide your finger to the
left or right and press.
Every character selected will be transmitted
immediately.
32
Touchpad
Overview and operation
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Media overview
You can access various types of media from all
operating positions in the vehicle.
The media can be connected to any available
jacks in the vehicle or inserted into the various
drives.
R
If media from different sources are used, they
can be used separately from each of the oper-
ating positions. Example: a film from the DVD
drive is played on the rear right-hand operat-
ing position. This means that another film
from the same DVD cannot be played sepa-
rately on the rear left-hand operating position.
However, it is possible to use the radio, mem-
ory card, Media Register, Media Interface,
USB, online and Internet functions or AUX at
the same time from the rear left-hand oper-
ating position.
R
If you use the same medium on both sides,
you can both carry out the respective set-
tings. The "last one wins" principle applies
here, i.e. the last setting activated is favored.
R
The Internet can be used separately at all
operating positions.
R
The Internet can only be used if it is set up and
connected via a telephone (
Y page 142).
You can select from the following media:
MEDIUM Function/location
AUX Devices that are con-
nected to the AUX
socket. The AUX
socket is located
under the center con-
sole armrest in the
rear compartment.
COMAND disc CDs or DVDs that are
inserted into the mul-
timedia system at the
front.
COMAND memory
card
Memory card that is
inserted into the mul-
timedia system at the
front.
COMAND Media
Interface
Devices inserted into
the USB ports at the
front of the vehicle.
Disc CD or DVD inserted
into the rear-com-
partment drive.
Media Register Media found in the
MEDIA REGISTER.
Media Interface 1
Media Interface 2
Devices connected to
USB ports 1 and 2.
USB ports 1 and 2 are
located under the
center console arm-
rest in the rear com-
partment.
Bluetooth Audio Devices connected
with the multimedia
system via Blue-
tooth
®
.
Rear Seat Entertainment System
33
Overview and operation
Accessing media in the vehicle
X
To show the menu: press the : button on
the remote control.
X
To select Devices: press the :=;
buttons on the remote control.
The discs/devices available are shown. The #
dot indicates the current setting.
X
Select the device/disc using the :9
buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.
If the device/disc contains music or video
files, these will be played.
Further information on media in the rear com-
partment(
Y page 209).
Character entry (telephony)
Writing a text message is used as an example.
Further information on writing a text message
(
Y page 132).
X
To select a character: turn and press the
controller.
The character selected in character bar ; is
entered into telephone number input line :.
X
To delete a character: switch to the bottom
line of the character bar by sliding 6 the
controller.
X
To select : turn and press the control-
ler.
The character last entered is deleted.
X
To switch the input line: switch to the bot-
tom line of the character bar by sliding 6
the controller.
X
To select 5: turn and press the controller.
or
X
Slide 5 the controller repeatedly until the
character bar disappears.
X
To select the input line for the text of the text
message: slide 6 and press the controller.
The input line for the text of the text message
is selected. The character bar has been adap-
ted for entering text.
X
To select a character: turn and press the
controller.
The character selected in character bar ? is
entered into text message input line =.
X
To delete a character: switch to the bottom
line of the character bar by sliding 6 the
controller.
X
To select : turn and press the control-
ler.
The character last entered is deleted.
X
To delete the entire entry: switch to the
bottom line of the character bar by sliding 6
the controller.
X
To select : turn and press the control-
ler, keeping it depressed until the entire entry
has been deleted.
34
Character entry (telephony)
Overview and operation
X
To change the country setting for the
character bar: switch to the bottom line of
the character bar by sliding 6 the control-
ler.
X
To select B: turn and press the controller.
The available languages are displayed.
X
To select the language: turn and press the
controller.
The country setting for the character bar has
been changed.
Functions in the character bar
R
Ä
Switches between digits and symbols
R
*
Switches to upper-case/lower-case letters
R
B
Changes the country setting for the character
bar
R
Deletes a character/an entry
R
45
Selects the input line
R
23
Moves the cursor within the input line
R
¬
Confirms an entry
R
&
Cancels input
R
S
Inserts a paragraph
Character entry (navigation)
Character entry options
You can enter characters using the controller, or
the telephone keypad or the touchpad, depend-
ing on the vehicle equipment. With the control-
ler, you enter characters using a character bar.
By pressing the corresponding key one or more
times, you can enter the characters via the tele-
phone keypad. To enter using the touchpad,
draw the character in the entry field. The multi-
media system supports this using a handwriting
recognition function.
Entering characters using the charac-
ter bar
:
Characters STUT entered by the user
(orange)
;
Characters automatically added by the mul-
timedia system EBÜLL
=
Switches to keyword search
?
Characters not currently available
A
Currently selected character
B
Characters currently available
C
Character bar
The example shows the address entry
(
Y page 72).
X
To select a character: turn and press the
controller.
Selected character : is entered in the upper
line. The multimedia system adds the missing
characters and shows the entry that best
matches the current input.
The characters are available B or not ?,
depending on the characters already entered
and the data stored in the digital map.
The G symbol indicates that an entry exists
more than once.
i
Alternatively, depending on the vehicle
equipment, you can enter characters using
the telephone keypad or the touchpad.
X
To delete a character: slide 6 and turn the
controller, then press it after selecting
.
X
To delete an entire entry: slide 6 and turn
the controller, then after selecting
press and hold down the controller until the
entire entry is deleted.
Character entry (navigation)
35
Overview and operation
i
Alternatively, you can also delete the entry
using the telephone keypad.
X
To switch to keyword search: slide 6 and
turn the controller, then press it after select-
ing = (
Y page 75).
X
To confirm an entry: slide 6 and turn the
controller, then press it after selecting¬.
or
X
Slide 5 the controller repeatedly until the
character bar disappears.
The location selection list appears. The selec-
ted entry is highlighted.
:
Cursor
;
Entry line
The example shows the character entry when
you save a destination as a navigable contact in
the address book (
Y page 73).
X
To select an input line: slide 6 and turn
the controller, then press it after selecting 4
or 5.
or
X
Slide 5 the controller repeatedly until the
character bar disappears.
X
Turn and press the controller.
X
To move the cursor: select the input line.
X
Slide 6 and turn the controller, then press it
after selecting 2 or 3.
X
To change the character bar language:
slide 6 and turn the controller, then press it
after selecting B.
A menu appears.
X
To select the language: turn and press the
controller.
The character set for the selected language is
set.
Functions in the character bar
R
Ä
Switches between digits and symbols
R
*
Switches the character bar to uppercase/
lowercase letters
R
B
Changes the country setting for the character
bar
R
Deletes a character/an entry
R
è
Switches to keyword search (
Y page 75)
R
45
Selects the input line
R
23
Moves the cursor within the input line
R
¬
Confirms an entry
R
&
Cancels input
Entering characters using the tele-
phone keypad
If your vehicle is equipped with a telephone key-
pad, you can also use this to enter characters.
X
For example, to enter the letter I: press the
n number key briefly three times in suc-
cession.
As soon as you touch the number key, the
number is highlighted in the additional display
area.
The character appears at the bottom of the
display the first time the key is pressed and
shows all the available characters. It switches
36
Character entry (navigation)
Overview and operation
to the next character each time the key is
pressed.
X
Wait until the character display goes out.
The selected character is entered in the input
line.
X
To delete the character: press the $
button.
X
To delete an entire entry: press and hold the
$ button until the entire entry is deleted.
Entering characters using the touch-
pad
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchpad, you
can also use this to enter characters
(
Y page 28). Character entry is supported by a
handwriting recognition function.
An example is the address entry (
Y page 72).
X
With one finger, draw the desired character,
e.g. the letter B
, on the touch-sensitive sur-
face.
In the list (e.g. City), the first entry that starts
with the letter entered is highlighted. You can
draw the next character on the touch-sensitive
surface.
If the character that you have entered can be
interpreted in different ways, these options are
displayed.
X
To select a character suggestion: turn the
controller.
The selected character is used for the list dis-
play instead of the automatically recognized
character. Character entry can be continued.
X
To delete a character: touch the touch-sen-
sitive surface with your finger and glide your
finger to the left.
The character last entered is deleted.
X
To complete the entry and switch to the
list: press the touchpad.
Favorites
Overview of favorites
:
To add a new favorite (Y page 38)
;
To rename a selected favorite
(
Y page 38)
=
To move a selected favorite (Y page 38)
?
To delete a selected favorite (Y page 38)
Displaying the favorites overview:
X
Press the favorites button on the controller.
The favorites are displayed.
X
To show the menu bar: slide 6 the control-
ler.
You can manage a total of 20 favorites.
Further information on how to select and display
a favorite (
Y page 37).
Displaying and selecting favorites
X
Press the favorites button on the controller.
The favorites are displayed.
X
To select a favorite: turn the controller.
X
To call up a favorite: press the controller.
Favorites
37
Overview and operation
Adding favorites
Adding predefined favorites
X
Press the favorites button on the controller.
X
To show the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Reassign: turn and press the con-
troller.
The categories and predefined favorites are
displayed.
R
Navigation
R
Entertainment
R
Tel
R
Vehicle
R
®
R
Climate Control
X
To select a category: turn the controller and
press to confirm.
The corresponding favorites are displayed.
X
To select a favorite: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To addafavorite at the desired position:
turn and press the controller.
If there is already a favorite at this position,
then this will be deleted.
Adding your own favorites
You can store phone numbers from the phone
book, radio stations or destinations as favorites.
A phone number from the phone book is used as
an example.
X
Call up the phone book (Y page 123).
X
Search for the contact and display the phone
number:(
Y page 124).
X
To addatelephone number as a favorite
at the desired position: press and hold the
favorites button on the controller until the
favorites are displayed.
X
Turn and press the controller.
If there is already a favorite at this position, it
will be deleted and replaced by a new one.
Renaming favorites
X
Press the favorites button on the controller.
The favorites are displayed.
X
To select the favorite to be renamed: turn the
controller.
X
To show the menu bar: slide 6 the control-
ler.
X
To select Rename: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
Enter characters using the controller
(
Y page 34) or the touchpad (Y page 30).
X
To finish the entry: select OK.
The favorite has been renamed.
Moving favorites
X
Press the favorites button on the controller.
The favorites are displayed.
X
To select the favorite to be moved: turn the
controller.
X
To show the menu bar: slide 6 the control-
ler.
X
To select Move: turn and press the controller.
X
To store the favorite in the desired order: turn
and press the controller.
The favorite has been moved.
If a favorite is stored over another favorite, the
favorite underneath is deleted.
Deleting favorites
X
Press the favorites button on the controller.
The favorites are displayed.
X
To select a favorite to be deleted: turn the
controller.
X
To show the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Delete: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
The favorite is deleted.
X
If you select No, the process will be canceled.
38
Favorites
Overview and operation
Your multimedia system equipment
These operating instructions describe all the
standard and optional equipment of your multi-
media system, as available at the time of going
to press. Country-specific differences are pos-
sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not
feature all functions described here. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and func-
tions.
Read the information on qualified specialist
workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you operate mobile communication equip-
ment while driving, you will be distracted from
traffic conditions. You could also lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate this equipment when the vehicle
is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating mobile communications equipment in
the vehicle.
Display settings
Setting the brightness
The brightness detected by the display light sen-
sor affects the setting options for this function.
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select System Settings: turn and press
the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Display: turn and press the con-
troller.
A menu appears.
X
Select Brightness.
A control appears.
X
Select the desired brightness.
i
The display brightness can be adjusted indi-
vidually for the two multimedia system dis-
plays at night using the controller.
Display design
The multimedia system display features an opti-
mized design for daytime and night-time opera-
tion. You can set the design by manually select-
ing day or night design or opt for an automatic
setting.
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select System Settings: turn and press
the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Display: turn and press the con-
troller.
A menu appears.
X
Select Day Mode, Night Mode or Auto.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
Design Explanation
Day Mode
The display is set perma-
nently to day design.
Night Mode
The display is set perma-
nently to night design.
Auto
The multimedia system
evaluates the data of the
light sensor and automat-
ically switches over the
display design.
Display settings
39
System settings
Z
Additional display area
General information
The additional display area occupies the left-hand or right-hand third of the display. The additional
display area allows you to view various items of additional information. For instance, you can display
an album cover in media mode or a permanent display, such as a small navigation map, in the
additional display area.
You can select the following display elements for the additional display area:
R
Context-dependent
In the additional display area, context-dependent information will be shown, e.g. an album cover
in media mode.
R
Navigation Map
The navigation map is shown in the additional area.
R
Entertainment Information
Entertainment information is shown in the additional area, e.g. album cover, artist and track.
R
SIRIUS Weather
SIRIUS weather information is shown in the additional area.
R
Consumption
Consumption information is shown in the additional area.
R
Energy Flow
Hybrid vehicles: the energy flow display is shown in the additional area.
R
Analog Clock
A clock is shown in the additional area.
Selecting display contents for the addi-
tional display area
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select System Settings: turn and press
the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Display: turn and press the con-
troller.
A menu appears.
40
Display settings
System settings
X
Select Additional Display Area.
A menu appears.
X
To select the desired display element: turn
and press the controller.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
Switching the display on/off
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
Slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Display Off: turn and press the
controller.
The display goes out.
X
To switch the display on again: press the
controller.
Time settings
General information
The multimedia system can automatically set
the time and date.
The following navigation system functions
require the time, time zone and summer/stand-
ard time to be set correctly in order to work
properly:
R
route guidance on routes with time-depend-
ent traffic guidance
R
calculation of expected time of arrival
Switching automatic time on and off
The Automatic Time Settings function is
used to activate or deactivate the automatic
setting of the time and date. This function is
activated when the vehicle leaves the factory.
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Time: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To switch Automatic Time Settings on O
or off ª: turn and press the controller.
Setting the time zone
To set the time zone, the Automatic Time
Settings function must be activated
(
Y page 41).
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Time: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Time Zone:: turn and press the
controller.
A list of countries appears. The # dot indi-
cates the current setting.
X
Select the country you are currently in by
turning and pressing the controller.
The country is accepted. A time zone list may
also be displayed, depending on the country
selected.
X
To select the desired time zone: turn and
press the controller.
The time zone is accepted.
A list of available options for setting summer
time appears (
Y page 41).
Setting summer and standard time
Using the Daylight Saving Time function,
you can set the automatic changeover to sum-
mer time or switch the summer time settings on
and off. The changeover to summer time advan-
ces the time by one hour.
The Daylight
Saving Time function or Auto‐
matic option is not available in all countries.
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
Time settings
41
System settings
Z
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Time: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Daylight Saving Time: turn and
press the controller.
A list of available options for setting summer
time appears.
X
To select Auto, On or Off: turn and press the
controller.
Setting Function
Automatic
The summer and
standard time are
automatically
changed over.
On
The clock is advanced
one hour ahead of
standard time.
Off
The standard time for
the chosen time zone
is selected.
Setting the time manually
Using the manual time settings, you can set the
time forward or back by up to several hours.
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Time: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Set Time Manually: turn and
press the controller.
An analog clock appears.
X
To set the hour: turn the controller.
X
To highlight minutes: slide 9 the control-
ler.
X
To set minutes: turn and press the controller.
The time is accepted. The Automatic Time
Settings function is deactivated ª.
If Automatic
is set for the summer time
changeover, you can choose whether the
automatic changeover should be maintained
between summer and winter time.
The Daylight Saving Time
function or
Automatic
option is not available in all coun-
tries.
i
If Automatic Time Settings is reactiva-
ted, the previous settings for time zone and
summer time changeover are restored.
Setting the time and date format
Use this function to set the time and date format
for all displays in the vehicle.
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Time: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Format: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
To select the desired date format: turn and
press the controller.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
X
To select the desired time format: turn and
press the controller.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
Abbreviation Meaning
YYYY/MM/DD
Year/Month/Day
date format, year (all
four digits)
YY/MM/DD
Year/Month/Day
date format, year
(two digits)
MM/DD/YYYY
Month/Day/Year
date format, year (all
four digits)
DD/MM/YYYY
Day/Month/Year
date format, year (all
four digits)
HH:MM (24 hrs)
Hours : Minutes
(24 hour time format)
HH:MM (AM/PM)
Hours : Minutes
(AM/PM time format)
42
Time settings
System settings
Text reader settings
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select System Settings: turn and press
the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Text Reader Speed: turn and
press the controller.
A list appears.
X
Select Fast, Medium or Slow.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
Voice Control System settings
Opening/closing the help window
i
If the set system language is not supported
by the Voice Control System, English will be
selected.
The help window also shows you information on
audible instructions:
R
during individualization
R
during subsequent operation of the Voice
Control System
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select System Settings: turn and press
the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Voice Control: turn and press the
controller.
X
To switch Help Window on O or off ª: turn
and press the controller.
Further information on the Voice Control Sys-
tem; see the separate operating instructions.
Individualization
Using individualization, you can fine-tune the
Voice Control System to your own voice. This
will help improve voice recognition; see the sep-
arate operating instructions.
Wi-Fi
Overview
Establishing a Wi-Fi connection between the
multimedia system and a Wi-Fi-enabled device,
such as a tablet computer or smartphone,
requires the following:
R
Wi-Fi must be activated on the multimedia
system and on the device to be connected.
If the multimedia system is to be used as a Wi-Fi
hotspot:
R
The multimedia system must be connected to
an Internet-enabled mobile phone via Blue-
tooth
®
or USB.
R
The Internet access data for the mobile phone
network provider must be selected or set in
the multimedia system.
R
An Internet connection must be established
on the multimedia system.
Activating Wi-Fi
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
Select System Settings.
Wi-Fi
43
System settings
Z
X
Select WiFi.
The Wi-Fi menu appears.
X
To switch Activate on O or off ª: turn and
press the controller.
Connecting the device
General notes
i
The exact Wi-Fi connection procedure may
vary depending on the device to be connec-
ted. Follow the instructions that are shown in
the display. Further information can be found
on the operating instructions for the device
you wish to connect.
Connecting a device via WPS PIN
Requirement: for this type of connection, the
device to be connected must support "Connect
using WPS PIN".
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
Select System Settings.
X
Select WiFi.
The Wi-Fi menu appears.
X
Select Connect via WPS PIN.
X
Select the vehicle from the device to be con-
nected and "Connect using WPS PIN". The
vehicle is displayed with the SSID MB WLAN
XXXXX.
The device to be connected generates a PIN.
X
Also enter this PIN into the multimedia sys-
tem.
Connecting a device via WPS PBC
Requirement: for this type of connection, the
device to be connected must support "Connect
via push button".
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
Select System Settings.
X
Select WiFi.
The Wi-Fi menu appears.
X
Select Connect via WPS PBC.
X
Select the vehicle from the device to be con-
nected and "Connect using WPS PBC". The
vehicle is displayed with the SSID MB WLAN
XXXXX.
X
Select Continue in the multimedia system.
Connecting the device via SSID and
security key
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
Select System Settings.
X
Select WiFi.
The Wi-Fi menu appears.
X
Select Connect Using Security Key.
X
Select the vehicle from the device to be con-
nected. The vehicle is displayed with the SSID
MB WLAN XXXXX
.
X
Enter the security key that appears on the
multimedia system display into the device to
be connected.
X
Confirm the entry.
Generating a new security key
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
Select System Settings.
X
Select WiFi.
The Wi-Fi menu appears.
X
Select Generate Security Key.
44
Wi-Fi
System settings
X
Select Regenerate.
A new security key is generated.
X
To save the security key: turn the controller
and select Save
.
The Wi-Fi menu appears. The new security key
will now be displayed and verified when a
connection is established via the security key.
The connection must be re-established with
the newly created security key.
i
Device connections established using the
previous security key will no longer work after
the security key is changed. You have to
reconnect these devices (
Y page 44).
Changing the name of the SSID
No characters can be entered while the vehicle
is in motion.
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
Select System Settings.
X
Select WiFi.
The Wi-Fi menu appears.
X
Select Change SSID.
A dialog for entering the SSID appears.
X
Enter the new SSID.
X
Select ¬.
X
Press the controller.
Now, when establishing a connection, the
vehicle will be shown with the new SSID both
on the device to be connected and in the
Connect Using Security Key
menu.
i
Device connections established using the
previous SSID will no longer work after the
SSID is changed. You have to reconnect these
devices (
Y page 44).
Remote control
To authorize a new remote control, please con-
tact a qualified specialist workshop (see vehicle
Operator's Manual).
You can also authorize your smartphone as a
remote control (
Y page 212).
Bluetooth
®
settings
General information about Blue-
tooth
®
Bluetooth
®
-capable devices, e. g. mobile
phones, need to comply with a certain profile in
order to be connected to the multimedia sys-
tem. Every Bluetooth
®
device has its own spe-
cific Bluetooth
®
name.
Bluetooth
®
technology is a standard for short-
range wireless data transmissions up to approx-
imately 10 m.
You can use Bluetooth
®
to connect your mobile
phone to the multimedia system, for example:
R
use the hands-free system
R
establish an Internet connection
R
listen to music using Bluetooth
®
Audio
R
exchange vCards
Bluetooth
®
is a registered trademark of Blue-
tooth Special Interest Group (SIG) Inc.
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth
®
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select System Settings: turn and press
the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To switch Activate Bluetooth on O or off
ª: turn and press the controller.
Bluetooth
®
settings
45
System settings
Z
Switching Near Field Communication
on/off
X
Press the Ø button.
The Vehicle
menu appears.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select System Settings: turn and press
the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To switch Near Field Communication on
O or off ª: turn and press the controller.
Automatic volume adjustment
General information
With the Automatic Volume Adjustment func-
tion, the volumes of different audio sources are
adjusted for each other, to compensate for rel-
ative differences in volume.
For example: changing from a relatively quiet to
a relatively loud radio station. The volume for
both stations sounds the same. Manual read-
justment of the volume is not required.
The Automatic Volume Adjustment
function
is deactivated ª when the vehicle leaves the
factory. Using this function, the dynamic range
of the music is slightly reduced. To make the
most of the audiophile sound quality, it is rec-
ommended to leave it off.
Switching the automatic volume
adjustment on/off
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select System Settings: turn and press
the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Automatic Volume Adjustment:
turn and press the controller.
Switch the Automatic Volume Adjustment
function on O or off ª.
Setting the system language
General information
This function allows you to determine the lan-
guage for the menu displays and the navigation
messages. The selected language affects the
characters available for entry.
i
The navigation announcements are not
available in all languages. If a language is not
available, the navigation announcements will
be in English.
i
When you set the system language, the lan-
guage of the Voice Control System will
change accordingly. If it is not supported by
the Voice Control System, English will be
selected.
Setting the system language
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select System Settings: turn and press
the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Language: turn and press the con-
troller.
The list of languages appears. The # dot indi-
cates the current setting.
X
Select the desired language.
The multimedia system loads the selected
language and sets it.
Assigning a favorites button
On vehicles with a touchpad, the Favorite
Functions function can be called up via the
system menu or via the favorites button on the
touchpad.
Calling up the Favorites function via the sys-
tem menu
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
46
Assigning a favorites button
System settings
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select System Settings: turn and press
the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Favorite Functions: press the
controller.
The favorites are displayed.
X
To select the desired function, for example
Phonebook
: turn and press the controller.
Calling up the Favorites function via the
touchpad
X
Press the favorites button on the touchpad.
The favorites are displayed.
X
To select the desired function, e.g. Phone‐
book: turn and press the controller.
Exiting the Favorites function
X
Press the Favorites button again.
or
X
Press the % button.
Further information on favorites (
Y page 37).
On vehicles with a telephone keypad, favorites
can be displayed by pressing the g button.
Favorites can be edited via the Favorite
Func‐
tions function in the system menu.
Assigning a favorites function to a button
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select System Settings: turn and press
the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Favorite Functions: press the
controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Assign Function: press the con-
troller.
The list of predefined functions appears.
X
To select the desired function, e.g. Enter‐
tainment: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
Select the desired function, e.g. Play More
Like This.
A menu appears with the prompt Please
select a favorites button:.
X
To select the desired button, e.g. m: turn
and press the controller.
A message appears stating that the button
has been assigned the selected function.
i
For certain functions, e.g. Assign Chan‐
nel/Station or Media Source, a message
appears. This explains how you can save the
desired station/channel directly from the
respective function menu in three steps.
Overview of all current favorites:
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select System Settings: turn and press
the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Favorite Functions: press the
controller.
A menu appears.
X
Select Overview of Current Favorites.
An overview of all the current favorites
appears.
Changing the alias:
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select System Settings: turn and press
the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Favorite Functions: press the
controller.
A menu appears.
X
Select Change Alias.
A menu appears with the prompt Please
select a favorites button:.
X
To select the desired favorite, e.g. n: turn
and press the controller.
X
Enter the desired alias and select b.
The alias is changed.
i
Up to six characters are available for the
alias. An entry with fewer characters is also
possible.
Assigning a favorites button
47
System settings
Z
Calling up a favorite
X
Press the g button.
You call up the favorites functions menu. The
g symbol lights up.
X
Press a favorites button, e.g. n.
This calls up the predefined function.
X
To exit the favorites function menu: press
the g button.
The favorite functions menu is closed.
i
If you only press the g button, you auto-
matically exit the favorites function menu
after 16 seconds.
Selecting predefined functions, for example:
R
Spoken Driving Recommendations On/
Off: to switch the current driving recommen-
dations on/off.
R
Sound Menu: to call up the sound settings.
R
Mercedes-Benz Apps: to call up apps for
online and Internet functions.
Resetting favorites
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select System Settings: turn and press
the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Favorite Functions: press the
controller.
A menu appears.
X
Select Reset Favorite(s).
A menu appears with the prompt Please
select a favorites button:.
X
Select the desired favorites, e.g. p or
Reset All
.
A prompt appears asking whether you wish to
reset.
X
Select Yes or No.
If you select Yes
, the favorite is reset to its
pre-installed favorite function.
If you select No
the process is canceled.
i
You can also assign the Favorites button
directly from a relevant function, such as in
the radio menu (
Y page 156).
Importing/exporting data
General notes
!
Never remove the stick or card when writing
data to the USB stick or the memory card. You
may otherwise lose data.
Using this function you can do the following with
your personal data:
R
transfer your data from one multimedia sys-
tem to another multimedia system
The transfer may be limited or not possible,
depending on the vehicle's equipment.
R
make a backup copy of your personal data
(export data) and load it again (import data)
R
protect your data from unwanted export by
activating a pin prompt (presetting: deactiva-
ted ª)
You can either use an SD card or a USB storage
device (e.g. a USB stick) as temporary storage.
You can obtain further information on data
import and export from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Activating/deactivating PIN protec-
tion
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select System Settings: turn and press
the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Data Import/Export: turn and
press the controller.
48
Importing/exporting data
System settings
X
To switch Activate PIN Protection on O
or off ª: turn and press the controller.
When activating PIN protection, you will be
prompted to enter a PIN.
X
To enter the 4-digit PIN and select ¬: turn
and press the controller.
You will be prompted to enter the PIN again.
X
Enter the PIN again and select ¬.
The PIN prompt now protects your personal
data from unwanted export.
i
If you deactivate your PIN protection, you
will first be prompted to enter your PIN. If you
have forgotten your PIN, an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center can deactivate your
PIN protection for you. Alternatively, you can
deactivate PIN protection by resetting your
personal data (
Y page 50).
Importing/exporting data
The following data can be exported:
R
address data
R
system settings that you have made
R
bookmarks
R
radio station lists
i
Personal music files in the MEDIA REGISTER
cannot be saved and imported again using
this function.
Mercedes-Benz is not liable for any loss of
data.
Connecting a USB storage device
X
Insert the SD memory card (Y page 170).
or
X
Connect a USB device (e.g. a USB memory
stick) (
Y page 170).
Importing or exporting data
i
If you import data such as address data, the
existing data on the multimedia system is
overwritten. You will see a message to this
effect. The multimedia system is restarted
after the data import.
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select System Settings: turn and press
the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Data Import/Export: turn and
press the controller.
X
Select Import Data or Export Data.
If PIN protection is activated, a PIN prompt
appears when you select Export Data
.
X
To enter the 4-digit PIN and select ¬: turn
and press the controller.
PIN protection is deactivated.
X
To select Memory Card, USB 1 or USB 2: turn
and press the controller.
This function exports all the data to the selec-
ted disc.
A window appears with the message that the
data has been exported.
Reset function
General information
You can reset the multimedia system to the fac-
tory settings. Resetting is recommended before
selling or transferring ownership of your vehicle,
for example.
This includes the deletion of all of your personal
data on the multimedia system. These include,
for example:
R
Station presets
R
Entries in the destination memory
R
Entries in the list of previous destinations in
the navigation system
R
address book entries
Data on the internal hard drive, e.g. music files in
the Media Register, will be deleted during a
reset. You can also delete music files from the
Reset function
49
System settings
Z
Media Register using the Delete All Media
Files function (Y page 176).
In addition, an activated PIN protection, which
you have used to protect your data against
unwanted export, will be deactivated during a
reset.
Mercedes-Benz is not liable for any loss of data.
Resetting the multimedia system
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select System Settings: turn and press
the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Reset: turn and press the controller.
A prompt appears asking whether you wish to
reset.
X
Select Yes.
A prompt appears again asking whether you
really wish to reset.
X
Select Yes.
A message appears. The multimedia system
is reset to the factory settings and restarted.
50
Reset function
System settings
Your multimedia system equipment
These operating instructions describe all the
standard and optional equipment of your multi-
media system, as available at the time of going
to press. Country-specific differences are pos-
sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not
feature all functions described here. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and func-
tions.
Read the information on qualified specialist
workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you operate mobile communication equip-
ment while driving, you will be distracted from
traffic conditions. You could also lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate this equipment when the vehicle
is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating mobile communications equipment in
the vehicle.
Vehicle settings
Calling up vehicle settings
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To select Vehicle Settings: turn and press
the controller.
The menu for the vehicle settings is active.
X
To select the desired vehicle setting: turn and
press the controller.
The main area with the setting element is
active.
Selecting a different vehicle setting:
X
To activate the menu for selecting the vehicle
setting: slide 5 the controller.
Exiting the vehicle settings:
X
To select &: slide 6 and press the con-
troller.
Ambient lighting
General notes
You can set the following for the ambient light-
ing:
R
Zone
The zone setting determines the area in which
the brightness setting is to be applied. If the
Complete zone is selected for longer than 0.5
seconds, the brightness of the Front zone is
adopted for the entire vehicle.
R
Brightness
This setting makes an additional change to
the brightness of the ambient lighting. The
brightness change is only effective for the
selected zone. For this reason, the zone for
which the brightness change is to be active
must be selected first.
R
Color
This setting changes the color of the ambient
lighting.
Setting the brightness of the zones
Vehicle settings
51
Vehicle functions
Z
X
Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 51).
X
To select Ambient Light: turn and press the
controller.
The left-hand setting element is active. The
brightness value for the currently selected
zone is displayed.
X
To change the brightness value: turn the con-
troller.
X
To select a zone: slide 9 and turn the con-
troller.
You can find further information in the vehicle
Operator's Manual.
Setting the color
i
Once a color is set, it is used for all zones.
The brightness of the color used can be set
separately for each zone.
X
Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 51).
X
To select Ambient Light Color: turn and
press the controller.
The setting element is active.
X
To select a color: turn the controller.
You can find further information in the vehicle
Operator's Manual.
Switching the display lighting on/off
This display lighting adjustment function is only
available if the vehicle is not equipped with the
"Ambient lighting" package.
X
Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 51).
X
To select Ambient Light: Display: turn
and press the controller.
The function switches on or off, depending on
the previous setting.
i
The brightness can be changed using the
control between the two displays.
You can find further information on the interior
lighting in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Setting the easy entry and exit feature
The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting in
and out of your vehicle easier. You can make the
following settings for the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT fea-
ture:
R
Steering Column
R
Steering Column and Seat
R
Off
X
Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 51).
X
To select Easy Entry/Exit: turn and press
the controller.
The setting element is active.
X
To change the setting: turn the controller.
When you activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT fea-
ture, the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is
also activated.
You can find further information on the crash-
responsive EASY-EXIT feature in the vehicle
Operator's Manual.
Activating/deactivating the panel
heating
52
Vehicle settings
Vehicle functions
The panel heating function warms the surfaces
with which the vehicle occupants frequently
come into contact. Activation of the panel heat-
ing via the multimedia system as described
below only works if seat heating is activated (see
the vehicle Operator's Manual).
X
Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 51).
X
To select Panel Heating: turn and press the
controller.
X
To change the setting: turn the controller.
Activating/deactivating the acoustic
locking verification signal
You can also set an audible signal to confirm
that the vehicle has been locked.
X
Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 51).
X
To select Acoustic Lock Feedback: turn
and press the controller.
The function switches on or off, depending on
the previous setting.
You can find further information on the locking
feature in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Switching the seat belt adjustment
on/off
The seat-belt adjustment function adjusts the
driver's and front-passenger seat belt to the
upper body of the occupants.
X
Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 51).
X
To select Belt Adjustment: turn and press
the controller.
The function switches on or off, depending on
the previous setting.
You can find further information in the vehicle
Operator's Manual.
Switching the automatic mirror fold-
ing function on/off
When the Automatic Mirror Folding func-
tion is activated, the outside mirrors fold in auto-
matically as soon as you lock the vehicle from
the outside. The outside mirrors fold out auto-
matically again as soon as you unlock the vehi-
cle.
X
Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 51).
X
To select Automatic Mirror Folding: turn
and press the controller.
The function switches on or off, depending on
the previous setting.
You can find further information in the vehicle
Operator's Manual.
Switching locator lighting on/off
If you switch on the Locator Lighting func-
tion, the exterior lighting is switched on for a
short time when it is dark. The light switch must
be set to Ã.
The exterior lighting remains on for 40 seconds
after the vehicle is unlocked. When you start the
engine, the locator lighting is switched off and
the automatic driving lights are activated.
Vehicle settings
53
Vehicle functions
Z
You can find further information on the auto-
matic headlamp mode in the vehicle Operator's
Manual.
Switching locator lighting on/off
X
Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 51).
X
To select Locator Lighting: turn and press
the controller.
The function switches on or off, depending on
the previous setting.
You can find further information in the vehicle
Operator's Manual.
Activating/deactivating the auto-
matic door locking mechanism
When the automatic locking feature is switched
on, the vehicle is locked automatically when the
ignition is switched on and the vehicle is travel-
ing faster than walking pace.
X
Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 51).
X
To select Automatic Locking: turn and
press the controller.
The function switches on or off, depending on
the previous setting.
You can find further information in the vehicle
Operator's Manual.
Setting the switch-off delay time
Interior lighting switch-off delay time
The interior lighting is activated for the duration
of the switch-off delay time when the SmartKey
is removed from the ignition lock.
X
Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 51).
X
To select Interior Lighting Delayed
Switch-off: turn and press the controller.
The setting element is active.
X
To change the switch-off delay time: turn the
controller.
You can find further information in the vehicle
Operator's Manual.
Exterior lighting switch-off delay time
If you switch on the Exterior Lighting
Delayed Switch-off function, the exterior
lighting is switched on for a short time after the
engine is switched off. The light switch must be
set to Ã.
The duration of the exterior lighting delayed
switch-off time can be adjusted individually. The
exterior lighting remains on for the maximum
duration of 60 seconds after the engine is
switched off. If you close all the doors and the
tailgate, the exterior lighting switches off after
the set time.
54
Vehicle settings
Vehicle functions
X
Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 51).
X
To select Exterior Lighting Delayed
Switch-off: turn and press the controller.
The setting element is active.
X
To change the switch-off delay time: turn the
controller.
Arming/disarming the tow-away
alarm
An audible and visual alarm is triggered if your
vehicle's angle of inclination is altered while the
tow-away alarm is armed. This can occur if the
vehicle is jacked up on one side, for example.
X
Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 51).
X
To select Tow-away Alarm: turn and press
the controller.
The function switches on or off, depending on
the previous setting.
Activating/deactivating the interior
motion sensor
When the interior motion sensor is activated, a
visual and audible alarm is triggered if move-
ment is detected in the vehicle interior. This can
occur if someone reaches into the vehicle inte-
rior without authorization, for example.
X
Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 51).
X
To select Interior Motion Sensor: turn
and press the controller.
The function switches on or off, depending on
the previous setting.
Activating/deactivating the trunk lid
opening height restriction
Activating the Trunk Opening-height
Restriction function allows you to avoid
bumping the trunk lid on a low garage ceiling, for
example.
X
Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 51).
X
To select Trunk Opening-height
Restriction: turn and press the controller.
The function switches on or off, depending on
the previous setting.
Voice amplification
Overview
The voice amplification function supports com-
munication between the driver and front
passenger with passengers in the rear compart-
ment. The signals picked up by the microphone
in the rear view mirror are amplified and played
back over the speakers in the rear compart-
ment, depending upon vehicle noise levels.
An automatic adjustment matching occurs
based on speaker volume and ambient noise.
The optimum distance of the speaker from the
rear view mirror is approximately 50 cm. When
the system is active, the feeling of space and the
naturalness of speech playback should be main-
tained as far as is possible; speech intelligibility
should be improved when there is an increase in
background noise.
Vehicle settings
55
Vehicle functions
Z
If the volume of a background media source
exceeds a threshold, the speech amplification is
stopped. The threshold is designed for relaxed
conversation with background music. If the
threshold value is not exceeded, the voice
amplification is continued with a slight time
delay.
Voice amplification is paused during active tele-
phone calls or when using the Voice Control
System. A message will appear in the display.
You can assign these functions to the favorites
button (
Y page 46).
Requirements
R
Your vehicle is equipped with the Burmester
®
surround sound system or the Burmester
®
high-end 3D surround sound system.
R
The ignition is switched on.
R
Doors, side windows and the panorama roof
with power tilt/sliding panel are closed.
i
If these conditions are not met, a corre-
sponding message will appear in the display.
Closing the side windows (see the vehicle Oper-
ator's Manual).
Closing the panorama roof with power tilt/slid-
ing panel (see the vehicle Operator's Manual).
Activating/deactivating voice amplifi-
cation
X
Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 51).
X
To select Voice Amplification: turn and
press the controller.
The function switches on or off, depending on
the previous setting.
Seats
Overview
Using the T button next to the controller or
the seat settings menu item in the vehicle menu,
you can call up the following adjustment func-
tions:
R
Backrest side bolsters
R
Lumbar
R
Shoulder area
R
Massage
R
Dynamics
R
Seat heating balance
i
You also can save and recall the current set-
tings of a seat function using the memory
button and the corresponding memory posi-
tion switch. You can find further information
on the memory function in the vehicle Oper-
ator's Manual.
Selecting the adjustment function
and seat
X
Press the T button.
The seat settings menu is shown.
or
X
To select Vehicle from the main function bar:
turn and press the controller.
X
To select Seat Settings in the menu: turn
and press the controller.
The menu for selecting seat functions is acti-
vated.
X
To select the required seat function: turn and
press the controller.
X
To switch between Driver and Front
Passenger: slide 1 the controller.
56
Seats
Vehicle functions
Adjustment functions
Adjusting the backrest side bolsters
X
Call up the seat functions(Y page 56).
X
To select Backrest Sides: turn and press
the controller.
X
To select a seat: slide 1 the controller.
X
To change the setting: turn the controller.
You will see the changes you have made in the
settings display.
X
To exit the menu: press the % button.
Adjusting the seat contour in the lum-
bar region of the seat backrest
This function allows you to adjust the air cush-
ions in the lumbar region of the backrest (4-way
lumbar support).
X
Call up the seat functions(Y page 56).
X
To select Lumbar: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
To select a seat: slide 1 the controller.
X
To activate the setting element: press the
controller.
X
To change the setting: slide 4 or 1
the controller.
The change will be visible in the setting ele-
ment.
X
To exit the menu: press the % button.
Adjusting the shoulder area
X
Call up the seat functions(Y page 56).
X
To select Shoulders: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select a seat: slide 1 the controller.
X
To change the setting: turn the controller.
You will see the changes you have made in the
settings display.
X
To exit the menu: press the % button.
Adjusting the driving dynamics
X
Call up the seat functions(Y page 56).
X
To select a seat: slide 1 the controller.
X
To select Dynamic Multicontour Seat:
turn and press the controller.
You can select:
R
0: Off
R
1: Level 1 (weak)
R
2: Level 2 (strong)
Seats
57
Vehicle functions
Z
X
To select the setting: turn the controller.
X
To exit the menu: press the % button.
Seat heating balance
The balance function controls the distribution of
heat on the seat backrest and cushion.
The balance function influences the currently
set heating level of the seat heating (see the
vehicle Operator's Manual).
X
Call up the seat functions (Y page 56).
X
To select Seat Heating Balance: turn and
press the controller.
X
To select a seat: slide 1 the controller.
X
To change the setting: turn the controller.
You will see the changes you have made in the
settings display.
The settings represent the following:
R
0 the backrest and seat cushion are evenly
heated according to the setting selected with
the seat heating button.
R
1 to 3 increasing the heat output to the seat
cushion is reduced one level at a time.
R
1 to 3 decreasing the heat output for the
backrest is reduced one level at a time.
X
To exit the menu: press the % button.
Massage programs
Overview
You can select the following massage programs:
R
Hot Relaxing Massage, Back
Relaxing massage program starting in the pel-
vic area, warm pressure points can be felt, full
back massage, stretching the pelvic area,
ending with gentle soothing movements
R
Hot Relaxing Massage, Shoulders
Relaxing massage program starting in the pel-
vic area, warm pressure points can be felt, full
back massage, stretching the pelvic area,
ending with gentle soothing movements
R
Activating Massage
Activating massage through increasing twin-
waves and then soothing movements
R
Classic Massage
Massage with increasing waves, soothing
movements
R
Mobilizing Massage
Mobilization of the spinal column and the
complete upper body by means of pressure
point mobilizing massage at chest height
R
Active Workout
The Active Workout program requires your
active participation. It is suitable for training
your stomach muscles during a traffic jam, for
example, by means of targeted tensing and
relaxing. You can use the program to be
sporty in the vehicle.
As soon as you feel a pressure point in the
backrest cushion, this indicates that you
should press against this point.
-
As soon as you feel pressure on your back,
press against it.
-
Keep the pressure under your feet even. Do
not wedge yourself against the pedals.
-
You will feel how your stomach muscles
tense.
-
Continue to breathe normally, do not hold
your breath.
-
When the pressure in the backrest cushion
stops, stop pressing against it and relax
briefly.
Selecting a massage program
58
Seats
Vehicle functions
X
Call up the seat functions (Y page 56).
X
To select Massage: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select a seat: slide 1 the controller.
X
To select massage programs: turn and press
the controller.
The massage program runs for approximately
15 to 25 minutes, depending on the setting.
X
To change the massage intensity: turn the
controller to : and press to confirm.
The intensity changes between gentle and
vigorous each time the controller is pressed.
X
To exit the menu: press the % button.
Resetting all adjustments
X
Call up the seat functions (Y page 56).
X
Select a seat (Y page 56).
X
To select Reset: turn and press the controller.
X
To select a seat: slide 1 the controller.
X
To reset: press the controller.
A prompt appears.
X
To select Yes or No: turn and press the con-
troller.
If you select No
the process is canceled.
After selecting Yes
all seat adjustments are
reset to the default values (factory setting).
Climate control settings
Overview
You have the following options for adjusting cli-
mate control settings:
R
using the climate control bar
R
using the climate control menu
You can set the most important climate control
functions such as temperature, airflow and air
distribution using the climate control bar. The
climate control bar is visible in most displays.
You can find all the climate control functions in
the climate control menu. You can use the cli-
mate control bar (
Y page 59) to switch to the
climate control menu.
Settings in the climate control bar
Overview
You can set the most important climate control
functions directly in the climate control bar and
change them in the climate control menu.
:
Adjusts temperature, airflow and air distri-
bution, left, as well as displaying the current
setting
;
Calls up the climate control menu, displays
the current cooling and climate mode set-
ting
=
Adjusts air distribution, airflow and temper-
ature on the right and displays the current
settings
Switching to the climate control bar:
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
Slide 6, release, then slide 6 again, turn
and press the controller.
A menu appears.
Calling up the climate control bar
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
Slide 6 the controller repeatedly until the
climate control bar is activated.
Climate control settings
59
Vehicle functions
Z
Setting the temperature
X
Calling up the climate control bar
(
Y page 59)
X
To select the current temperature on the left
or right: turn and press the controller.
The temperature setting scale appears.
X
To change the setting: turn the controller.
i
You can also use the climate control menu
(
Y page 60) to set the temperature.
Setting the airflow
X
Calling up the climate control bar
(
Y page 59)
X
To select J on the left or right: turn and
press the controller.
The airflow setting scale appears.
X
To change the setting: turn the controller.
i
You can also use the climate control menu
(
Y page 60) to set the airflow.
Setting the air distribution
X
Calling up the climate control bar
(
Y page 59)
X
To select the current air distribution display
on the left or right, e.g. O: turn and press
the controller.
The air distribution setting scale appears.
X
To change the setting: turn the controller.
i
You can also use the climate control menu
(
Y page 60) to set the air distribution.
Settings in the climate menu
Overview
In the climate control menu there are settings
available in the bottom bar and the main area.
Calling up the climate control menu
X
Switch to the climate control bar (Y page 59).
X
To select from climate control bar ;: turn
and press the controller.
The menu for selecting climate control func-
tions is activated.
X
To select the desired climate control function:
turn and press the controller.
The selected climate control function
appears.
60
Climate control settings
Vehicle functions
Activating/deactivating climate con-
trol
This setting is made in the bottom bar of the
climate control menu.
X
Call up the climate control menu(Y page 60).
X
To switch to the footer: slide 6 the control-
ler.
X
To select O Climate Ctrl On: turn and
press the controller.
The climate control is switched on O or off ª
depending on the settings.
If the climate control is switched off:
R
the climate control setting functions are
deactivated.
R
the blower is switched off.
R
the air recirculation flaps are closed
Activating/deactivating cooling with
air dehumidification
This setting is made in the bottom bar of the
climate control menu.
i
Activating the cooling with air dehumidifi-
cation facilitates the cooling of the vehicle
interior even with high outside temperatures.
X
Call up the climate control menu(Y page 60).
X
To switch to the footer: slide 6 the control-
ler.
X
To select O A/C: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
The cooling with air dehumidification function
is activated O or deactivated ª.
i
The current status of the cooling function is
displayed in the climate control bar: A/C ON
activated, A/C OFF–deactivated
(
Y page 59).
i
Deactivating the cooling with air dehumidi-
fication function reduces fuel consumption.
Activating/deactivating the synchroni-
zation function
This setting is made in the bottom bar of the
climate control menu.
With the O
Sync (synchronization) option, you
can decide whether you wish to activate the cli-
mate control settings for all zones together or
separately.
X
Call up the climate control menu(Y page 60).
X
To switch to the footer: slide 6 the control-
ler.
X
To select O Sync: turn and press the con-
troller.
The synchronization function is activated O
or deactivated ª.
With the synchronization function switched off,
you can alternate between driver and front
passenger.
X
To switch from the footer to the main area:
slide 5 the controller.
X
To switch between left and right: slide 1
the controller.
Not all climate control functions allow switch-
ing between the driver and front passenger.
Further information on the synchronization
function (see the vehicle Operator's Manual).
Rear-compartment climate control set-
tings
This setting is made in the bottom bar of the
climate control menu.
You can also set the rear-compartment air con-
ditioning from the front.
X
Call up the climate control menu(Y page 60).
X
To switch to the footer: slide 6 the control-
ler.
X
To select Rear Setting: turn and press the
controller.
Setting rear-compartment climate control is
switched on. The vehicle interior display
changes accordingly.
X
To switch the setting back to the front again:
select Return to Front
.
Afterashort time, the multimedia system
automatically switches the adjustment func-
tions back to the front.
Climate control settings
61
Vehicle functions
Z
Adjusting the footwell temperature
This setting is made in the main area of the cli-
mate control menu.
X
Call up the climate control menu(Y page 60).
X
To select Adjust Footwell: turn and press
the controller.
X
If necessary, change sides: slide 1 the
controller.
X
To change the setting: turn the controller.
X
To exit the menu: press the % button.
Adjusting the climate mode settings
This setting is made in the main area of the cli-
mate control menu.
The setting is only active when the air-condi-
tioning system is set to à (see the vehicle
Operator's Manual).
X
Call up the climate control menu(Y page 60).
X
To select Climate Mode: turn and press the
controller.
X
If necessary, change sides: slide the control-
ler to the left 8 or to the right 9.
X
To change the setting: turn the controller.
X
To exit the menu: press the % button.
The current airflow setting is shown in the cli-
mate control bar: DIFFUSE
, MEDIUM or FOCUS
(Y page 59).
Setting the perfume atomizer
This setting is made in the main area of the cli-
mate control menu.
Further information about the perfume atomizer
(see the vehicle Operator's Manual).
X
Call up the climate control menu(Y page 60).
X
To select Air Freshener: turn and press the
controller.
The setting element is active.
X
To start/stop the perfume atomizer: press
the controller.
X
To set the intensity: turn the controller when
the atomizer is switched on.
X
To exit the menu: press the % button.
Switching ionization on/off
This setting is made in the main area of the cli-
mate control menu.
Further information on ionization (see the vehi-
cle Operator's Manual).
X
Call up the climate control menu(Y page 60).
X
To select Ionization: turn and press the
controller.
The setting element is active.
X
To switch the ionization on or off: turn the
controller.
X
To exit the menu: press the % button.
62
Climate control settings
Vehicle functions
Pre-entry climate control via SmartKey
This function is only available for
PLUGIN HYBRID vehicles.
When you unlock the vehicle, the driver's seat
and the vehicle interior:
R
is briefly pre-heated
R
is briefly pre-ventilated
X
Call up the climate control menu (Y page 60).
X
To select Pre-entry Climate Control
via Key: turn and press the controller.
X
To switch on or off: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To exit the menu: press the % button.
Further information on pre-entry climate control
via SmartKey (see the vehicle Operator's Man-
ual).
Pre-entry climate control at time of
departure
This function is only available for
PLUGIN HYBRID vehicles.
The driver's seat and the vehicle interior are
heated or cooled prior to the set departure time.
X
Call up the climate control menu (Y page 60).
X
To selectPre-entry Climate Ctrl. at
Departure Time: turn and press the control-
ler.
A rotary menu appears.
X
To select the setting: turn the controller.
The menu symbol, text and image show the
selected setting.
X
To exit the menu: press the % button.
Further information on pre-entry climate control
(see the vehicle Operator's Manual).
Child-proof locks
Switching the rear compartment dis-
plays on/off
This function serves to switch the rear-compart-
ment displays on/off.
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To select Parental Control: turn and press
the controller.
The menu to select the side in the rear com-
partment is activated.
X
Select Rear Left or Rear Right.
X
To switch Display on/off: turn the controller.
Exiting the vehicle settings:
X
To select &: slide 6 and press the con-
troller.
Locking/unlocking rear compart-
ment displays
This function serves to lock/unlock the rear-
compartment displays.
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
Child-proof locks
63
Vehicle functions
Z
X
To select Parental Control: turn and press
the controller.
The menu to select the side in the rear com-
partment is activated.
X
Select Rear Left or Rear Right.
X
To select Lock to lock/unlock the rear com-
partment displays: slide 9 and press the
controller.
The display is locked, a corresponding mes-
sage with & appears on the screen.
Unlock
appears in the display.
Exiting the vehicle settings:
X
To select &: slide 6 and press the con-
troller.
i
The volume can still be adjusted if you have
locked the rear compartment display. It can
also be switched on/off using the integrated
switch.
360° camera
General notes
The 360° camera covers the immediate sur-
roundings of the vehicle and assists you, for
instance when parking or at exits with reduced
visibility.
The 360° camera is only an aid. It is not a
replacement for your attention to your immedi-
ate surroundings. You are always responsible
for safe maneuvering and parking. Make sure
that no persons or animals are in the maneu-
vering range.
Further information on the 360°camera can be
found in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Displaying the 360° camera image
The 360° camera image can be displayed if:
R
your vehicle is equipped with a 360° camera
R
the multimedia system is switched on
R
the 360° Camera function is switched on
X
Press the Ø button.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
Select 360° Camera.
The 360° camera image appears in split-
screen mode.
You will see the previous view on the display if,
when the function is switched on:
R
you turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the
ignition lock
R
you select transmission position P
R
when you are driving at moderate speeds
Manually switching the display
X
To select &: slide 6 and press the con-
troller.
Automatically switching the display:
X
You can switch on the 360 camera display
automatically using the reverse gear
(
Y page 64).
Switching automatic mode of the
360° camera on/off
This function activates the 360° camera when
reverse gear is engaged.
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select System Settings: turn and press
the controller.
X
Select 360° Camera.
X
Select Activation by R gear.
The function is switched on O or off ª,
depending on the previous status.
Opening the camera cover for clean-
ing
X
To select Open Camera Cover in the 360°
camera menu: turn the controller and press to
confirm.
The Please Wait...
message appears for
approximately three seconds.
The camera cover opens.
The camera cover closes automatically if:
R
the ignition is switched off
R
the vehicle exceeds a moderate speed
64
360° camera
Vehicle functions
Rear view camera
General notes
The rear view camera covers the immediate sur-
roundings of the vehicle and assists you when
parking.
The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a
replacement for your attention to your immedi-
ate surroundings. You are always responsible
for safe maneuvering and parking. When maneu-
vering or parking, make sure that there are no
persons, animals or objects in the area in which
you are maneuvering.
You can find further information about the rear
view camera in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Switching the rear view camera auto-
matic mode on/off
This function activates the rear view camera
when reverse gear is engaged.
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
Slide 6 the controller.
X
To select System Settings: turn and press
the controller.
X
Select Rear View Camera.
The Rear View Camera
menu appears.
X
Select Activation by R gear.
The function is switched on O or off ª,
depending on the previous status.
When you start the vehicle and engage
reverse gear, the camera cover opens auto-
matically if the function is activated. The area
behind the vehicle is shown with guide lines in
the display (see the vehicle Operator's Man-
ual).
Object detection
The rear view camera can detect moving and
stationary objects. If, for example, a pedestrian
or another vehicle is detected, these objects are
marked with bars. The system is only able to
detect and mark stationary objects when your
vehicle is moving. By contrast, stationary
objects will always be detected and marked.
Switching object detection on/off
X
To select Object Detection in the rear view
camera menu: turn and press the controller.
The function is switched on O or off ª,
depending on the previous status.
Opening the camera cover for clean-
ing
X
To select Open Camera Cover in the rear
view camera menu: turn and press the con-
troller.
The Please Wait...
message appears for
approximately three seconds.
The camera cover opens.
The camera cover closes automatically if:
R
the ignition is switched off
R
the vehicle pulls away
Rear view camera
65
Vehicle functions
Z
Your multimedia system equipment
These operating instructions describe all the
standard and optional equipment of your multi-
media system, as available at the time of going
to press. Country-specific differences are pos-
sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not
feature all functions described here. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and func-
tions.
Read the information on qualified specialist
workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Introduction
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
cle while driving, you will be distracted from
traffic conditions. You could also lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate the equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
ment when the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
The multimedia system calculates the route to
the destination without taking account of the
following, for example:
R
traffic lights
R
stop and yield signs
R
merging lanes
R
parking or stopping in a no parking/no stop-
ping zone
R
other road and traffic rules and regulations
R
narrow bridges
The multimedia system can give incorrect navi-
gation commands if the actual street/traffic sit-
uation does not correspond with the digital
map's data. Digital maps do not cover all areas
no
r all routes in an area. For example, a route
may have been diverted or the direction of a one-
way street may have changed.
For this reason, you must always observe road
and traffic rules and regulations during your
journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations
always have priority over the system's driving
recommendations.
Navigation announcements are intended to
direct you while driving without diverting your
attention from the road and driving.
Please always use this feature instead of con-
sulting the map display for directions. Looking
at the icons or map display can distract you from
traffic conditions and driving, and increase the
risk of an accident.
General notes
Operational readiness of the navigation
system
The navigation system must determine the posi-
tion of the vehicle before first use or whenever
operational status is restored. Therefore, you
may have to drive forawhile before precise
route guidance is possible.
GPS reception
Among other things, correct functioning of the
navigation system depends on GPS reception. In
certain situations, GPS reception may be
impaired, there may be interference or there
may be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels or
parking garages.
Using roof carriers may impair the correct func-
tioning of a roof antenna (phone, satellite radio,
GPS).
Entry restriction
In certain countries, data entry is restricted if
the vehicle is traveling at more than approx-
imately 3 mph (5 km/h). The restriction is deac-
tivated as soon as the vehicle speed drops
below about 2 mph (3 km/h).
When the restriction is active, certain entries
cannot be made. This will be indicated by the
fact that certain menu items are grayed out and
cannot be selected.
The following entries are not possible, for exam-
ple:
R
entering the destination city and street
R
enteringadestination via the map
66
Introduction
Navigation
R
entering POIs in the vicinity of a city or via a
name search
R
editing entries
R
direct entry via the telephone keypad (if avail-
able)
Other entries are possible, such as entering
points of interest in the vicinity of the destina-
tion or current position.
Switching to navigation mode
X
Press the ß button.
If route guidance is active, the map is shown in full-screen mode. The map shows the vehicle's
current position.
If no route guidance is active, the menu is also displayed. Destination
is highlighted.
Additional activation option:
X
To activate the menu: slide 5 the controller (e.g. in radio mode).
X
To select Navi: turn and press the controller.
Access within navigation:
X
From any menu, press the ß button.
The navigation menu appears.
X
Press the controller.
The map shows the vehicle's current position.
Showing/hiding the menu
Using the menu, you can make a destination entry or select the navigation settings, for example.
If no route guidance is active, the menu appears automatically after the navigation system is
switched on. Destination
is highlighted.
X
To show: slide 6 the controller when the map is shown in full-screen mode.
or
X
Swipe down the touchpad with one finger.
If there has been no route calculated, Destination
is marked.
If a route has been calculated, y is marked.
Introduction
67
Navigation
Z
X
To hide: press the % button.
or
X
Slide 5 the controller.
Full-screen symbol : is selected.
X
Press the controller.
Moving the map
Requirement: the map is in full screen mode, the menu is faded out (Y page 67).
X
Press the controller.
The crosshair is shown.
X
Slide 1, 4 or 2 the controller.
The map moves in the corresponding direction under the crosshair.
X
To select a destination on the map: press the controller.
If navigable destinations are available, they will be displayed in a list.
X
Turn and press the controller.
X
To show the menu: press the controller.
X
Select Menu.
68
Introduction
Navigation
Basic settings
Selecting the route type
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Route Settings.
X
Select a route type.
A filled circle indicates the current selection.
R
With active route guidance, the multimedia
system calculates a new route.
Route guidance active: a destination has
been entered and the route has been cal-
culated.
R
If there has been no route calculated, the
multimedia system uses the selection as
the new basic setting.
Fast Route
The multimedia system cal-
culates a route with a short
travel time.
Dynamic
Traffic
Route
Based on the Fast Route
route type and includes traf-
fic reports on the route for the
route guidance.
You can receive real-time
traffic reports via satellite
radio (
Y page 96).
Eco Route
The multimedia system cal-
culates an economical route.
The journey may take slightly
longer compared to taking
the fast route.
Short
Route
The multimedia system cal-
culates a short distance
route.
X
To calculate alternative routes: select
Calculate Alternative Routes
.
Switch the function on O or off ª.
Function activated: after each route calcula-
tion, route alternatives are offered that cor-
respond to the local conditions (
Y page 93).
If desired, you can have the navigation system
calculate alternative routes even during route
guidance (
Y page 93).
Setting route options
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Route Settings.
X
To avoid/use route options: select Avoid
Options.
A menu appears.
X
Select one of the options.
O: using or avoiding route options is enabled
ª: using or avoiding route options is disabled
R
Avoid Area (Y page 105)
It is possible to avoid areas you do not wish to
drive through.
R
Avoid Highways
R
Avoid Ferries
R
Avoid Auto Trains
R
Avoid Tunnels
R
Avoid Unpaved Roads
The function is not available in all countries.
R
Use Toll Roads
The route calculation includes roads which
require you to pay a usage fee (toll).
R
Use Carpool Lanes
Basic settings
69
Navigation
Z
If your vehicle meets the access conditions
for carpool lanes, you can use this function.
Navigation includes carpool lanes if the car-
pool lanes option is activated.
Depending on local conditions, the multimedia
system may not always be able to include all
route options. A route may include a ferry, for
instance, even though Avoid Ferries
is ena-
bled. The multimedia system will notify you of
this visually as well as through a navigation mes-
sage.
X
To use toll roads: turn and press the con-
troller.
A menu appears.
X
Select an option.
The options include using roads that require
cash payment or electronic billing, or switch-
ing off the function.
X
To exit a menu: slide 1 the controller.
Selecting announcements
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Settings.
A menu appears.
X
Select an option.
Switch the option on O or off ª.
Announce
Street
Names
The multimedia system
announces the name of the
road onto which the upcoming
change of direction leads.
The function is not available in
all countries.
Audio
Fadeout
The volume of an active media
source is automatically
reduced during a navigation
announcement.
Gas on
Reserve
Function activated: once the
reserve fuel tank level is
reached, a message appears in
the multimedia system to help
you start the search for a gas
station.
Atten‐
tion
Assist
Function activated: if ATTEN-
TION ASSIST displays a warn-
ing in the multifunction display,
a message appears in the mul-
timedia system to help you
start the search for a rest stop.
If a route contains highways, a
rest stop search is started in
the vicinity. The map is shown
with the message: Searching
For a Rest Area in the
Vicinity…. If service stations
are found, the nearest service
station is highlighted on the
map.
Further information about
ATTENTION ASSIST can be
found in the vehicle Operator's
Manual.
Using car pool lanes
You can include carpool lanes (HOV or car shar-
ing lanes) in the route calculation.
If you use HOV or carpool lanes, please observe
the applicable laws as well as the local and time
limitation conditions.
Carpool lanes may only be used under certain
conditions. They can normally be used when
there are two people in the vehicle. However,
70
Basic settings
Navigation
there are also carpool lanes which can only be
used when there are three or more people in the
vehicle. In California, lone drivers can use a car-
pool lane if their vehicle's emission level or fuel
consumption is below a fixed threshold.
Carpool lanes may be reserved for specific
times (e.g. during the peak period).
Carpool lanes are indicated by a diamond sym-
bol on specific road signs and on the road sur-
face. The road signs may also include the des-
ignation CARPOOL. The lanes are arranged as a
separate lane next to the others or are built as a
physically separate lane.
Depending on the setting under Use Carpool
Lanes, the multimedia system uses carpool
lanes when calculating the route. The multime-
dia system then guides you in and out of carpool
lanes using visual and acoustic driving direc-
tions.
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
ß button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Route Settings.
X
Select Avoid Options.
X
Select Use Carpool Lanes.
Carpool lanes will either be used O or avoi-
ded ª when calculating the route.
Destination entry
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle while
driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle.
There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is
possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when
the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
Destination entry may be blocked while driving, depending on the country specifications.
General notes
The various character entry options are described for the controller. Alternatively you can use the
touchpad to enter characters and select menus (
Y page 28).
Destination entry
71
Navigation
Z
Using an address
Calling up the address entry menu
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the controller.
X
Select Address Entry.
Address entry options
Examples of how you can enter an address:
R
City/ZIP code, street, house number
R
City/ZIP code, street
R
City/ZIP code, center
R
City/ZIP code, street, intersection
R
Street, City/ZIP code, house number
R
Street, City/ZIP code, intersection
The address can be entered faster by entering
the street before the city if the address has an
unusual street name.
While entering an address, you can also switch
to other destination entry options:
R
Keyword search (Y page 75)
R
Map (Y page 80)
R
POI (Y page 77)
Entering an address
The example shows how to enter an address,
e.g. for your home address.
X
In the address entry menu, select Street:
press the controller (
Y page 72).
X
Enter BROADWAY. Character entry (Y page 35).
72
Destination entry
Navigation
X
To call up the list: slide 5 the controller
repeatedly until the character bar disappears.
or
X
To select ¬: turn and press the controller.
X
To select Town: press the controller.
X
Enter the city, e.g. New York. Then call up the
list and select an entry. Proceed in the same
way as when entering a street.
X
To select No.: press the controller.
X
Enter the house number. Then call up the list
and select an entry. Proceed in the same way
as when entering a street.
The address entry menu shows the address.
The adjacent map section shows the destina-
tion.
The city in which the vehicle is currently located
(current vehicle position) is at the top of the list
of cities. When destinations are entered using
the character bar, the locations for which route
guidance has already been carried out are more
prominently available.
You can enter any of the cities, streets, ZIP
codes, etc. which are stored in the digital map.
However, ZIP codes are not available for some
countries.
State/province and city are sufficient to start
navigating. You can enter either a city or a ZIP
code. The street and house number complete
the destination address.
Entering additional address data
You can enter additional address data:
R
State/province
You can use Last Used
to select the last
selected state (USA) or province (Canada).
You can also select Mexico and The Bahamas.
R
ZIP code
Entering a ZIP code will delete a previously
entered city.
R
Center
Entering a center will delete a previously
entered street.
R
Intersection
Entering an intersection will delete a previ-
ously entered house number.
X
Select the address entry menu (Y page 72).
X
To select State/Province, ZIP Code, Cen‐
ter or Intersection: turn, slide 6 and
press the controller.
X
Select an entry (Y page 72).
Saving an address
You can store the address entered as:
R
a home address in the address book
R
a navigable address book contact
For further information on the address book,
see (
Y page 136)
R
a personal destination on the SD card
(
Y page 100)
X
Call up the address entry menu (Y page 72).
X
To select Save: slide 6, turn and press the
controller.
X
As the home address: select As "My
Address".
The home address is stored in the list of con-
tacts under the entry My Address
.
Destination entry
73
Navigation
Z
X
As a contact: select As New Contact.
X
Select Not Classified, Home or Work.
X
Enter a surname and a first name (Y page 34).
X
To select ¬: turn and press the controller.
The destination address is saved in the
address book as a navigable contact.
Starting route calculation
The entered destination appears in the address entry menu.
X
To confirm Start or Continue: press the controller.
If you select Start
: the route is calculated with the current route settings (Y page 69). While route
calculation is in progress, an arrow will indicate the direction to your destination. Once the route
has been calculated, route guidance begins. If the vehicle is traveling on a non-digitized road, the
system displays the linear distance to the destination, the direction to the destination and the
Road Not Mapped
message.
Selection Continue
: If Calculate Alternative Routes is activated, alternative routes are
calculated (
Y page 69). You can display these and select them for route guidance (Y page 93).
If route guidance has already been activated, a prompt will appear asking whether you wish to end
the current route guidance.
X
To select Cancel Active Route Guidance or Set as Intermediate Destination: turn and
press the controller.
Cancel
Active Route Guidance cancels the current route guidance and starts route calcula-
tion to the new destination.
Set
as Intermediate Destination adds the newly entered intermediate destination in addi-
tion to the existing destination. The intermediate destinations menu appears (
Y page 80).
i
The route is calculated using digital map data. The calculation time depends on the distance
from the destination, for example.
The calculated route may differ from the ideal route, e.g. due to roadworks or incomplete map
data. Please also refer to the notes about the digital map (
Y page 108).
X
To call up keyword search: select è by sliding 6, turning and pressing the controller in the
address entry menu.
74
Destination entry
Navigation
For further information on the keyword search (Y page 75).
X
To view the vicinity of the destination: to select :, turn and press the controller.
You can explore the destination area.
Requirement for exploring a destination (USA): mbrace must be activated for Internet access
(
Y page 142).
Requirement for exploring a destination (Canada): a mobile phone is connected to the multimedia
system via Bluetooth
®
(Y page 113) or USB (Y page 183).
Keyword search
Entering keywords
The keyword search is used to help find desti-
nations using fragments of words. The keyword
search is tolerant of errors.
It can be used for an address or a POI. For exam-
ple, you can search for the Empire State Building
in New York in this way.
The keyword search finds geographically toler-
ant hits. If, for example, you are searching for a
street located on the edge of a major city, the
search will also cover adjacent smaller cities.
The keyword search supports languages using
Latin characters.
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select Keyword Search.
X
Enter the first few letters of the city and street
or the POI, e.g. EMP
and STATE.
While entering the information, the number of
exact matches/all hits is shown.
---/---
is displayed if fewer than three char-
acters have been entered.
999+
is displayed if there are too many hits.
X
Select ¬.
The search results are displayed
(
Y page 75).
Selecting search results
The search results are divided into categories,
such as addresses. The number of exact/total
hits is shown in brackets.
Further search results are displayed, if POI
Search and/or Fuzzy Search are activated in
the search options (
Y page 76).
X
To select an address: press the controller.
The search results are displayed.
Destination entry
75
Navigation
Z
Exact hits are shown at the very top of the list.
Hits are listed alphabetically. The search term
is highlighted in orange for exact matches.
X
Select an entry: turn and press the controller.
The address entry menu appears, showing the
destination address.
X
To start route calculation: select Start
(Y page 74).
X
To select a POI: select POIs in the Vicin‐
ity or All POIs by turning and pressing the
controller.
A list appears.
X
Select a POI.
The POI is shown.
X
To start route calculation: select Start
(Y page 74).
X
To use online search: select Online
Search.
The search switches to the online functions.
Online search requirement (USA): mbrace
must be activated for Internet access
(
Y page 142).
Requirement for the online map display (Can-
ada): a mobile phone is connected to the mul-
timedia system via Bluetooth
®
(Y page 113)
or USB (
Y page 183).
Selecting search options
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select Keyword Search.
X
To select Search Options: slide 5, turn
and press the controller.
X
Select Fuzzy Search or POI Search.
Switch the setting on O or off ª.
The error-tolerant search is useful if parts of
the address are incomplete or the spelling is
unclear.
The POI search takes into account points of
interest in the search.
Selecting a state/province
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select Keyword Search.
X
To select State/Province: slide 5, turn
and press the controller.
States/provinces are sorted alphabetically.
X
To select a state/province: turn and press the
controller.
Using online search
Requirement (USA): mbrace must be activated
for Internet access (
Y page 142).
Requirement (Canada): a mobile phone is con-
nected to the multimedia system via Bluetooth
®
(Y page 113) or USB (Y page 183).
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select Keyword Search.
X
To select Online Search: slide 5, turn and
press the controller.
The search switches to the online functions.
Selecting a destination from the list of
last destinations
The last 50 destinations are stored automati-
cally.
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select From Previous Destinations.
76
Destination entry
Navigation
X
Select the destination.
The address entry menu appears, showing the
destination address.
X
To start route calculation: select Start
(Y page 74).
Selecting an address book contact as
a destination
You can select navigable address book contacts
as the destination. These are identified by the
L symbol. If you have already entered and
saved your home address, you can select this as
the destination by using My Address
.
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select From Contacts.
X
Select the destination.
The address entry menu appears, showing the
contact and associated destination address.
X
To start route calculation: select Start
(Y page 74).
Selecting a destination from POIs
Calling up the POI menu
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select From POIs.
Selecting a POI category
X
Select a category or one of the searches listed in the table.
The G symbol after an entry shows that further categories are available.
X
Select a sub-category.
The search for POIs starts.
If route guidance is active, first define the position for the POI search (
Y page 78).
If no route guidance is active, the POI search covers a 240 mile (400 km) radius around the current
vehicle position.
Once the search is completed, the POI list is displayed.
Destination entry
77
Navigation
Z
The search results display the following information:
R
an arrow that shows the linear direction to the POI (search around vehicle position)
R
the linear distance to the POI
R
the name of the POI
X
Select a POI.
The complete address of the POI is shown.
Selection Instructions
Search By Name
The search looks for all
POIs on the digital map or
around one of the three
previously specified posi-
tions (
Y page 78).
X
To select Search By Name: turn and press the controller.
X
Select All POIs or a position for the POI search.
The search for POIs starts.
Search By Phone Num‐
ber
All POIs with a telephone
number can be selected.
X
To select Search By Phone Number: turn and press the control-
ler.
The search for POIs starts.
Mercedes-Benz Ser‐
vice
The search looks for
authorized Mercedes-
Benz Centers.
X
To select Mercedes-Benz Service: turn and press the controller.
The search for POIs starts.
Defining the position for the POI search
You can define where the POI search is to be carried out during active route guidance by selecting
Near Destination
or Along the Route.
The POI search covers a 240 mi (400 km) radius around the selected position.
Selection Instructions
Near Destination
The search is performed
in the vicinity of the desti-
nation.
X
Select a category or Search By Name (Y page 77).
X
Select Near Destination.
The search for POIs starts.
Along the Route
The search is performed
along the route.
X
Select a category or Search By Name (Y page 77).
X
Select Along the Route.
The search for POIs starts.
Current Position
Searches in the vicinity of
the current vehicle posi-
tion.
X
Select a category or Search By Name (Y page 77).
X
Select Current Position.
The search for POIs starts.
Selecting a POI
Requirement for "Calling up a POI": a mobile phone must be connected to the multimedia system
(
Y page 113).
78
Destination entry
Navigation
Requirement for "Viewing the vicinity of the destination" and "Calling up the website for the desti-
nation" (USA): mbrace must be activated for Internet access (
Y page 142).
Requirement for "Viewing the vicinity of the destination" and "Calling up the website for the desti-
nation" (Canada): a mobile phone must be connected via Bluetooth
®
(Y page 113) or USB
(
Y page 183) with the multimedia system.
X
To view the vicinity of the destination: to select :, turn and press the controller.
If street images are available, the street in the vicinity of the destination address is shown.
X
To call up the map: select Map.
X
Move the map, change the map scale and select the POI (Y page 80).
X
To call up a POI: select Call.
If a phone number is available, the multimedia system switches to the telephone function.
X
To call up the website for the destination: select www.
If an Internet address is available, data is loaded from the Internet.
X
To saveaPOI: select Save by turning the controller and pressing to confirm.
The POI can be saved as:
R
a navigable address book contact
R
a home address
X
To start route calculation: press the controller to select Start (Y page 74).
Destination entry
79
Navigation
Z
Using the map
:
Crosshair
;
Distance of crosshair position from current vehicle position
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the ß button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the controller.
X
Select Using Map.
The map with crosshair is shown.
X
To move the map: slide 1, 4 or 2 the controller.
X
To change the map scale: turn the controller until the desired map scale is selected.
The scale is displayed at the bottom. Turning clockwise zooms out from the map; turning counter-
clockwise zooms in.
X
To select a destination: press the controller.
If several destinations are available in the area around the crosshair, these are also displayed.
X
To select a destination from the selection list: turn and press the controller.
If the digital map provides navigable address data, you will see the destination address in the
address entry menu.
X
To start route calculation: select Start (Y page 74).
Entering intermediate destinations
Introduction
You can also map the route to the destination
yourself by entering up to four intermediate des-
tinations. The sequence of the intermediate des-
tinations can be changed at any time.
The navigation system provides a selection of
predefined destinations in eight categories for
this purpose, e.g. Gas Station
or Restau‐
rants. You can also use the destination entry
options to enter intermediate destinations.
Creating intermediate destinations
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select Intermediate Destinations.
X
To select a category or Other: turn and press
the controller.
After selecting a category, the POIs which are
available along the route and in the vicinity are
displayed.
First, a search for destinations along the route
is performed. The search for destinations is
80
Destination entry
Navigation
then initiated in the area around the vehicle
position.
X
After selecting Other, select one of the des-
tination entry options.
Selection Step
Address Entry
X
Enter a destination by
address (
Y page 72).
Keyword
Search
X
Select a destination
using a keyword search
(
Y page 75).
From Previ‐
ous Destina‐
tions
X
Select a destination
from the list of last des-
tinations (
Y page 76).
From Contacts
X
Select a contact from
the address book as the
destination (
Y page 77).
From POIs
X
Select a point of interest
(
Y page 77).
Using Map
X
Enter a destination using
the map (
Y page 80).
From Memory
Card
X
Select a personal POI
(
Y page 85).
From
Mercedes-
Benz Apps
X
Enter a destination from
Mercedes-Benz Apps
(
Y page 82).
Using Geo-
Coordinates
X
Enter a destination using
the geo-coordinates
(
Y page 83).
X
To select a POI: turn the controller and press
to confirm.
After selecting a POI or entering a destination,
the address of the intermediate destination is
displayed.
After entering a destination using the map,
the address entry menu is displayed. Start
is
highlighted.
X
To call up a map: select Map by turning and
pressing the controller.
You can move the map and select the desti-
nation.
X
To make a call: select Call.
If the intermediate destination has a tele-
phone number and a mobile phone is con-
nected to the multimedia system
(
Y page 113), the call is connected.
X
To load data from the Internet: select www.
If an Internet address is available, data is loa-
ded from the Internet.
X
To store an intermediate destination in
the destination memory: select Save
(Y page 99).
X
To accept an intermediate destination:
select OK
by pressing the controller.
The immediate destination is entered into
position 1 of the intermediate destinations
menu.
X
To enter another intermediate destina-
tion: slide 5 the controller and highlight
Add New:
.
X
Press the controller.
X
Proceed as described above.
Editing intermediate destinations
You can perform the following functions:
R
change intermediate destinations
R
switch the sequence of the intermediate des-
tinations in the intermediate destinations
menu
R
delete intermediate destinations
i
You cannot edit POIs.
Destination entry
81
Navigation
Z
X
To select an intermediate destination in the
intermediate destinations menu: turn and
press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To change an intermediate destination:
select Edit
in the menu.
X
Change the address, e.g. the city and street.
X
To select OK: turn and press the controller.
The intermediate destinations menu appears
and displays the changed intermediate desti-
nation.
You can change the order of the intermediate
destinations entered and the destination. To
change the order, at least one intermediate des-
tination and the destination must have been
entered.
X
To change the order: in the menu, select
Move
.
X
Turn the controller and move the intermediate
destination or destination to the desired posi-
tion.
X
Press the controller.
X
To delete an intermediate destination:
select Delete
in the menu.
Accepting intermediate destinations
for the route
X
Insert the SD memory card (Y page 170).
X
To select Start Route Guidance in the
intermediate destinations menu: press the
controller.
The route is calculated with the entered inter-
mediate destinations.
If an intermediate destination was passed
during route guidance, a green tick mark will
be entered in the intermediate destinations
menu. Once the route has been recalculated,
the intermediate destination is deleted from
the intermediate destinations menu.
Saving as a personal route
You can save a route including intermediate
destinations on the SD card.
Requirements: the SD card has the FAT data
system format (e.g. FAT32).
X
Insert the SD memory card (Y page 170).
X
To select Save As Personal Route in the
intermediate destinations menu: press the
controller.
The route is saved on the SD card under Per‐
sonal Routes.
Searching for a gas station when the
fuel level is low
Requirement: the setting Gas on Reserve must
be enabled (
Y page 70).
If the fuel tank reserve level is displayed, you will
see the Reserve Fuel Would you like to
start a search for surrounding gas
stations? message.
X
To select Yes or No: turn and press the con-
troller.
If you select Yes
: the gas station search
starts. When the search is complete, a list of
the gas stations available along the route or in
the vicinity is displayed.
If you select No
: the search is canceled.
X
Select the gas station.
The address of the gas station is displayed.
X
To select Start: press the controller.
The selected gas station is entered into posi-
tion 1 of the intermediate destinations menu.
Route guidance begins.
If the intermediate destinations menu already
contains four intermediate destinations, a
prompt will be displayed, asking you whether
you wish to enter the gas station into position
1. If you select Yes
, the gas station is trans-
ferred into the list and intermediate destina-
tion 4 is deleted.
Entering a destination from
Mercedes-Benz Apps
Requirement (USA): mbrace is activated for the
Mercedes-Benz Apps (
Y page 142).
Requirement (Canada): a mobile phone is con-
nected to the multimedia system via Bluetooth
®
(Y page 113) or USB (Y page 183).
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
82
Destination entry
Navigation
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select From Mercedes-Benz Apps.
A list shows the available destinations that
have been transmitted to the vehicle up to
this point.
Using geo-coordinates
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
ß button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select Using Geo-Coordinates.
Geo-coordinates are entered in degrees,
minutes and seconds.
Entering the latitude and longitude coordi-
nates
X
To change the value: turn the controller.
X
To move the selection within the line: slide
1 the controller.
X
To move the selection between lines: slide
4 the controller.
X
To confirm the value: press the controller.
Saving a destination
X
To select Save: turn and press the controller.
The destination can be saved:
R
a navigable address book contact
R
to the SD card
R
a home address
Starting route calculation
X
To select Start Route Guidance: turn and
press the controller.
Personal POIs and routes
General notes
The use of personal POIs for displaying traffic
surveillance equipment is not permitted in every
country. Please observe the country-specific
regulations and always drive at a suitable speed.
Personal POIs are filed in categories:
R
Not Classified
Standard entry for personal POIs
R
Mercedes-Benz Apps
Personal POIs (destinations, routes) that you
have imported via the online functions.
R
Categories which you have created yourself,
e.g. on your PC
Personal routes are not categorized.
Settings for personal POIs
Displaying on the map
Requirements: an SD card with personal POIs is
inserted (
Y page 170). The SD card has the FAT
data system format (e.g. FAT32).
All personal POIs of the selected category are
displayed on the map with a corresponding sym-
bol.
If the "Alert when approaching" (
Y page 84)
function is activated, the symbols are displayed
up to a map scale of 2 km.
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
ß button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Personal POIs.
X
Select Display on the Map.
The menu displays the categories available on
the SD card.
X
To select a category: turn the controller and
press to confirm.
All personal POIs in the selected category are
displayed O or not displayed ª, depending
on the previous status.
Personal POIs and routes
83
Navigation
Z
Alert when approaching
Requirements: an SD card with personal POIs is
inserted (
Y page 170). The SD card has the FAT
data system format (e.g. FAT32).
If the vehicle is approachingapersonal POI, this
is highlighted on the map and/or an audible sig-
nal sounds.
For this purpose both the corresponding func-
tion "Alert when approaching" and the category
containing the personal POI must be activated.
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
ß button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Personal POIs.
X
Select Approaching POI Cue.
The menu displays the categories available on
the SD card.
X
Select Audible or Optical.
The function is switched on O or off ª,
depending on the previous status.
X
To select a category: turn the controller and
press to confirm.
The function is switched on O or off ª, for
all personal POIs of this category, depending
on the previous setting.
Saving personal POIs and routes
General notes
Personal POIs and routes are geodata which are
saved in open GPX format (GPSExchange for-
mat) on the SD card.
Requirements: the SD card has the FAT data
system format (e.g. FAT32).
Personal POI from current vehicle posi-
tion or crosshair position
X
Insert the SD memory card(Y page 170).
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
ß button.
X
When the map is displayed, press the con-
troller until a message appears.
The current vehicle position is saved to the
Not Classified
category on the SD card
and also stored in the "Last destinations"
memory.
If the "Move map" function is selected
(
Y page 68), the crosshair position is saved.
i
If no SD card is inserted, the personal POI
will only be stored in the "Last destinations"
memory.
Personal POI from destination address
X
Insert the SD memory card(Y page 170).
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
ß button.
X
Call up the address entry menu and enter the
destination address (
Y page 72).
X
To select Save: slide 6 the controller.
X
Turn and press the controller.
X
To select To Memory Card: turn and press
the controller.
X
Enteraname.
X
Selectacategory.
The current address is saved as a personal
POI on the SD card.
i
You can select a destination from the From
Previous Destinations or From Contacts
memories and save it on the SD card.
R
From Previous Destinations
(Y page 76)
R
From Contacts (Y page 77)
Personal route from a tour including
intermediate destinations
X
Insert the SD memory card(Y page 170).
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
ß button.
X
Enteradestination, e.g. by address
(
Y page 72).
X
Start route calculation (Y page 74).
84
Personal POIs and routes
Navigation
X
Create intermediate destinations (Y page 80).
X
To select Save As Personal Route in the
intermediate destinations menu: turn and
press the controller.
The route is saved in the "Personal routes"
folder on the SD card.
Importing personal destinations and
routes via Mercedes-Benz Apps
You can use Mercedes-Benz Apps (e.g. Down-
load POI, Local Search) to import destinations to
the navigation system. These have their own
symbol and are filed in the Mercedes-Benz
Apps category.
You can save the imported destinations and
routes as personal POIs and routes (
Y page 84).
When importing routes, please note:
R
The Mercedes-Benz Apps may generate a
route based on a different map from the one
used by the multimedia system. Points on the
route may therefore be situated off the digital
roads.
R
The Mercedes-Benz Apps minimize the num-
ber of route points offered.
For this reason an imported route com-
menced in the multimedia system may devi-
ate from the original route from the
Mercedes-Benz Apps.
Selecting and editing personal POIs
and routes
Selecting
The example shows a personal POI.
X
Insert the SD memory card (Y page 170).
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
ß button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select From Memory Card.
The menu displays the categories available on
the SD card.
X
To select a category or Personal Routes:
turn and press the controller.
The available personal POIs or route entries
are displayed.
X
Select personal POI or personal route.
The address of the personal POI appears or
the personal route is displayed in the map.
If a large number of entries are stored, a register
for quick selection appears. Personal POIs and
routes can be saved and sorted with different
character sets (e. g. ABC, Cyrillic, Arabic).
X
To select a register: slide 9 the control-
ler.
X
To select a character: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select a character set for sorting: slide
9 the controller to select B.
X
Press the controller.
The available character sets are displayed.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
X
Turn and press the controller.
Editing
The example shows a personal route.
X
Select personal POI or personal route
(
Y page 85).
X
To explore a personal POI or route: turn and
press the controller to select Map
.
The map with the crosshair appears and
shows the destination.
X
Scroll the map (Y page 68).
X
Set the map scale (Y page 101).
Personal POIs and routes
85
Navigation
Z
X
To return to the menu: press the % button.
X
To place a call to the personal POI: select
Call
.
If a mobile phone is connected to the multi-
media system and the telephone number is
available, the call is connected (
Y page 120).
X
To change the name and symbol: select
Edit
.
X
Select Change Name or Edit Icon.
X
To change name: enter character (Y page 34).
X
To change symbol: select a symbol.
The symbol is saved.
X
To delete a personal POI or route: select
Delete
.
A prompt will appear.
X
Select Yes or No.
If you select Yes
, the personal destination or
personal route is deleted.
X
To select the outward and return route:
select Swap
.
The starting and destination positions of your
personal route, and thus the direction for
route guidance, are switched round. One-way
streets or restricted intersections are taken
into consideration. Therefore, the outward
and return routes may differ from each other.
X
To save a personal POI: select Save.
X
Continue saving (Y page 99).
X
To start route guidance: select Start.
Recording the route
General notes
Routes are recorded using the SD card.
Requirements: the SD card has the FAT data
system format (e.g. FAT32).
When recording the route, bear in mind the fol-
lowing:
R
If the SD card is inserted, it must not be
removed during recording.
R
If route recording is started manually, it must
be finished manually before the multimedia
system is switched off (e. g. when the engine
is switched off).
R
The multimedia system minimizes the num-
ber of route points recorded. Therefore when
the recorded route is subsequently com-
menced, it may differ from the route that was
originally recorded.
Starting/finishing route recording
X
Insert the SD memory card (Y page 170).
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
ß button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select From Memory Card.
X
Select Start Route Recording.
The route is recorded and REC appears at the
bottom edge of the screen.
X
To stop recording, select End Route
Recording from the menu.
The route is stored under Personal Routes
.
Displaying/editing the recorded route
X
Insert the SD memory card (Y page 170).
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
ß button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select From Memory Card.
X
Select Personal Routes.
Previously recorded routes are displayed.
X
To select a route: turn and press the control-
ler.
The map appears with a menu. The recorded
route is shown on the map in blue.
X
To start route calculation: select Start .
X
To change the name and symbol: select
Edit
.
X
Select Change Name or Edit Icon.
X
To change name: enter character (Y page 34).
X
To change symbol: select a symbol.
The symbol is saved.
Route guidance
General notes
The multimedia system calculates the route to
the destination without taking account of the
following, for example:
R
traffic lights
R
stop and yield signs
R
parking or stopping restrictions
86
Route guidance
Navigation
R
road narrowing
R
temporary traffic rules and regulations
The navigation system can give differing driving
recommendations if the actual street/traffic sit-
uation does not correspond with the digital
map's data. For example, if the road layout or
the direction of a one-way street has been
changed.
For this reason, you must always observe road
and traffic rules and regulations during your
journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations
always have priority over system driving recom-
mendations.
Route guidance begins once a route has been
calculated (
Y page 74).
The navigation system guides you to your des-
tination by means of driving recommendations
in the form of audible navigation announce-
ments and route guidance displays.
The route guidance displays can be seen if nav-
igation mode is switched on.
If you do not follow the navigation announce-
ments or if you leave the calculated route, the
navigation system automatically calculates a
new route to the destination.
If the digital map contains the corresponding
information, the following applies:
R
During route guidance, the navigation system
tries to avoid roads with restricted access.
Those roads, for example, that are closed to
through-traffic.
R
Roads that have time restrictions (e.g. closed
on Sundays and public holidays) are consid-
ered for route guidance on days when they are
open. For this purpose, the relevant times
must be correctly stored in the database.
Displays during route guidance
Change of direction
Changes of direction have three phases:
R
Preparation phase
R
Announcement phase
R
Change-of-direction phase
Changes in direction are also shown in the multifunction display (see the vehicle Operator's Man-
ual).
Preparation phase: the navigation system prepares you for the upcoming change of direction.
Based on the example display below, the change of direction is announced by the "Prepare to turn
right message", for instance. You see the full-screen map.
Announcement phase: the navigation system announces the imminent change of direction. The
change of direction is announced ahead of time, such as with the announcement "Turn right in
0.5 miles".
The display is now split into two sectors. The map is shown on the left side of the display, and a
detailed image of the intersection or a 3D image of the imminent change of direction is shown on
the right side of the display.
Route guidance
87
Navigation
Z
:
Next road
;
Point at which the change of direction takes place (white dot)
=
Change of direction (turn right here)
?
Distance to the next change of direction
Change-of-direction phase: the navigation system announces the immediate change of direction.
The change of direction is announced ahead of time, e.g. with the announcement "Now turn right".
The display is split in two like in the announcement phase.
The change of direction is performed when the light-colored bar on the right drops down to 0 ft and
the current vehicle position symbol has reached the white change-of-direction point.
When the change of direction is completed, the map will appear in full screen mode again.
88
Route guidance
Navigation
The image shows an example of route guidance at a highway intersection when driving on a highway.
Lane recommendations
:
Recommended lanes (white)
;
Possible lane (light gray)
=
Lanes not recommended (dark gray)
If the digital map contains the relevant data, the navigation system can display lane recommenda-
tions on multi-lane roads for the next change of direction.
Recommended lane :: in this lane, you will be able to complete the next change of direction and
the one after that.
Possible lane ;: you will be able to complete the next change of direction only in this lane.
Lane not recommended =: you will not be able to complete the next change of direction if you stay
in this lane.
The navigation system shows the lane recommendations for the next two changes of direction. The
multifunction display also shows lane recommendations (see the vehicle Operator's Manual).
Route guidance
89
Navigation
Z
:
Approaching new lane
During the change of direction, new lanes may be added. These will be shown in the display of lane
recommendations with a lower boundary line.
Once the destination is reached, you will see the checkered flag. Route guidance is finished.
Highway information
Requirement: the Highway Information map content must be enabled (Y page 103).
90
Route guidance
Navigation
Display mode: while driving on the highway, gas stations, rest stops, rest areas and highway exits
are displayed along with their immediate distances from the current vehicle position.
Highway information facilitates route guidance to a POI (e. g. rest stops, highway exits) and use of
the traffic jam function. The remaining route on the highway in this case is blocked in the direction
of travel from the selected exit.
X
To call up the selection mode: while displaying the highway information, slide 9 the con-
troller.
The marker is on the highway information. The associated position is marked on the map.
X
To start route guidance and use additional functions: select a POI by turning and pressing the
controller.
The POI details are displayed.
The POI can now be:
R
Store in the address book (Y page 99)
R
View on the map (Y page 83)
R
Call if a phone is connected and a phone number is available (Y page 120)
R
Select for route guidance and calculatearoute to it (Y page 74)
X
To use the traffic jam function: select Detour by turning and pressing the controller.
The traffic jam function appears(
Y page 95).
Navigation announcements
Repeating navigation announcements
If you missed the current navigation announce-
ment, you can call it up again.
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select+: turn and press the controller.
i
If the Repeat Spoken Driving Recom‐
mendations function has previously been
added as a favorite, you can alternatively
select the function using the favorites button
(
Y page 38).
Setting the volume manually
X
Set the volume using the thumbwheel during
the navigation announcement.
i
When you start the engine, the volume will
be at its lowest setting.
Route guidance
91
Navigation
Z
Switching navigation announcements
on/off
X
To switch off navigation announcements:
during a navigation announcement, press the
thumbwheel to the right of the controller.
or
X
Press the 8 button on the multifunction
steering wheel during a navigation message.
The Spoken driving recommendations
have been deactivated. message
appears.
X
To switch navigation announcements
back on: press the controller.
X
Select +: turn and press the controller.
The multimedia system automatically switches
the navigation announcements back on when:
R
a new route is calculated
R
the vehicle is started
A navigation message is given if the route is
recalculated during dynamic route guidance due
to new traffic reports (
Y page 96).
Canceling/continuing route guidance
Canceling route guidance
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select Cancel Active Route Guidance.
The blue route line is no longer shown on the
map.
Resuming route guidance
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select Continue Route Guidance.
A new route is calculated.
Route information
Destination information
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Route: turn and press the controller.
X
Select Destination Information.
The destination and existing intermediate destinations are displayed with distances, travel time
and arrival time.
X
To select destination or intermediate destination: turn and press the controller.
The address appears.
92
Route guidance
Navigation
X
Select Save.
The destination or intermediate destination can be saved as:
R
a navigable address book contact
R
a home address
X
To call up the map, select Map.
X
Move the map, change the map scale and select the destination or the intermediate destination
(
Y page 80).
X
To call the destination or intermediate destination, select Call.
If a phone is connected and a phone number is available, the multimedia system switches to the
telephone function.
Taking an alternative route
If the Calculate Alternative Routes setting is activated O, different routes will be offered
each time a route is calculated (
Y page 69).
The multimedia system can also display these for the current route.
The economic route is displayed with a green line. The other routes are displayed with a dark blue
line.
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Route: turn and press the controller.
X
Select Alternative Route.
Route 1 is shown.
X
To display additional routes: select Next or Previous.
X
To start a new route guidance: select Start.
Route guidance
93
Navigation
Z
Route list
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Route: turn and press the controller.
X
Select Route List.
The route list shows the next change of direction and the immediate distances from the current
vehicle position.
X
To display additional route sections: turn the controller.
The position of the change of direction that belongs to the respective route section is indicated
on the map with a cross.
Where am I?
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Position: turn and press the controller.
X
Select Where am I?.
The street you are currently on and the previous and next intersections are displayed.
94
Route guidance
Navigation
Traffic jam function
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Route: turn and press the controller.
X
Select Detour.
X
To specify the start of the traffic jam sec-
tion: select Beginning
.
The next possible traffic jam section starting
point is marked.
X
Turn the controller.
The marking moves along the route to the
next starting position.
X
Press the controller.
The start of the traffic jam is set.
X
To specify the end of a traffic jam section:
select End
.
The next possible traffic jam section end point
is marked.
X
Turn and press the controller.
X
To calculate the detour: select Start.
Off-road
General notes
The navigation system may guide you to off-road
routes that your vehicle cannot drive on without
causing damage to the tires and wheels or the
vehicle itself. It is the driver’s sole responsibility
to determine the suitability of the route. The
condition of the off-road routes may vary, and
their driveability may be affected by different
factors such as time of day, season and current
weather conditions, which the navigation sys-
tem cannot judge or take into account.
Route guidance to an off-road destina-
tion
The navigation system can also guide you to
destinations which are within the area of the
digital map, but which are not themselves on the
map.
These destinations are known as off-road des-
tinations, which you can enter using the map, for
example. In these cases, the navigation system
guides you for as long as possible with naviga-
tion announcements and displays on roads
known to the system.
If the vehicle reaches an area which is not part of
the digital map, the display appears as a split-
screen view. On the right, an arrow appears that
points to the off-road destination. You will hear
the announcement: "Please follow the arrow on
the display". As the vehicle approaches the des-
tination, you will see a display to this effect.
Route guidance from an off-road loca-
tion to a destination
Off-road location: the vehicle's position is on the
digital map, but the map does not contain any
information about that location. The navigation
system is able to guide you to a destination even
from an off-road location.
At the start of route guidance, you will see the
Road Not Mapped
message, an arrow and the
distance to the destination. The arrow shows
the compass heading to the actual destination.
As soon as the vehicle is back on a road known
to the system, route guidance continues in the
usual way.
Off-road during route guidance
Due to road construction, for example, there
may be differences between the data on the
digital map and the actual course of the road.
In such cases, the system will temporarily be
unable to locate the vehicle position on the dig-
ital map. The vehicle is therefore in an off-road
position.
In the display, you will then see the Road Not
Mapped message, an arrow and the distance to
the destination. The direction arrow shows the
compass heading to the destination.
As soon as the system can assign the vehicle
position to the map again, route guidance con-
tinues in the usual way.
Route guidance
95
Navigation
Z
Real-time traffic reports
Requirements
i
This function is currently not available for
Canada.
In order to receive real-time traffic reports via
satellite radio, you need to subscribe to SIRIUS
XM Satellite Radio Traffic Message Service.
Further information on satellite radio
(
Y page 158).
The multimedia system can receive traffic
reports via satellite radio and take account of
these for route guidance in the navigation sys-
tem. Received traffic reports are displayed on
the map either as text or as symbols.
Real-time traffic reports on the map
:
Traffic reports can be received or traffic reports are available
;
Icon delimiting the section of the route affected (color lines)
=
Traffic incident on the route (traffic jam symbol)
If display : is not shown, traffic reports cannot be received.
The navigation system can show certain traffic incidents on the map. Traffic reports are shown on
the map at scales of 1/32 mi to 20 mi.
X
To hide the menu: slide 5 and press the controller.
The map can be seen in the full-screen display.
X
To set the map scale: turn the controller until the desired map scale is selected.
:
Traffic jam on the route
;
Slow-moving traffic on the route
=
Road blocked
96
Real-time traffic reports
Navigation
?
Traffic jam
A
Traffic warning
B
Dashed red and white line delimiting the traffic warning
C
Road block (crosses along the affected road)
D
Slow-moving traffic (orange line along the affected route)
E
Traffic jam (red line along the affected route)
Displaying real-time traffic reports
Starting a search for traffic reports
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Traffic: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To close the report: press the controller.
Traffic symbol information
:
Affected roads with indication of direction
;
Symbol for report type, e.g. traffic flow mes-
sage
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Traffic: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Traffic Symbol Information:
turn and press the controller.
The map appears and shows the available
traffic information as icons. The first traffic
information is highlighted.
X
To highlight additional traffic symbols, select
Next
or Previous.
X
To move the map: select Map .
You can move the map to enable further traf-
fic information to be displayed.
You can have the traffic report relevant to a traf-
fic icon shown.
X
To select Details: turn and press the con-
troller.
The report shows the following information:
R
State/province, road and display of the affec-
ted direction
R
Section of the road to which the traffic report
applies
R
Traffic icon and traffic report
X
To close the detailed display: press the
% button.
Displaying reports on the route
The function is only available while route guid-
ance is active. It shows the available traffic
reports affecting the current route.
If there are no reports for the route or the func-
tion is not supported in the selected language:
Real-time traffic reports
97
Navigation
Z
the Messages On Route menu item is gray and
cannot be selected.
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Traffic: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Messages On Route: turn and
press the controller.
The traffic report window appears. Several
traffic reports may be available for the calcu-
lated route, marked for example by 1/3.
The report shows the following information:
R
State/province, road and display of the
affected direction
R
Section of the road to which the traffic
report applies
R
Traffic icon and traffic report
X
To display the next/previous traffic
report: turn the controller.
X
To close the display: press the % button.
Displaying all traffic reports
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Traffic: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select All Messages: turn and press the
controller.
A list is shown containing all roads, areas or
regions affected by traffic reports. Roads,
areas or regions not on the route also appear
in the list.
X
To select the road, area or region: turn the
controller and press to confirm.
The traffic report is displayed. There may be
several traffic reports for the affected road.
You can find an example of a traffic report
here: (
Y page 97).
X
To close the display: press the % button.
Settings for the display on the map
You can switch these displays on/off on the
map:
R
Incidents
R
Speed & Flow
R
Free Flow
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Traffic: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Traffic Information On Map:
turn and press the controller.
X
Select Incidents, Speed & Flow or Free
Flow.
The display is activated O or deactivated ª.
Reading out traffic reports on the
route
Introduction
The text reader function is only available while
route guidance is active. It reads out traffic
reports affecting the current route.
You can select from the following text reader
properties:
R
Language (Y page 46)
R
Text reader speed (Y page 43)
You can start the text reader function manually
or set it to automatic.
Starting the text reader function man-
ually
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Traffic: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Read Out All Messages on Route.
The multimedia system reads out the reports
in sequential order.
98
Real-time traffic reports
Navigation
If there are no reports for the route, the Read
Out All Messages on Route menu item is
gray and cannot be selected.
X
To cancel the read-aloud function: select
Cancel Read-Aloud Function
.
The multimedia system reads the current
report aloud and then exits the read-aloud
function.
Automatic text reader function
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Traffic: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Read Traffic Announcements
Automatically.
Depending on the previous status, switch the
option on O or off ª.
Recalculating the route dynamically
The Dynamic Traffic Route route type takes
into account all of the traffic reports it receives
for the current route when calculating the route
(
Y page 69).
If you have selected Dynamic Traffic Route
as the route type, the multimedia system guides
you to your destination along the updated route.
Storing destinations
General notes
If a route to a destination has been calculated,
the destination is saved to the last destinations
memory. If the memory is full, the oldest desti-
nation is overwritten. When you save the current
vehicle position or a crosshair position, this
position is stored in the "Last destinations"
memory.
You can save destinations permanently in the
address book and on an SD card. For instance,
this is possible immediately after entering an
address.
Requirements: the SD card has the FAT data
system format (e.g. FAT32).
i
Equipment with touchpad: alternatively, you
can carry out these steps on the touchpad
(
Y page 28).
Storing the destination in the address
book
The example shows a POI.
X
To select Save: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
New contact: select As New Contact.
If the address book already contains con-
tacts, the entry Add
to Contact is also avail-
able.
X
Select Not Classified, Home or Work.
An input menu shows the destination
address.
X
Enter a surname and a first name. Character
entry (
Y page 34).
X
To select OK: turn and press the controller.
The Saving Successful
message appears.
The destination address is saved in the
address book as a navigable contact.
X
To add to a contact: select Add to Con‐
tact.
The address book appears.
X
Search for a contact (Y page 136).
X
Press the controller.
The Saving Successful
message appears.
The destination address is added to a contact
in the address book.
Telephone numbers are not transferred to the
telephone number fields of the address book.
After selecting the destination address from
the address book for navigation, the associ-
ated telephone number will be displayed.
If the contact already has two destination
addresses, a prompt will appear asking if a
destination address should be overwritten.
Storing destinations
99
Navigation
Z
X
Select Yes or No.
If you select Yes
, a list showing both destina-
tion addresses appears.
X
To select the destination address: turn and
press the controller.
The destination address is overwritten.
Saving a destination to an SD card
X
Insert the SD memory card (Y page 170).
X
Enter an address (Y page 72).
If the address has been entered in full, the
destination can be saved.
X
To select Save: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
Select To Memory Card.
X
Not Classified or, if available, select a cat-
egory that you have created yourself.
An input menu appears.
X
Enter a surname and a first name. Character
entry (
Y page 35).
X
Select OK.
The Saving Successful
message appears.
The destination is saved to the SD card.
Saving the current vehicle position
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
ß button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Position: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Save.
The current vehicle position is saved in "Last
destinations".
Saving the crosshair position
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
ß button.
X
To display the crosshair: press the control-
ler.
X
Move the map to the desired position
(
Y page 68).
X
To show the menu: press the controller.
X
To select Position: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Save.
The crosshair position is saved in the last des-
tinations.
Editing the last destinations
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
ß button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select From Previous Destinations.
The "Last destinations" memory appears.
X
To save the destination: select the destina-
tion.
X
Store the destination in the address book
(
Y page 99).
X
To view the details: while in the "Last desti-
nations" memory, turn the controller and
highlight the entry.
X
Slide 9 the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Details: press the controller.
i
The destination address can be changed if
desired. For instance, a different street or
house number can be selected.
X
To delete one or all destinations: while in
the "Last destinations" memory, turn the con-
troller and highlight the entry.
X
Slide 9 the controller.
A menu appears.
100
Storing destinations
Navigation
X
To select Delete or Delete All: turn and
press the controller.
A prompt appears.
X
Select Yes or No.
Selecting Yes
deletes the selected destina-
tion or all destinations.
Map functions
General notes
Company logos displayed on the map are trademarks of the respective companies and used solely
for the purpose of indicating the locations of these companies. The use of such logos on the map
does not indicate approval of, support of or advertising by these companies for the navigation
system itself.
i
Equipment with a touchpad: alternatively you can carry out this operation using the touchpad
(
Y page 28).
Map settings
Setting the map scale
Requirement: the map is in full screen mode, the menu is faded out (Y page 67).
The lower left-hand section of the map shows the currently set map scale and compass needle.
Right-hand-drive vehicles: the currently set map scale and compass needle are displayed in the
lower right-hand section of the map.
X
To show the map in full screen mode: to hide the menu, push the % button.
or
X
Slide up 5 or down 6 the controller to the center of the map and press.
X
To set the map scale: as soon as you turn the controller, the scale bar appears on the bottom
of the display.
X
Turn the controller until the needle points to the desired map scale.
Rectangle : in the scale bar indicates the last map scale set when a scale was selected. Once
you are finished selecting a map scale, the new map scale will be shown.
Once you are finished selecting a map scale, the new map scale will be shown.
Map functions
101
Navigation
Z
Selecting map orientation
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the ß button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the controller.
X
Select Map Orientation.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
X
Turn and press the controller.
The map orientation is set.
Change map direction Explanation
North Up
0 The map view is displayed so that north is always up.
Heading Up
¤ The map view is aligned to the direction of travel. The direction of
travel is always at the top; the red tip of the symbol points north.
3-D Map
¤ The map view is aligned to the direction of travel. The map displays
a 3D oblique view with elevation; the red tip of the symbol points north.
Selecting POI symbols on the map
POIs can be displayed as symbols in the map
display. POIs include, for example, gas stations,
hotels and restaurants.
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
ß button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Map Content.
X
Select POI Symbols On Map.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
X
Turn and press the controller.
Default Symbols
shows symbols of prede-
fined categories in the map.
Custom
Symbols allows symbols to be selec-
ted from other/all available categories.
X
Turn and press the controller.
You have the option of selecting symbols to
be displayed O or not displayed ª on the
map.
The list shows all symbols that are contained
on the digital map across all countries. How-
ever, not all points of interest are available in
all countries. As a result, certain point of inter-
est symbols may not be displayed on the map,
even if the symbol display is switched on.
102
Map functions
Navigation
Selecting text information on the map
At the bottom of the display, you can specify whether to display geo-coordinates or not to display
text information for the street you are currently on.
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the ß button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the controller.
X
Select Map Content.
X
Select Text Information On Map.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
X
Turn and press the controller.
Current Street
shows the current street at the bottom of the display.
Geo-coordinates
shows the longitude and latitude, elevation and number of satellites received.
The elevation shown may deviate from the actual elevation.
X
Turn and press the controller.
Switching highway information on/off
While driving on the highway, gas stations, rest stops, rest areas and highway exits are displayed
along with their immediate distances from the current vehicle position (
Y page 90).
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the ß button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the controller.
X
Select Map Content.
X
Select Highway Information.
Switch the display in the map on O or off ª.
Further information (
Y page 90).
Displaying the next crossroads
If route guidance is not active, the next cross-
roads can be displayed at the upper edge of the
display.
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
ß button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
Select Options.
X
Select Map Content.
X
Select Next Intersecting Street.
Switch the display in the map on O or off ª.
Showing the map version
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
ß button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Map Content.
X
Select Map Version.
Information on the current map version is
shown. Information about new versions of the
digital map can be obtained from an author-
ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Map functions
103
Navigation
Z
Rotating the 3D map
You can use this function to explore the vicinity of the destination in a 3D view. The function is
available in all map scales.
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Position: turn and press the controller.
X
Select 3D Map Rotation.
X
Turn the controller to change to the 3D map perspective.
Other functions:
R
Moving the map (Y page 68)
R
Changing the map scale (Y page 101)
Map display
Displaying the navigation map
The navigation map and satellite images are shown in globe projection. This allows for a realistic
map display free from distortion in all map scales.
104
Map functions
Navigation
Other functions:
R
Moving the map (Y page 68)
R
Setting the map scale (Y page 101)
Building images
In the map scales 1/32 mi (20 m) and 1/16 mi (50 m) important buildings are depicted realistically
on the map. Other buildings are shown as models.
Elevation model
Cities located in mountainous regions are realistically depicted using elevation modeling.
Avoiding an area
General notes
The navigation system enables you to avoid areas you do not wish to drive through.
If you activate or deactivate a route block while route guidance is active, the navigation system will
calculate a new route. If you activate or deactivate a route block while route guidance is inactive, the
navigation system will use the new setting for the next route guidance.
Map functions
105
Navigation
Z
The calculated route may include an area to be avoided if:
R
your destination is located in such an area
R
there is no alternative route of comparable length available
Highways within blocked areas are always taken into consideration in the route calculation.
i
Equipment with a touchpad: alternatively you can carry out this operation using the touchpad
(
Y page 28).
Avoiding a new area
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the ß button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the controller.
X
Select Route Settings.
X
Select Avoid Options.
X
Select Avoid Area.
X
Select Avoid New Area.
A menu appears.
X
Select Using Map or Address Entry.
If you select Using Map
, the map with crosshair appears.
If you select Address Entry
, the address entry menu appears where you can enter the address
(
Y page 72). The map appears with the crosshair after the address is entered.
X
To select an area: when the map with crosshair appears, press the controller.
A red square appears on the map, symbolizing the area to be blocked.
X
To change the size of the area, turn the controller.
The map scale is shown at the bottom of the display. The needle is on the map scale currently
selected.
X
When the desired size is set, press the controller.
The area is entered into the list.
106
Map functions
Navigation
Turning an area on/off and displaying/changing the area
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the ß button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the controller.
X
Select Route Settings.
X
Select Avoid Options.
X
Select Avoid Area.
A list appears.
X
To switch an area to avoid on/off: select an area by turning and pressing the controller.
The area is avoided O or not avoided ª.
X
To display/change an area: to select an area, turn the controller.
X
Slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Display/Change: press the controller.
The map with the crosshair appears.
The area currently blocked is displayed as a red square.
X
To move the area to a new location: slide 1, 4, 2 and press the controller.
X
To change the size of the area: press the controller.
X
To accept changes: press the controller.
A message appears stating that the area has been set.
Deleting one/all areas
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the ß button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the controller.
X
Select Route Settings.
X
Select Avoid Options.
X
Select Avoid Area.
A list appears.
X
To delete an area: mark an area by turning the controller.
X
Slide 9 the controller.
X
Select Delete.
A prompt appears asking whether you wish to delete the area.
Map functions
107
Navigation
Z
X
Select Yes or No.
After selecting Yes
, the area is deleted.
X
To delete all areas: slide 9 the controller when the list is displayed.
X
Select Delete All.
A prompt appears asking whether you wish to delete all areas.
X
Select Yes or No.
After selecting Yes
, all areas are deleted.
SIRIUS XM service
Displaying SIRIUS XM service informa-
tion
You can display the SIRIUS XM service informa-
tion.
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Traffic: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select SIRIUS Service.
The window on the right half of the display
shows the telephone number of the provider
(SIRIUS XM) and the serial number of your
service module.
Registering for the SIRIUS XM traffic
report service
X
Call the provider telephone number shown on
the display.
i
You can also have the satellite service acti-
vated online. To do so, visit the SIRIUS XM
Radio website at http://www.sirius.com
(USA).
Once the connection has been established:
X
Follow the service employee's instructions.
The activation process may take up to ten
minutes.
If registration is not included when purchasing
the system, your credit card details will be
required to activate your account.
Updating the digital map
Introduction
The digital maps generated by the map software
become outdated in the same way as conven-
tional road maps. Optimal route guidance can
only be provided by the navigation system in
conjunction with the most up-to-date map soft-
ware.
Information about new versions of the digital
map can be obtained from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. You can have the digital
map updated there using a data medium, or you
can update it yourself.
Updating at an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center
If an update for your map software is available,
you will receive it free of charge at your
Mercedes-Benz Service Center during your vehi-
cle's annual service. You can arrange a separate
appointment for this at your Mercedes-Benz
Service Center on request.
The update can only be performed:
R
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
R
for map data for North America
The map software is not provided on DVD.
Carrying out a manual update
After the free update of the map data has
expired or when buying map data, you can
update the data yourself.
The update process may take some time (up to
45 minutes), depending on the size of the digital
map. The update will be completed more quickly
if the vehicle is stationary. If you begin the
update while the vehicle is stationary and the
starter battery has insufficient power, the mul-
timedia system may switch off automatically.
This protects the battery. In order to prevent
108
Map functions
Navigation
this, a suitable power supply to the vehicle must
be maintained.
Navigation functions
Calling up the navigation system
menu
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
ß button.
X
To show the menu: slide 5 the controller.
Navi
is highlighted in the main function bar.
X
Press the controller.
The navigation menu appears.
X
Turn the controller to display the navigation
functions one after another.
X
To change to the map: turn the controller until
Navigation
is shown and then press the con-
troller.
i
Equipment with touchpad: alternatively, you
can carry out these steps on the touchpad
(
Y page 28).
Calling up the online map display
Requirement (USA): mbrace must be activated
for Internet access (
Y page 142).
Requirement (Canada): a mobile phone is con-
nected to the multimedia system via Bluetooth
®
(Y page 113) or USB (Y page 183).
X
Call up the navigation menu (Y page 109).
X
Turn the controller until Online Map Dis‐
play is brought to the front.
X
Press the controller.
The online connection is established. Once
the connection is established, the Google
Maps™ map appears around the current vehi-
cle position.
X
Move the map (Y page 68) and change the
map scale (
Y page 101).
X
To exit the online map display: press the %
button.
Calling up the compass display
X
Call up the navigation menu (Y page 109).
X
Turn the controller until Compass is brought to
the front.
X
Press the controller.
The compass display provides the following
information:
R
The current direction of travel with bearing
(360 degree format) and compass direction
R
Longitude and latitude coordinates in
degrees, minutes and seconds
R
Height (rounded off) above sea level
R
Number of GPS satellites from which a sig-
nal can be received
X
To exit the compass display: press the %
button.
Drive information
X
Call up the navigation menu (Y page 109).
X
Turn the controller until Drive Information
is brought to the front.
X
Press the controller.
The Starting Drive Information.
Please Wait... message appears.
You will then see maps with the current vehi-
cle position and the vicinity of the destination
Navigation functions
109
Navigation
Z
in different scales, these are automatically
displayed one after another.
USA: if mbrace is activated for Internet
access, additional information can be dis-
played, e.g. weather at the destination
(
Y page 142).
Canada: if a mobile phone is connected to the
multimedia system via Bluetooth
®
(Y page 113) or USB (Y page 183), addi-
tional information, such as the weather at the
destination, can be displayed (
Y page 142).
X
To exit Drive Information: press the controller.
X
Press the % button.
Route flight
X
Call up the navigation menu (Y page 109).
X
Turn the controller until Route Flight is
brought to the front.
X
Press the controller.
X
Select Ì.
The route will then be flown along from a heli-
copter view.
X
To stop the route flight: select Ë.
X
To exit the route flight: press the controller.
X
Press the % button.
Info on navigation
X
Call up the navigation menu (Y page 109).
X
Turn the controller until Info on Naviga‐
tion is brought to the front.
X
Press the controller.
The Digital Operator's Manual is opened at
the section on navigation.
Problems with the navigation system
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The multimedia system
does not resume route
guidance after the jour-
ney has been interrup-
ted.
Route guidance is canceled if you interrupt the journey for more than
two hours.
"Interrupting the journey" refers to stopping the vehicle.
"Continuing route guidance" refers to switching the multimedia sys-
tem back on and driving on.
X
Continue route guidance manually (Y page 92).
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The multimedia system
is unable to determine
the vehicle's position.
The multimedia system must identify the vehicle’s position again after
it has been transported.
Example:
R
After transporting the vehicle by ferry
R
After transporting the vehicle by motorail
X
Start the vehicle and pull away.
The multimedia system calculates the vehicle's position. Depending
on the driving situation, this may take some time.
Route guidance may be restricted during the determination of the
vehicle's position.
When positioning is complete, route guidance is resumed with nav-
igation announcements and route guidance displays.
110
Problems with the navigation system
Navigation
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The Navigation
Unavailable Please
refer to the Opera‐
tor's Manual. mes-
sage appears.
The multimedia system has an integrated hard drive on which the
digital map is stored.
To protect the hard drive against damage, the multimedia system
deactivates it at very high and low temperatures. The navigation sys-
tem will then be temporarily unavailable.
X
Let the vehicle and the multimedia system heat up or cool down to
a normal temperature.
X
To hide the message: switch the multimedia system off and then on
again.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
While the map is being
updated from an exter-
nal data medium, you
see a message informing
you that the data
medium containing the
digital map is incompati-
ble with the vehicle soft-
ware.
The data medium containing the digital map cannot be used for the
update.
X
To confirm the message: press the controller.
X
Remove the data medium.
X
Have the system database checked at an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The map software
update has failed.
The data medium is dirty.
X
Clean the data medium.
X
Restart the update.
The data medium is scratched.
X
Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
There is overheating due to excessive temperatures in the vehicle
interior.
X
Wait until the vehicle interior has cooled down.
X
Restart the update.
The multimedia system's integral hard disk has been physically dam-
aged.
X
Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The multimedia system
asks for an activation
code during the map
update.
The digital map is secured with an activation code.
X
Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Problems with the navigation system
111
Navigation
Z
Your multimedia system equipment
These operating instructions describe all the
standard and optional equipment of your multi-
media system, as available at the time of going
to press. Country-specific differences are pos-
sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not
feature all functions described here. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and func-
tions.
Read the information on qualified specialist
workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you operate mobile communication equip-
ment while driving, you will be distracted from
traffic conditions. You could also lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate this equipment when the vehicle
is stationary.
If you makeacall on your mobile phone while
driving, always use hands-free mode. Only use
the mobile phone when road, weather and traffic
conditions permit. Some jurisdictions prohibit
the driver from usingamobile phone while driv-
ingavehicle.
Bear in mind that at a speed of 30 mph (approx-
imately 50 km/h), the vehicle coversadistance
of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) per second.
Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation
may cause damage to your health and the health
of others.
There is scientific discussion surrounding the
possible health risks posed by electromagnetic
fields. You can reduce this risk by using an exte-
rior antenna.
Therefore, connect your mobile communica-
tions equipment to the vehicle's exterior
antenna wherever possible.
General notes
Bluetooth
®
interface
A Bluetooth
®
interface is available for teleph-
ony.
If your mobile phone supports the Bluetooth
®
profile PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile), the
contacts are automatically displayed in the mul-
timedia system. If your mobile phone does not
support the PBAP Bluetooth
®
profile, the multi-
media system will attempt to display the con-
tacts using alternative methods.
You can use the message function if your mobile
phone supports the MAP Bluetooth
®
profile
(Message Access Profile).
Withasuitable mobile phone, you can use the
hands-free system and receive vCards via the
Bluetooth
®
interface.
You can obtain more information about suitable
mobile phones on the Internet at http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect.
You can also obtain more information by calling.
In the USA, you can get in touch with the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center on
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).
In Canada, you can get in touch with the Cus-
tomer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100.
HD Voice
®
The multimedia system supports telephone
calls in HD Voice
®
. The voice quality can be
improved with this procedure.
Requirements for HD Voice
®
:
R
Your mobile phone and mobile phone network
provider support HD Voice
®
.
R
The mobile phone and mobile phone network
provider of the person you are calling support
HD Voice
®
.
Depending on the quality of the connection, the
voice quality may fluctuate.
Call disconnection while the vehicle is
in motion
A call may be disconnected if:
R
there is insufficient network coverage in cer-
tain areas
R
you move from one transmitter/receiver area
(cell) into another and no channels are free
R
you use a SIM card that is not compatible with
the network available
112
General notes
Telephone
Operating options
You can operate the telephone by:
R
using the controller:
turning
sliding 1 or 4
pressing
R
using the touchpad (Y page 28)
R
using the 6 or ~ button on the multi-
function steering wheel
R
using the Voice Control System (see the sep-
arate operating instructions)
Function restrictions
You may have to wait before using telephony via
the multimedia system in the following situa-
tions:
R
if the mobile phone is switched off
R
if Bluetooth
®
is switched off on the mobile
phone
R
if the mobile phone is not (or not yet) logged
into a mobile phone network
R
if the Bluetooth
®
function is switched off in
the multimedia system
The telephone automatically tries to log on to a
network. If no network is available, you may not
be able to make a "911" emergency call. If you
attempt to make an outgoing call, the No Ser‐
vice message will appear for a short while.
Telephone menu
:
Mobile phone network provider
;
Signal strength of the mobile phone network
=
Receiver icon ¢ or ¡
?
Telephone menu character bar
A
Bluetooth
®
device name of the currently
connected mobile phone
B
Enters characters using the touchpad (if
available)
C
Displays the phone book
Symbols : to = and A are not shown until
after a mobile phone has been connected to the
multimedia system. The symbols depend on
your mobile phone and your mobile phone net-
work provider. Further information on connect-
ing a mobile phone (
Y page 113).
Symbol ; shows the current signal strength of
the mobile phone network. If all bars are filled,
you have optimum reception.
If no bars are shown, reception is either very
poor or there is none at all.
i
Receiver icon shows whether a call is
active/being connected ¡ or not ¢.
Calling up the telephone menu:
X
Press %.
Showing the menu bar:
X
Slide 6 the controller.
If the mobile phone connected supports the
MAP Bluetooth
®
profile (Message Access
Profile), the 1 menu item is available. Further
information on text messages and e-mail
(
Y page 129).
If you have an unread text message or e-mail,
the 0 mail symbol is displayed in the status
bar. The symbol disappears once you have read
the text message or e-mail. The ú symbol is
displayed as soon as the message memory on
the connected mobile phone is full. The symbol
disappears once you delete at least one mes-
sage.
Connecting/disconnecting a mobile
phone
Requirements
For telephony via the Bluetooth
®
interface, you
require a Bluetooth
®
-capable mobile phone. The
mobile phone must support Hands-Free Profile
1.0 or above.
On the multimedia system
X
Activate Bluetooth
®
(Y page 45).
X
Switch on NFC (Y page 46).
Connecting/disconnecting a mobile phone
113
Telephone
Z
On the mobile phone
X
Switch on the mobile phone and enter the PIN
when prompted to do so (see the manufac-
turer's operating instructions).
X
Activate Bluetooth
®
and, if necessary, Blue-
tooth
®
visibility for other devices (see the
manufacturer's operating instructions).
This visibility is for restricted periods of time
on some mobile phones (see the manufactur-
er's operating instructions).
X
Set the Bluetooth
®
device name for the
mobile phone if necessary.
The device names for all of one manufacturer's
products might be identical. To make it possible
to clearly identify your mobile phone, change
the device name (see the manufacturer's oper-
ating instructions). The name can be freely
selected.
If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (Phone
Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message
Access Profile) Bluetooth
®
profiles, the follow-
ing information will be transmitted after you
connect:
R
Phone book
R
Call lists
R
Messages
The battery of the mobile phone should always
be kept sufficiently charged in order to prevent
malfunctions.
i
Not all mobile phones available on the mar-
ket are equally suitable. You can obtain more
detailed information about suitable mobile
phones and about the connection between
the mobile phone and the multimedia system
on the Internet at
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect.
You can also obtain more information by call-
ing.
In the USA, you can get in touch with the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).
In Canada, you can get in touch with the Cus-
tomer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100.
i
Some displays (e.g. the signal strength)
depend on the supported version of the
Hands-Free Profile.
Procedure and general information
Authorizing a mobile phone (connecting)
If you connect your mobile phone using NFC
(Near Field Communication) the NFC area of
your mobile phone has to touch the NFC logo on
the DVD changer/single DVD drive. The author-
ization then starts automatically. The NFC range
varies depending on the mobile phone and can
be identified by the logo. Further information
(see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
Before using your mobile phone without NFC
with the multimedia system, you will need to
search for the phone (
Y page 115) and then
authorize it (
Y page 116). Depending on the
mobile phone, authorization either takes place
by means of Secure Simple Pairing or by enter-
ing a passkey. The multimedia system automat-
ically makes the procedure that is relevant for
your mobile phone available. You can recognize
Secure Simple Pairing by the fact that a code is
displayed on the mobile phone and on the mul-
timedia system. You can recognize the passkey
system by the fact that you have to enter a code
on the mobile phone and on the multimedia sys-
tem. The mobile phone is always connected
automatically after authorization.
If the multimedia system does not detect your
mobile phone, this may be due to particular
security settings on your mobile phone. You can
also start the search procedure and authoriza-
tion on the mobile phone (
Y page 116).
Device-specific information on authorizing and
connecting Bluetooth
®
-capable mobile phones
can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center or via the Internet at http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect.
You can authorize up to 15 mobile phones. After
authorization, the connection of the last two tel-
ephones used always functions automatically.
Only one mobile phone can be connected to the
multimedia system at any one time.
De-authorizing (disconnecting) a mobile
phone
The connection is terminated automatically if
you leave the receiver range of the multime
dia
system or deactivate Bluetooth
®
on your mobile
phone.
If you no longer want the Bluetooth
®
connection
to be established automatically, the mobile
phone must be de-authorized (disconnected)
(
Y page 117).
114
Connecting/disconnecting a mobile phone
Telephone
Establishing a connection via NFC
(Near Field Communication)
:
NFC range on the DVD changer/single DVD
drive
X
Mobile phone: touch the NFC logo on the
DVD changer/single DVD drive with the NFC
area of the mobile phone.
The message indicating that a connection via
NFC is being established is displayed in the
multimedia system.
A code may be displayed in the multimedia
system and on the mobile phone.
The code is the same
X
Multimedia system: select Yes.
X
Mobile phone: confirm the code. Depending
on the mobile phone used, you may have to
confirm the connection to the multimedia sys-
tem and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth
®
profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up
to two minutes to be displayed. You may also
save the confirmation on the mobile phone
(see the manufacturer's operating instruc-
tions).
The mobile phone is now authorized and con-
nected to the multimedia system. You can
now speak using the hands-free system.
To ensure an optimum language quality, you
can set the mobile phone's transmission and
reception volume (
Y page 118).
The code is different
X
Multimedia system: select No.
The process is canceled. Repeat the authori-
zation.
If no connection can be established with NFC,
check whether NFC is activated on the mobile
phone and the mobile phone is unlocked. The
NFC range varies depending on the mobile
phone; see the manufacturer's operating
instructions.
Searching for a mobile phone
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Connect Device: turn and press
the controller.
The device list is displayed.
X
To select Search for Phones: turn and
press the controller.
A message is displayed that Bluetooth
®
must
be activated on the mobile phone and must be
made visible to other devices.
X
To select Start Search: press the controller.
The available mobile phones are displayed in
the device list.
The duration of the search depends on the num-
ber of Bluetooth
®
telephones within range and
their characteristics.
If a new phone is found, it appears in the device
list with the Ï symbol. You can now author-
ize (connect) the mobile phone found
(
Y page 116).
If the device list is already full, you will be
requested to de-authorize a mobile phone
(
Y page 117).
When you call up the device list again, de-
authorized devices will be removed from the list.
To update the device list, start the search again.
Connecting/disconnecting a mobile phone
115
Telephone
Z
Symbols in the device list
Sym-
bol
Explanation
Ï
New mobile phone found, not yet
authorized.
Ñ
Mobile phone is authorized, but is
not connected.
#
Mobile phone is authorized and
connected.
Authorizing a mobile phone (connect-
ing)
Authorization via Secure Simple Pairing
If the multimedia system has found your mobile
phone, you can authorize (connect) it.
X
To select a mobile phone from the device list:
turn the controller and press to confirm.
A code is displayed in the multimedia system
and on the mobile phone.
The code is the same
X
Multimedia system: select Yes.
X
Mobile phone: confirm the code. Depending
on the mobile phone used, you may have to
confirm the connection to the multimedia sys-
tem and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth
®
profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up
to two minutes to be displayed. You may also
save the confirmation on the mobile phone
(see the manufacturer's operating instruc-
tions).
The mobile phone is now authorized and con-
nected to the multimedia system. You can
now speak using the hands-free system.
To ensure an optimum language quality, you can
set the mobile phone's transmission and recep-
tion volume (
Y page 118).
The code is different
X
Multimedia system: select No.
The process is canceled. Repeat the authori-
zation.
Authorization via passkey entry (access
code)
If the multimedia system has found your mobile
phone, you can authorize (connect) it.
X
To select a mobile phone from the device list:
turn the controller and press to confirm.
The input menu for the passkey is displayed.
The passkey is a one- to sixteen-digit number
combination which you can choose yourself.
X
Multimedia system: enter the passkey using
the character bar.
X
Select b once all the numbers have been
entered.
X
Mobile phone: enter the same passkey and
confirm your entry. Depending on the mobile
phone used, you may have to confirm the
connection to the multimedia system and for
the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth
®
profiles. The
prompt to confirm may take up to two
minutes to be displayed. You may also save
the confirmation on the mobile phone (see the
manufacturer's operating instructions).
The mobile phone is now authorized and con-
nected to the multimedia system. You can
now speak using the hands-free system.
To ensure an optimum language quality, you can
set the mobile phone's transmission and recep-
tion volume (
Y page 118).
If the Authorization Failed
message
appears, you may have entered a different pass-
key or exceeded the prescribed time limit.
Repeat the procedure.
i
Some mobile phones require a passkey with
four or even more digits.
i
If you wish to re-authorize the mobile phone
after de-authorizing it, you can choose
another passkey for it.
i
Mercedes-Benz recommends de-authoriza-
tion in the multimedia system as well as on
the mobile phone (
Y page 117). Subsequent
authorization may otherwise fail.
Establishing the connection from the
mobile phone
The Bluetooth
®
device name of the multimedia
system is MB Bluetooth
.
X
Multimedia system: call up the telephone
menu.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
116
Connecting/disconnecting a mobile phone
Telephone
X
To select Connect Device: turn and press
the controller.
The device list is displayed.
X
To select Connect via Phone: turn and
press the controller.
A message is displayed, stating that you can
start the search on your mobile phone.
X
Mobile phone: start the search for a Blue-
tooth
®
device (see manufacturer's operating
instructions).
The multimedia system is displayed with the
name MB Bluetooth
in the mobile phone's
device list.
X
Select MB Bluetooth.
A prompt appears in the multimedia system
display asking if the mobile phone should be
authorized.
X
Multimedia system: select Yes.
If No
is selected, the procedure is canceled.
If your mobile phone supports Secure Simple
Pairing, a code is now displayed on both devi-
ces.
The code is the same
X
Multimedia system: select Yes.
X
Mobile phone: confirm the code. Depending
on the mobile phone used, you may have to
confirm the connection to the multimedia sys-
tem and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth
®
profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up
to two minutes to be displayed. You may also
save the confirmation on the mobile phone
(see the manufacturer's operating instruc-
tions).
The mobile phone is now authorized and con-
nected to the multimedia system. You can
now speak using the hands-free system.
To ensure an optimum language quality, you
can set the mobile phone's transmission and
reception volume (
Y page 118).
The code is different
X
Multimedia system: select No.
The process is canceled. Repeat the proce-
dure.
If your mobile phone does not support Secure
Simple Pairing, an input menu is displayed for
the passkey. The passkey is a one- to sixteen-
digit number combination which you can choose
yourself. Enter the same passkey in both the
multimedia system and on the mobile phone and
confirm. Depending on the mobile phone used,
you may have to confirm the connection to the
multimedia system and for the PBAP and MAP
Bluetooth
®
profiles.
Reconnecting automatically
The multimedia system always searches for the
last connected mobile phone.
If no connection can be made to the most
recently connected mobile phone, the system
searches for the mobile phone that was con-
nected before that one.
Switching between mobile phones
If you have authorized more than one mobile
phone, you can switch between the individual
phones.
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Connect Device: turn and press
the controller.
The device list is displayed.
X
To select the desired mobile phone: turn and
press the controller.
The selected mobile phone is searched for
and connected if it is within Bluetooth
®
range
and if Bluetooth
®
is activated.
Only one mobile phone can be connected at any
one time. The currently connected mobile
phone is indicated by the # dot in the device list.
i
You can only switch to another authorized
mobile phone if you are not currently making
a call.
De-authorizing (disconnecting) a
mobile phone
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC recommends de-
authorization in the multimedia system as well
as on the mobile phone. Subsequent authoriza-
tion may otherwise fail.
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
Connecting/disconnecting a mobile phone
117
Telephone
Z
X
To select Connect Device: turn and press
the controller.
The device list is displayed.
X
To highlight the desired mobile phone in the
device list: turn the controller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Deauthorize: turn and press the
controller.
A prompt appears, asking whether you really
wish to de-authorize this device.
X
To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
The mobile phone is de-authorized.
i
Before re-authorizing the mobile phone, you
should also delete the device name MB
Blue‐
tooth from your mobile phone's Bluetooth
®
list.
Displaying connection details
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Connect Device: turn and press
the controller.
The device list is displayed.
X
To highlight the desired mobile phone: turn
the controller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Details: turn and press the con-
troller.
The following information concerning the
selected mobile phone is shown:
R
Bluetooth
®
device name
R
Bluetooth
®
address
R
Availability status (shown after a new
search)
R
Authorization status
X
To close the detailed display: slide 9 the
controller.
Reception and transmission volume
Once the mobile phone has been authorized,
you can optimize the transmission and recep-
tion volume settings. To find out about the best
possible settings for your mobile phone, visit
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect.
You can also obtain more information by calling.
In the USA, you can get in touch with the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center on
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).
In Canada, you can get in touch with the Cus-
tomer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100.
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Connect Device: turn and press
the controller.
X
To highlight the desired mobile phone in the
device list: turn the controller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Reception Volume or Transmis‐
sion Volume: turn and press the controller.
X
To select a volume setting: turn the controller.
X
To accept changes: press the controller.
i
Incorrect settings may have an impact on
the quality of calls.
Using the telephone
Accepting a call
X
To select w Accept: press the controller.
or
X
Press 6 on the multifunction steering
wheel.
The call is accepted.
Additional functions available during a call
(
Y page 120).
Adjusting the call volume (
Y page 118).
Further information about ending a call
(
Y page 122).
118
Using the telephone
Telephone
i
If the phone number of the caller is trans-
ferred, it appears in the display. If the phone
number is saved in the phone book, the con-
tact's name is also displayed. If the phone
number is not transferred, Unknown
is shown
in the display.
Rejecting a call
X
To select = Reject: turn and press the
controller.
or
X
Press ~ on the multifunction steering
wheel.
Making a call
Using the telephone menu
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To select the sequence of numbers: turn and
press the controller for each number.
X
To select w in the telephone menu: turn
and press the controller.
The call is made.
Further information about ending a call
(
Y page 122).
Using the touchpad
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchpad, you
can use this function.
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To select n: turn and press the controller.
X
Draw the sequence of numbers on the touch-
sensitive surface.
X
To select w in the telephone menu: turn
and press the controller.
The call is made.
Further information about the touchpad
(
Y page 30).
Using favorites
This function can be used when a telephone
number has been added as a favorite. Further
information about adding favorites (
Y page 38).
X
Press the favorites button on the controller.
The favorites are displayed.
X
To select a telephone number: turn the con-
troller.
X
To make a call: press the controller.
Using speed dial
Option 1
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To highlight a number from the character bar:
turn the controller.
X
Press the controller for longer than two sec-
onds.
The telephone menu displays the selected
entry. The number is dialed.
Option 2
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Call Lists: turn and press the
controller.
X
To select Speed Dial Preset List: turn
and press the controller.
The speed dial list is displayed.
X
To select an entry and make a call: turn and
press the controller.
The telephone menu displays the selected
entry. The number is dialed.
Option 3 (with telephone keypad)
X
Press one of the number keys on the tele-
phone keypad for longer than two seconds.
The telephone menu displays the selected
entry. The number is dialed.
Further information on setting up speed dial
(
Y page 128).
Further information about ending a call
(
Y page 122).
Using the telephone
119
Telephone
Z
Redial
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To select w in the telephone menu: turn
and press the controller.
The list of outgoing calls is displayed. The
most recently dialed number is at the top.
X
To select an entry and make a call: turn and
press the controller.
For redialing using the multifunction steering
wheel (see the vehicle Operator's Manual).
Further information about ending a call
(
Y page 122).
Using call lists
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Call Lists: turn and press the
controller.
X
To select Calls Received or Calls Dialed:
turn and press the controller.
The relevant list is displayed.
X
To select an entry and make a call: turn and
press the controller.
Selecting and placing a call using the multifunc-
tion steering wheel (see vehicle Operator's Man-
ual)
Further information about ending a call
(
Y page 122).
Using the phone book
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To select Name in the telephone menu: turn
and press the controller.
X
Search for a contact (Y page 124).
X
To make a call: press the controller.
Selecting and placing a call using the multifunc-
tion steering wheel (see vehicle Operator's Man-
ual)
Further information about ending a call
(
Y page 122).
Using the telephone keypad on the con-
troller
If your vehicle is equipped with a telephone key-
pad, you can use this function.
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
Enter the digits using the telephone keypad.
As soon as one of the buttons on the tele-
phone keypad is touched, the corresponding
button is highlighted in the display.
X
To select w in the telephone menu: turn
and press the controller.
The call is made.
Functions available during a call
Overview
:
Adds a call (Y page 121)
;
Person you are calling
=
Symbol for active telephone connection
?
Ends a call
A
Switches the microphone on/off
(
Y page 121)
B
Sends DTMF tones (not possible with all
mobile phones) (
Y page 121)
Other functions:
R
Accepting a waiting call (Y page 122)
R
Call waiting (Y page 121)
R
Conducting a conference call (Y page 122)
Availability depends on the network (only pos-
sible on GSM networks) and the Bluetooth
®
mobile phone.
120
Using the telephone
Telephone
Adds a call
:
Adds a call
If the mobile phone network provider and the
mobile phone support the function, you can
make another call during an existing call. The
previously active call is held.
X
To select °
2
: turn and press the controller.
X
To makeacall, e.g.:
R
Using the telephone menu(Y page 119)
R
Using redial (Y page 120)
R
Using the call lists(Y page 120)
R
Using the phone book (Y page 120)
R
Using speed dial (Y page 119)
Switching the microphone on/off
This function is available in the telephone menu
during an active phone call.
Switching off the microphone:
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Microphone Off: turn and press
the controller.
If the microphone is switched off, the Q
symbol and the The microphone is off.
message are displayed.
Switching on the microphone:
X
Select Microphone On.
The Q symbol disappears. The The micro‐
phone is on. message is shown.
Sending DTMF tones
This function is not supported by all mobile
phones.
Answering machines or other devices can be
controlled by DTMF tones, e.g. for remote query
functions.
X
If you would like to listen to the messages on
your answering machine, for example, dial the
corresponding number.
Transmitting individual characters
X
Once a connection has been established to
the answer phone, select the desired charac-
ters in the telephone menu: turn and press the
controller each time.
Every character selected will be transmitted
immediately.
or
X
Press the corresponding number button on
the telephone keypad.
Calls with several participants
Switching between calls (call waiting)
If you make another call, you can switch
between the two calls (call waiting). This func-
tion depends on your mobile phone network
provider and the mobile phone (see the manu-
facturer's operating instructions).
The calls are marked1and 2. The active call is
highlighted.
Switching between the calls
X
To select °
1
or °
2
: turn and press the con-
troller.
or
X
Press 6 on the multifunction steering
wheel.
The selected call is active. The other call is on
hold.
Using the telephone
121
Telephone
Z
Ending the active call
X
To select ~ in the telephone menu: turn
and press the controller.
or
X
Press ~ on the multifunction steering
wheel.
The other call is still on hold.
X
To activate the call on hold: select w
Resume.
The call on hold is activated. If you select
=
Hang Up, the call on hold is also ended.
i
On some mobile phones, the call on hold is
activated as soon as the active call is ended.
Conference call
You can interconnect active and held calls. This
permits several parties to hear one another and
speak with one another. This function depends
on your mobile phone network provider and the
mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating
instructions).
X
Add a call (Y page 121).
or
X
Answer an incoming call (Y page 122).
X
To select Conference in the telephone menu:
turn and press the controller.
The new participant is included in the confer-
ence call. Conference
is displayed in the tele-
phone menu.
Incoming call during an existing call
(call waiting)
The call waiting function depends on your
mobile phone network provider and your mobile
phone. Depending on the mobile phone used,
behavior when answering a call may vary (see
the manufacturer's operating instructions).
Call waiting: if you receive a call while already
in a call, a message is shown. You also hear a
tone. You can decide whether to accept or reject
the call.
Accepting
X
To select w Accept: press the controller.
or
X
Press 6 on the multifunction steering
wheel.
The incoming call is active, the previously
active call is on hold. You can switch back and
forth between both calls (call waiting)
(
Y page 121).
i
Depending on the mobile phone, you may
also be able to accept the incoming call (call
waiting) on your mobile phone. This function
and behavior depends on your mobile phone
network provider and the mobile phone (see
the manufacturer's operating instructions).
Rejecting
X
To select = Reject: turn and press the
controller.
or
X
Press ~ on the multifunction steering
wheel.
The behavior after the call is rejected depends
on your mobile phone and mobile phone net-
work provider.
Option 1: The originally active call is contin-
ued and the incoming call is rejected.
Option 2: The originally active call is ended
and the incoming call is accepted.
Option 3: Both calls are ended.
Ends an active call
X
To select = in the telephone menu: turn
and press the controller.
or
X
Press ~ on the multifunction steering
wheel.
The active call is ended.
Mobile phone voice recognition
You can start or end voice recognition on your
mobile phone with this function. Further infor-
122
Mobile phone voice recognition
Telephone
mation on the voice recognition service; see the
manufacturer's operating instructions.
To start the mobile phone voice recognition:
X
Connect the mobile phone to the multimedia
system (
Y page 113).
X
Press and hold the ó button on the multi-
function steering wheel for more than one
second.
You can now use the mobile phone voice rec-
ognition.
To end the mobile phone voice recognition:
X
Press ñ on the multifunction steering
wheel.
The mobile phone voice recognition is stop-
ped.
Phone book
Introduction
The phone book displays the contacts from the
address book which have a phone number.
The phone book of the mobile phone is auto-
matically displayed in the multimedia system
after the connection is established (default set-
ting). You can deactivate automatic calling up
(
Y page 140).
In the telephone book, you can:
R
Create new contacts (Y page 125)
R
Add information to contacts (Y page 125)
R
Search for contacts (Y page 124)
R
Store contacts (Y page 125)
R
Delete contacts (Y page 126)
Further information on importing contacts
(
Y page 140).
When you import, save, edit or add contacts,
they will be permanently saved in the multime-
dia system. These contacts will remain available
even when you connect the multimedia system
to a different mobile phone. You can view these
contacts even without a mobile phone.
Calling up the phone book
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To select Name in the telephone menu: turn
and press the controller.
If the phone book contains contacts, they will
be displayed in alphabetical order. The char-
acter bar at the bottom of the display is active.
You can now search for a contact
(
Y page 124).
Further information on the symbols shown
(
Y page 123).
i
You can also call up the phone book with the
multifunction steering wheel; see the Vehi-
cles Operator's Manual.
Symbol overview
Sym-
bol
Explanation
Æ
Contact that has been entered, edi-
ted or saved in the multimedia sys-
tem
\
Contact with voice tag
These contacts have also been
assigned a voice tag. For more infor-
mation, see the separate operating
instructions.
Ã
Contact that was called up from a
mobile phone
¯
Contact imported from the SD mem-
ory card or USB device
®
Contact imported via the Bluetooth
®
interface
Phone book
123
Telephone
Z
Searching for a contact
Using the character bar
You determine the first letter of the contact you
are looking for with the first character you enter.
X
To select characters: turn the controller and
press to confirm.
The first contact with the selected first char-
acter is highlighted in the phone book. If there
are similar contacts, the next different char-
acter is shown. For example, with contacts
such as Jana
and John, the beginnings of the
names are identical. The next different char-
acters A
and O are offered for selection.
X
Select the characters of the contact you are
searching for one by one, pressing and con-
firming with the controller each time.
X
To end the search: select ¬.
The contacts in the phone book are displayed.
X
To select a contact: turn and press the con-
troller.
The G symbol indicates that a contact contains
more than one phone number.
X
To select a contact with the G symbol: turn
the controller and press to confirm.
The phone numbers are displayed. The G
symbol changes to I.
X
To call a telephone number: turn and press
the controller.
Back to the character bar
X
Press the % button repeatedly until the
character bar is displayed.
Information about character entry (
Y page 34).
Using the telephone keypad on the con-
troller
If your vehicle is equipped with a telephone key-
pad, you can use this function.
You determine the first letter of the contact you
are looking for with the first character you enter.
X
For example, to enter the letter C: press the
l number key briefly three times in suc-
cession.
As soon as you touch the number key, the
number is highlighted in the additional display
area.
The character appears at the bottom of the
display the first time the key is pressed and
shows all the available characters. It switches
to the next character each time the key is
pressed.
Using the touchpad
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchpad, you
can use this function.
You determine the first letter of the contact you
are looking for with the first character you enter.
X
Draw the letter on the touchpad surface.
The first contact with the selected first char-
acter is highlighted in the phone book.
Further information on handwriting recogni-
tion on the touchpad (
Y page 30).
X
Draw additional letters on the touchpad sur-
face one after another.
X
To complete the search and return to the
phone book: press the touchpad.
X
To select and call the contact: glide up or
down and press.
Using the multifunction steering wheel
X
Dial a number from the phone book; see the
vehicle Operator's Manual.
Displaying the details of a contact
124
Phone book
Telephone
X
To highlight a contact in the phone book: turn
the controller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Details: turn and press the con-
troller.
The detailed view appears.
Closing the detailed display
X
To select %: turn and press the controller.
Adding a new contact
X
Slide 5 the controller repeatedly in the
phone book until the selection list appears.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select New: turn and press the controller.
X
To select a category for the number, e.g.
Home
: turn the controller and press to confirm.
X
To select a telephone category, e.g. Mobile
Phone: turn the controller and press to con-
firm.
If you have marked a number as preferred, it is
shown at the top of the list.
X
To select Continue: turn and press the con-
troller.
The input menu with data fields is displayed.
X
Enter characters using the controller
(
Y page 34), for example.
X
To finish and save an entry: select ¬.
The contact is created in the phone book and
in the address book.
Adding information to a contact
A maximum of five telephone numbers can be
saved for one contact.
X
To highlight a contact in the phone book: turn
the controller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Add Phone No.: turn and press the
controller.
X
To select a category for the number, e.g.
Home
: turn the controller and press to confirm.
X
To select a telephone category, e.g. Mobile
Phone: turn the controller and press to con-
firm.
If you have marked a number as preferred, it is
shown at the top of the list.
X
To select Continue: turn and press the con-
troller.
The telephone number has been saved.
If five numbers are already stored for the con-
tact you are searching for, a prompt will appear
asking whether you wish to overwrite one of the
existing numbers.
If you wish to overwrite one of the phone num-
bers:
X
To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
A list of the existing five phone numbers is
displayed.
X
To select the phone number to be overwritten
from the list: turn the controller and press to
confirm.
The entry field for the new phone number is
displayed.
X
Enter characters using the controller
(
Y page 34), for example.
If you do not wish to overwrite any of the phone
numbers:
X
To select No: turn and press the controller.
The process is canceled.
Saving a contact
Saved contacts are indicated in the phone book
by different symbols (
Y page 123).
X
Search for a contact on the mobile phone d
(
Y page 124).
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Save: turn and press the controller.
The contact has now been saved. The contact
is identified by the ¥ symbol in the phone
book.
i
Saved contacts are also displayed in the
address book.
Phone book
125
Telephone
Z
Saving or editing the contact data in the mul-
timedia system does not change the contacts
on the mobile phone. If automatic calling-up
of phone contacts is activated, the multime-
dia system displays the copy ¥ with the
changed data.
Deleting a name
You can delete contacts that have been added,
supplemented, saved or imported in the multi-
media system.
If there are one or several phone numbers saved
under the contact, the contact is deleted from
the phone book and the address book.
If there are additional entries under the contact,
such as a navigable destination, only the phone
numbers are deleted. The contact is retained in
the address book with the remaining entries.
X
To highlight a contact in the phone book: turn
the controller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Delete Entry: turn and press the
controller.
A prompt appears asking whether the contact
should be deleted.
X
To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
The phone number is deleted.
Closing the phone book
X
To select & from the character bar: turn the
controller and press to confirm.
or
X
Press the % button.
Call lists
Introduction
If your mobile phone supports the PBAP Blue-
tooth
®
profile, the call lists from the mobile
phone are displayed in the multimedia system.
If your mobile phone does not support the PBAP
Bluetooth
®
profile, the multimedia system will
attempt to display the mobile phone call lists
using alternative methods. If the mobile phone
call lists cannot be displayed, the multimedia
system generates its own call lists. These are
not the same as the call lists in your mobile
phone.
The call lists option is not available unless a
mobile phone is connected to the multimedia
system.
If the contact for an incoming call is not saved in
the address book, you can use the call list to
save the telephone number. You can save this
telephone number as a new contact in the
address book or add it to an existing contact
(
Y page 127).
i
If you connect a different mobile phone to
the multimedia system, the call lists from the
new mobile phone are displayed.
Opening the call list and selecting an
entry
Example: list of selected phone numbers
:
Date and time (if available)
;
Telephone number of the highlighted entry
and symbols (if assigned)
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Call Lists: turn and press the
controller.
X
To select Calls Received or Calls Dialed:
turn and press the controller.
The relevant list is displayed.
X
To highlight an entry: turn the controller.
X
To make a call: press the controller.
126
Call lists
Telephone
Closing the call list
X
To select &: slide 8 and press the con-
troller.
or
X
Press the % button.
The list is closed.
Displaying details from a list entry
Abbreviated list entries can also be shown in full.
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Call Lists: turn and press the
controller.
X
To select Calls Received or Calls Dialed:
turn and press the controller.
The relevant list is displayed.
X
To highlight the desired entry: turn the con-
troller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Details: turn and press the con-
troller.
The details are displayed.
X
To go back to the list: slide 8 the controller
repeatedly until the list is highlighted.
Saving telephone numbers
Adding new entries to the address book
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Call Lists: turn and press the
controller.
X
To select Calls Received or Calls Dialed:
turn and press the controller.
The relevant list is displayed.
X
To highlight the desired telephone number:
turn the controller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Save: turn and press the controller.
X
Select New Entry.
X
Select a number category, e.g. Home.
X
Select a telephone category, e.g. Mobile
Phone.
The selected category is marked with #.
If you have marked a number as Preferred
, it
is shown at the top of the list.
X
Select Continue.
The entry field for the name of the new con-
tact is displayed. The entry field for the tele-
phone number is filled in automatically.
X
Enter characters using the controller
(
Y page 34), the telephone keypad or the
touchpad (
Y page 30), depending on the vehi-
cle's equipment.
X
To finish and save an entry: select ¬.
The new contact has been created.
Adding information to an address book
entry
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Call Lists: turn and press the
controller.
X
To select Calls Received or Calls Dialed:
turn and press the controller.
The relevant list is displayed.
X
To highlight the desired telephone number:
turn the controller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Save: turn and press the controller.
X
Select Add to Contact.
X
Select a number category, e.g. Home.
X
Select a telephone category, e.g. Mobile
Phone.
X
Select Continue.
The address book is displayed.
Call lists
127
Telephone
Z
X
Search for the desired entry (Y page 136).
X
Press the controller when you have finished
searching.
The telephone number has been saved.
A maximum of five telephone numbers can be
saved for one contact.
If five numbers are already stored for the con-
tact you are searching for, a prompt will appear
asking whether you wish to overwrite one of the
existing numbers.
If you wish to overwrite one of the phone num-
bers:
X
To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
A list of the existing five phone numbers is
displayed.
X
To select the phone number to be overwritten
from the list: turn the controller and press to
confirm.
The entry is overwritten with the new tele-
phone number.
If you do not wish to overwrite any of the phone
numbers:
X
To select No: turn and press the controller.
The process is canceled.
Deleting call lists
Call lists which are generated and managed by
the multimedia system can be deleted in the
multimedia system.
You cannot delete call lists from the multimedia
system which are displayed on a mobile phone
that supports the PBAP Bluetooth
®
.
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Call Lists: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select Delete Call Lists.
A prompt appears asking whether you wish to
delete all call lists.
X
To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
The call lists are deleted.
i
If you delete call lists from the mobile phone
(see the manufacturer's operating instruc-
tions), the multimedia system updates the
call list display the next time it connects.
Speed dial lists
Setting up speed dial
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To call up the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Call Lists: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select Speed Dial Preset List.
The speed dial list is displayed.
X
To highlight a memory position for the speed
dial: turn the controller.
If you highlight an entry that already exists in
the speed dial list, this is overwritten with the
new entry.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
Select Assign Speed Dial Preset.
The phone book is displayed.
X
Search for a contact (Y page 124).
X
To select a contact: turn and press the con-
troller.
The phone number has been saved as a speed
dial.
Deleting a speed dial number
Deleting a speed dial preset
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To call up the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Call Lists: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select Speed Dial Preset List.
The speed dial list is displayed.
X
To highlight the memory position you want to
delete: turn the controller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Delete Speed Dial Preset: turn
and press the controller.
X
To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
The speed dial preset has been deleted.
128
Speed dial lists
Telephone
Deleting all speed dial presets
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To call up the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Call Lists: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select Speed Dial Preset List.
The speed dial list is displayed.
X
To highlight the desired memory position:
turn the controller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Delete All Speed Dial Pre
sets: turn and press the controller.
X
To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
All speed dials are deleted.
Messages (text messages and e-
mails)
Requirements
To use the message functions, the connected
mobile phone must support the MAP Bluetooth
®
profile. When connecting the mobile phone, you
may have to accept the prompt for the MAP
Bluetooth
®
profile.
With some mobile phones, some settings still
have to be made after connecting to the multi-
media system (see the manufacturer's operat-
ing instructions). The messages are then dis-
played the next time you connect to the multi-
media system.
An e-mail account must be set up on the mobile
phone for the e-mail function (see the manufac-
turer’s operating instructions).
To read and write e-mails in the multimedia sys-
tem, the e-mail account first needs to be con-
figured(
Y page 130).
Some mobile phones with the MAP Bluetooth
®
profile:
R
only show new text messages
R
do not support the deleting or editing of text
messages
R
do not support the drafts folder for text mes-
sages
R
do not support the sending of text messages
R
do not support the e-mail function
R
do not send messages when in a locked sta-
tus
Not all mobile phones avai
lable on the market
are equally suitable. Further information about
settings and supported functions of Bluetooth
®
-
capable mobile phones can be found on the
Internet at
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect.
You can also obtain more information by calling.
In the USA, you can get in touch with the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center on
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).
In Canada, you can get in touch with the Cus-
tomer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100.
Function restrictions
Text messages cannot be written while the vehi-
cle is in motion.
General notes
New messages are identified by the / sym-
bol in the display of the multimedia system and
an audible signal. Once you have read all the
messages, the symbol is no longer displayed.
The multimedia system displays the 100 newest
text messages and e-mails.
The ú symbol is displayed when the mobile
phone's message memory is full. The symbol is
no longer displayed if you delete messages.
Settings
Calling up the settings menu for mes-
sages
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select 1: turn and press the controller.
The message menu is displayed.
Messages (text messages and e-mails)
129
Telephone
Z
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Settings: turn and press the con-
troller.
The text message settings and the available e-
mail accounts of the connected mobile phone
will be displayed.
Configuring the text messages dis-
played
X
Call up the settings menu for messages
(
Y page 129).
X
To highlight Text Message: turn the control-
ler.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
A menu with the following options is shown:
R
All Messages
All the messages are displayed.
R
New Messages
Only the messages that are new on the
mobile phone are displayed. You can also
display the last 100 text messages using
the Download
option in the message menu.
R
Off
The messages are not displayed automati-
cally. You can display the 100 newest text
messages from the mobile phone using the
Download
option in the message menu.
X
To select the required option: turn and press
the controller.
Configuring the e-mails displayed
X
Call up the settings menu for messages
(
Y page 129).
X
To highlight an e-mail account: turn the con-
troller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
A menu with the following options is shown:
R
All Messages
All the messages are displayed.
R
New Messages
Only the messages that are new on the
mobile phone are displayed. You can also
display the last 100 text messages using
the Download
option in the message menu.
R
Off
The messages are not displayed automati-
cally. You can display the last 100 text
messages using the Download
option in the
message menu.
X
To select the required option: turn and press
the controller.
Configuring an e-mail account
X
Call up the settings menu for messages
(
Y page 129).
X
To select an e-mail account: turn and press
the controller.
The e-mail account is now configured. E-mails
can now be received and sent in the multi-
media system.
Deactivating the e-mail function
X
Call up the settings menu for messages
(
Y page 129).
X
To select E-Mail Off: turn and press the
controller.
E-mail reception is deactivated.
Changing the displayed name of the e-
mail account
Some mobile phones:
R
do not support the changing of the displayed
name
R
support only the e-mail address of the e-mail
account
X
Call up the settings menu for messages
(
Y page 129).
X
To highlight an e-mail account: turn the con-
troller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Own E-Mail Address: turn and
press the controller.
The input menu for entering your own e-mail
address is displayed.
Downloading messages manually
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select 1: turn and press the controller.
The message menu is displayed.
130
Messages (text messages and e-mails)
Telephone
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Download: turn and press the con-
troller.
Downloading text messages and e-mails
from the phone
X
Select From the Phone.
The messages are downloaded. If you have
selected Automatic Download
in the e-mail
settings, manual downloading is not possible.
Updating from the e-mail server by the
mobile phone
X
Select From the E-Mail Server.
The e-mails in the mobile phone are updated.
This function is not supported by all mobile
phones.
Reading messages
In the message menu
The message menu contains all the unread text
messages and e-mails. If the corresponding
folder is called up, the messages are displayed
sorted by text messages and e-mails.
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select 1: turn and press the controller.
The message menu is displayed with the
unread messages.
X
To select the message: turn and press the
controller.
The message text is displayed.
X
To close the message text: press the %
button.
If you want to read messages that have already
been read again, you have to call up the corre-
sponding message folder (
Y page 131).
In the message folder
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select 1: turn and press the controller.
The message menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Folder: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
To select Text Message or E-Mail: turn and
press the controller.
The selected folder is displayed.
X
To select the message: turn and press the
controller.
The message is displayed.
X
To scroll through the message or select phone
numbers in the text: turn the controller.
The display scrolls up or down line by line, or
skips to the next or previous telephone num-
ber and automatically highlights it.
X
To return to the list: press %.
The following sub-folders can be selected
for text messages and e-mails:
R
Inbox
This folder contains all the incoming mes-
sages.
R
Outbox
This folder contains all the outgoing mes-
sages.
R
Drafts
This folder contains all the messages that you
have saved as a draft.
Messages (text messages and e-mails)
131
Telephone
Z
i
Folders cannot be selected if they are
empty.
Depending on the mobile phone used, the sub-
folder function may be available.
Read-aloud function for messages
X
To start the read-aloud function: press the
controller when the message is displayed.
X
To select Read Aloud: turn and press the
controller.
The multimedia system reads the message
aloud.
X
To cancel the read-aloud function: press the
8 button.
or
X
Press the controller, select Cancel Read-
Aloud Function and press the controller
again.
You can set the language (
Y page 46) and the
speed (
Y page 43) of the read-aloud function.
Displaying details and phone numbers
The multimedia system can also show a short-
ened sender display in full.
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select 1: turn and press the controller.
The message menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Folder: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
To select Text Message or E-Mail: turn and
press the controller.
The selected folder is displayed.
X
To highlight the desired message: turn the
controller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Details: turn and press the con-
troller.
The detailed view appears.
X
To close the detailed display: slide 8 the
controller.
X
To return to the telephone menu: press the
% button.
Writing text messages
Writing a new text message
Observe the requirements for the message func-
tion (
Y page 129).
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select 1: turn and press the controller.
The message menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select New: turn and press the controller.
X
To select Text Message: turn and press the
controller.
The text message input menu is displayed.
The To:
input line is selected.
Entering a recipient
X
Enter characters using the controller
(
Y page 34), the telephone keypad or the
touchpad (
Y page 31), depending on the vehi-
cle's equipment.
or
X
To enter a phone number from the phone
book: select the Æ symbol.
The contacts from the address book which
have a phone number are displayed.
X
Search for and select an entry (Y page 124).
The number is copied to the recipient line.
Entering text and sending text messages
X
If the phone number was entered manually,
first select the text input line: select 5 in the
character bar.
X
Enter characters.
132
Messages (text messages and e-mails)
Telephone
The multimedia system contains templates
which you can use to compile your messages
(
Y page 134).
X
To send the text message: select OK.
Answering a text message
Observe the requirements for the message func-
tion (
Y page 129).
X
Display the message (Y page 131).
X
Press the controller.
X
To select Reply: turn and press the controller.
The text message input menu is displayed.
The addressee's details are automatically fil-
led in using the details in the original mes-
sage.
Writing e-mails
Writing a new e-mail
Observe the requirements for the message func-
tion (
Y page 129).
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select 1: turn and press the controller.
The message menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select New: turn and press the controller.
X
To select E-Mail: turn and press the control-
ler.
The e-mail input menu appears. The To:
input
line is selected.
Entering a recipient
X
Enter characters using the controller
(
Y page 34), the telephone keypad or the
touchpad (Y page 31), depending on the vehi-
cle's equipment.
or
X
To insert an e-mail address from the address
book: select the Æ symbol.
The contacts from the address book which
have an e-mail address are displayed.
X
Search for and select an entry (Y page 124).
The e-mail address is copied to the addressee
line.
Entering the subject
X
To select the Subject: input line: select 5 in
the character bar.
X
Enter characters.
Entering text and sending e-mails
X
To select an input line for text: select 5 in the
character bar.
X
Enter characters.
The multimedia system contains templates
which you can use to compile your messages
(
Y page 134).
X
To send the e-mail: select OK.
Answering an e-mail
Observe the requirements for the message func-
tion (
Y page 129).
X
Display the message (Y page 131).
X
To call up a menu: press the controller.
X
To select Reply: turn and press the controller.
The e-mail input menu appears. The addres-
see's details are automatically filled in using
the details in the original message.
When replying to an e-mail, you can also select
Reply to All
instead of Reply. In this case,
the reply is sent not just to the sender but to all
those who received the original message.
Forwarding an e-mail
Observe the requirements for the message func-
tion (
Y page 129).
X
Display the message (Y page 131).
X
To call up a menu: press the controller.
X
To select Forward: turn and press the con-
troller.
The input menu appears. The subject line is
automatically filled in with the same details as
those in the original message.
Messages (text messages and e-mails)
133
Telephone
Z
Text templates
Using text templates
:
Displays text templates
X
Select the input line for a text message
(
Y page 132) or e-mail (Y page 133).
X
To select text templates : in the character
bar: turn and press the controller.
The text templates are displayed.
X
To select and insert a text template: turn and
press the controller.
The text template is inserted into the text
message or e-mail.
Editing text templates
:
Displays text templates
X
Select the input line for a text message
(
Y page 132) or e-mail (Y page 133).
X
To select text templates : in the character
bar: turn and press the controller.
The text templates are displayed.
X
To highlight the text template to be edited:
turn the controller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Edit: turn and press the controller.
The text template is displayed in an input line.
X
Edit the text template as desired. Further
information on character entry using the con-
troller (
Y page 34). Alternatively, depending
on the vehicle equipment, you can enter char-
acters using the telephone keypad or the
touchpad (
Y page 30).
X
To adopt changes to the text template, select
¬: turn and press the controller.
The text template has been changed.
Calling a text message sender
X
Display the message (Y page 131).
X
To call up a menu: press the controller.
X
To select Call Sender: turn and press the
controller.
The call is made.
Using a phone number in the text
Numbers in text messages that are highlighted
can be used.
X
To highlight and select a usable phone num-
ber while the message is displayed: turn and
press the controller.
X
To select Use: press the controller.
X
To select Call: turn and press the controller.
The call is made.
i
It is possible that a highlighted numerical
sequence may not contain a telephone num-
ber.
Storing the sender as a new entry in
the address book
Storing the sender of a text message
X
To call up the menu when a text message is
displayed: press the controller.
X
To select Save Number: turn and press the
controller.
X
To select New Entry: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select a number category, e.g. Home.
X
Select a telephone category, e.g. Mobile
Phone.
X
Select Continue.
The input line for the name of the new contact
is displayed. The input line for the telephone
number is filled in automatically.
134
Messages (text messages and e-mails)
Telephone
X
Enter characters using the controller
(
Y page 34), the telephone keypad or the
touchpad (
Y page 31), depending on the vehi-
cle's equipment.
X
To finish the entry: select OK.
The new contact has been created.
Saving the sender of an e-mail
X
To call up the menu when an e-mail is dis-
played: press the controller.
X
To select Save Sender's E-Mail Address:
turn and press the controller.
X
To select New Entry: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select a category, e.g. Home.
X
Select Continue.
The input line for the name of the new contact
is displayed. The input line for the e-mail
address is filled in automatically.
X
Enter characters using the controller
(
Y page 34), the telephone keypad or the
touchpad (
Y page 31), depending on the vehi-
cle's equipment.
X
To finish the entry: select OK.
The new contact has been created.
Adding the sender to an address book
entry
Storing the sender of a text message
X
To call up the menu when a text message is
displayed: press the controller.
X
To select Save Number: turn and press the
controller.
X
To select Add Phone Number: turn and press
the controller.
X
To select a category for the number, e.g.
Home
: turn the controller and press to confirm.
X
To select a telephone category, e.g. Mobile
Phone: turn the controller and press to con-
firm.
X
To select Continue: turn and press the con-
troller.
The address book is displayed.
X
Search for the desired entry (Y page 136).
X
Press the controller when you have finished
searching.
The telephone number has been added.
A maximum of five telephone numbers can be
saved for one contact.
Saving the sender of an e-mail
Up to two e-mail addresses can be saved for one
contact.
X
To call up the menu when an e-mail is dis-
played: press the controller.
X
To select Save Sender's E-Mail Address:
turn and press the controller.
X
To select Add: turn and press the controller.
The address book is displayed.
X
Search for the desired entry (Y page 136).
X
Press the controller when you have finished
searching.
The e-mail address has been added.
Deleting messages
X
Call up the message folder (Y page 131).
X
To select the message: turn the controller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Delete: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
The message is deleted.
i
This delete function is not supported by all
mobile phones. The Delete failed.
mes-
sage then appears.
Address book
Introduction
Always pay attention to traffic conditions.
Familiarize yourself with the address book func-
tions before beginning your journey.
You can use the multimedia system when the
road and traffic conditions permit. You could
otherwise become involved in an accident in
which you or others could be injured.
The address book displays all the contacts from
the various sources (mobile phone, memory
card, USB device, the phone book of the multi-
media system, navigation).
You can use the contacts to make telephone
calls, navigate and to write messages.
Address book
135
Telephone
Z
If a mobile phone is connected to the multimedia
system and automatic calling up is activated
(
Y page 140), the mobile phone's contacts are
displayed in the address book. If you disconnect
the mobile phone from the multimedia system,
these contacts are no longer displayed in the
address book.
When you import, save, edit or add contacts,
they will be saved in the multimedia system.
These contacts will remain available even when
you connect the multimedia system to a differ-
ent mobile phone. You can view these contacts
even without a mobile phone.
i
The address book can store a total of 5000
contacts.
R
2000 entries are reserved for permanently
saved contacts.
R
3000 entries are reserved for contacts that
you can load from the mobile phone.
i
Before selling your vehicle, delete the con-
tacts saved in the multimedia system using
the reset function (
Y page 50).
Calling up the address book
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the main function bar: slide 5
the controller.
X
To select Phone: press the controller.
X
To select Address Book: turn and press the
controller.
X
To browse in the address book: turn the con-
troller.
An address book entry can also include a pic-
ture. This is shown to the left of the address
data. Address book entries with pictures can
only be created by importing vCards (vcf
files). Further information on importing
vCards (
Y page 140). The quality of the pic-
ture depends on the picture's resolution.
Searching for a contact
Using the character bar
X
Call up the address book (Y page 136).
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Search: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
To select characters: turn the controller and
press to confirm.
The first contact with the selected first char-
acter is highlighted in the address book. If
there are similar contacts, the next different
character is shown. For example, with con-
tacts such as Jana
and John, the beginnings
of the names are identical. The next different
character A
and O are offered for selection.
X
Select the characters of the contact you are
searching for one by one, pressing and con-
firming with the controller each time.
X
To end the search: select ¬.
The contacts in the address book are dis-
played.
X
To select a contact: turn and press the con-
troller.
Back to the character bar
X
Press the % button repeatedly until the
character bar is displayed.
Information about character entry (
Y page 34)
Using the touchpad
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchpad you
can use this function.
X
Call up the address book (Y page 136).
X
To switch to the menu bar: glide down.
X
Select Search.
X
Draw a letter on the touchpad surface.
The first contact with the selected first char-
acter is highlighted in the address book.
Further information on handwriting recogni-
tion on the touchpad (
Y page 30).
X
Draw additional letters on the touchpad sur-
face one after another.
136
Address book
Telephone
X
To complete the search and return to the
phone book: press the touchpad.
X
To select and call the contact: glide up or
down and press.
Adding a new contact
You can enter address data directly into the
address book. If you store telephone numbers in
the phone book of the multimedia system, these
are also saved in the address book. If you store
a navigation destination, the multimedia system
creates an address book entry that includes the
complete navigable address data.
X
Call up the address book (Y page 136).
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select New: turn and press the controller.
The surname and first name input lines are
displayed.
X
Enter characters using the controller
(
Y page 34), the telephone keypad or the
touchpad (
Y page 30), depending on the vehi-
cle's equipment.
X
To save surnames and first names: select
¬.
The details for the contact are displayed.
X
To add the desired entry (e.g. Add E-Mail
Address): turn and press the controller.
Depending on the type of entry, the corre-
sponding input menu appears.
X
Enter characters using the controller
(
Y page 34), the telephone keypad or the
touchpad (
Y page 30), depending on the vehi-
cle's equipment.
X
To finish and save an entry: select ¬.
Displaying contact details
X
Call up the address book (Y page 136).
X
To select a contact: turn and press the con-
troller.
The details for the contact are displayed.
The entries can be categorized as follows:
\
Business details
6
Home details
i An address book entry can contain the fol-
lowing information:
R
name
R
first name
R
company
R
up to five telephone numbers
R
two email addresses
R
Internet address
R
two addresses
R
two navigation addresses (transferred from
navigation(
Y page 73))
R
geo-coordinates
Adding information to a contact
X
Call up the address book (Y page 136).
X
To select a contact: turn and press the con-
troller.
The details for the contact are displayed.
X
To add a desired entry (e.g. Add E-Mail
Address): turn and press the controller.
Depending on the type of entry, the corre-
sponding input menu appears.
X
Enter characters using the controller
(
Y page 34), the telephone keypad or the
touchpad (
Y page 30), depending on the vehi-
cle's equipment.
X
To finish and save an entry: select ¬.
A maximum of five telephone numbers can be
saved for one contact.
Starting route guidance to an address
or geo-coordinates
If an address with a ZIP code is saved, the
address can be used for route guidance. If the
ZIP code cannot be assigned to an exact
address, you can adjust the destination subse-
quently using the controller.
Address book
137
Telephone
Z
X
Call up the address book (Y page 136).
X
To select a contact: turn and press the con-
troller.
The details for the contact are displayed.
X
To select the address or geo-coordinates:
turn and press the controller.
The navigation menu is displayed.
X
To select Start Route Guidance: slide 6
and press the controller.
The route to the destination address is calcu-
lated and route guidance starts.
Making a call
X
Call up the address book (Y page 136).
X
To select a contact: turn and press the con-
troller.
The details for the contact are displayed.
X
To select a telephone number: turn and press
the controller.
The number is dialed. Further information
about the functions during a call
(
Y page 120).
Sending text messages
X
Call up the address book (Y page 136).
X
To select a contact: turn and press the con-
troller.
The details for the contact are displayed.
X
To highlight the telephone number: turn the
controller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Send Text Message: turn and
press the controller.
The entry fields for a text message are dis-
played.
Observe the requirements for the message func-
tion (
Y page 129).
Sending an e-mail
X
Call up the address book (Y page 136).
X
Select an entry: turn and press the controller.
The details for the contact are displayed.
X
To select an e-mail address: turn and press
the controller.
The entry fields for an e-mail are displayed
(
Y page 133).
Observe the requirements for the message func-
tion (
Y page 129).
Displaying sub-entry information
X
Call up the address book (Y page 136).
X
Select an entry: turn and press the controller.
The details for the contact are displayed.
X
To highlight the desired entry: turn the con-
troller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Details: turn and press the con-
troller.
The display is shown in full.
X
To close the detailed display: press the %
button.
Editing a contact
X
Call up the address book (Y page 136).
X
To select a contact: turn and press the con-
troller.
The details for the contact are displayed.
X
To highlight the desired entry: turn the con-
troller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Edit: turn and press the controller.
The entry field for the selected entry is dis-
played.
Information about character entry (
Y page 34).
Changing the category of an entry
X
Call up the address book (Y page 136).
X
Select an entry: turn and press the controller.
The details for the contact are displayed.
138
Address book
Telephone
X
To highlight the desired entry: turn the con-
troller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Change Category: turn and press
the controller.
X
To select a category: turn the controller and
press to confirm.
Storing the phone number as a speed
dial number
X
Call up the address book (Y page 136).
X
Select an entry: turn and press the controller.
The details for the contact are displayed.
X
To highlight the desired telephone number:
turn the controller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Speed Dial: turn and press the
controller.
X
To select Assign Speed Dial Preset: turn
and press the controller.
X
To select a memory position for the speed
dial: turn and press the controller.
The phone number has been saved as a speed
dial.
Voice tags
Introduction
You can enter voice tags via the Voice Control
System (see the separate operating instruc-
tions). Once you have assigned a voice tag to an
address book entry, you can call up this entry
with a voice command and dial a phone number,
for example. You can add one voice tag per
address book entry.
Adding or changing a voice tag
X
Call up the address book (Y page 136).
X
Search for an address book entry with or with-
out a voice tag ¦ (
Y page 136).
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Voice Tag: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Add: turn and press the controller.
Subsequent operation is voice-controlled.
The Voice Control System guides you through
the dialogs.
Deleting a voice tag
X
Call up the address book (Y page 136).
X
Search for an address book entry with a voice
tag (
Y page 136).
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Voice Tag: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Delete: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
The voice tag is deleted.
Listening to a voice tag
X
Search for an address book entry with a voice
tag (
Y page 136).
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Voice Tag: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Listen: turn and press the control-
ler.
You hear the voice tag.
Changing the display and sorting cri-
teria for contacts
X
Call up the address book (Y page 136).
X
To show the menu bar: slide 6 the control-
ler.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Display and Sorting: turn and
press the controller.
You have the following options:
R
Last Name, First Name (default setting)
The contacts are sorted by surname and dis-
played with a comma.
R
Last Name First Name
The contacts are sorted by surname and dis-
played without a comma.
R
First Name Last Name
The contacts are sorted by first name and dis-
played without a comma.
X
To select the required option: turn and press
the controller.
The contacts are sorted and displayed
according to the selection.
Address book
139
Telephone
Z
Automatically importing contacts
from the phone
Depending on the mobile phone used, you can
set whether the contacts should be called up
automatically after the mobile phone is connec-
ted to the multimedia system.
X
Connect a mobile phone (Y page 113).
X
Call up the address book (Y page 136).
X
To show the menu bar: slide 6 the control-
ler.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Automatically Import Con
tacts from Phone: turn and press the con-
troller.
You can allow O or suppress ª the auto-
matic download.
Saving a contact
Saved contacts are indicated in the phone book
by different symbols (
Y page 123).
X
Call up the address book (Y page 136).
X
To select a contact: turn and press the con-
troller.
The details for the contact are displayed.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Save: turn and press the controller.
The contact has now been saved.
i
If the saved address book entry containsa
phone number, the entry is also displayed in
the phone book.
Saving or editing the contact data in the mul-
timedia system does not change the contacts
on the mobile phone. If automatic download-
ing of phone contacts is activated, the multi-
media system displays the copy ¥ with the
changed data. To add additional data, such as
additional phone numbers or e-mail
addresses, select this contact. In this way,
you avoid creating additional copies of the
mobile phone entry.
Deleting a name
X
Call up the address book (Y page 136).
X
Search for a contact (Y page 136).
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Delete Entry: turn and press the
controller.
X
To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
The contact is deleted.
Importing contacts
Information and requirements
Contacts can be imported as vCards (vcf files). A
vCard is an electronic business card. A memory
card, USB device or a Bluetooth
®
connection
can be used for importing.
i
Up to 2000 entries can be imported into the
address book.Amessage notifies you when
the maximum number is reached. In order to
be able to then import new contacts, you have
to delete existing contacts(
Y page 140).
Source Requirements
Memory card The SD card is inserted. It
contains importable contact
details.
USB device The USB device is inserted
into the USB port. It contains
importable contact details.
Bluetooth
®
connection
If the sending of vCards is
supported via Bluetooth
®
,
vCards can be received on
mobile phones or netbooks,
for example.
Bluetooth
®
must be activa-
ted in the multimedia system
and on the respective device;
see the manufacturer's oper-
ating instructions.
Importing from the memory card or USB
device
Contacts imported from the memory card or
from a USB device are identified by the ¯
symbol.
The following conditions must be fulfilled in
order to import vCards:
R
vCards (vcf files) may be located in the main
directory or in folders. The multimedia system
140
Address book
Telephone
allows for a targeted selection of the corre-
sponding directories.
R
vCards must have the file extension "vcf".
i
The multimedia system supports vCards in
versions 2.1 and 3.0.
X
To switch to the menu bar in the telephone
menu or the address book: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Download Contacts: turn and
press the controller.
X
To select From Memory Card or From USB
device: turn and press the controller.
Receiving vCards via Bluetooth
®
Multimedia system
X
To switch to the menu bar in the telephone
menu or the address book: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Download Contacts: turn and
press the controller.
X
To select From Bluetooth Device: turn and
press the controller.
If the multimedia system is connected to a
mobile phone, the connection is terminated.
vCards can now be received by a device (PC,
mobile phone) via Bluetooth
®
.
External device
X
Start the data transfer; see the manufactur-
er's operating instructions.
The number of vCards received is displayed in
the multimedia system.
Multimedia system
X
To end reception: press the controller or the
% button.
If a mobile phone was connected, the con-
nection to the mobile phone is established
again.
Received vCards are identified by the ®
symbol in the address book.
i
If you switch to another main function, e.g.
navigation, while receiving vCards, the recep-
tion of vCards will be terminated.
Deleting imported contacts
X
To change to the menu bar when in the
address book or the telephone menu: slide
6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Delete Contacts: turn and press
the controller.
X
Select one of the following options:
R
Internal Contacts
R
Imported from Storage Device
R
Imported from Bluetooth Devices
R
Downloaded from Phone
Turn and press the controller.
X
To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
The contacts are deleted.
i
If automatic calling up of the contacts is
deactivated (
Y page 140), the Downloaded
from Phone option is available.
Closing the address book
X
Press the % button.
Address book
141
Telephone
Z
Your multimedia system equipment
These operating instructions describe all the
standard and optional equipment of your multi-
media system, as available at the time of going
to press. Country-specific differences are pos-
sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not
feature all functions described here. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and func-
tions.
Read the information on qualified specialist
workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
cle while driving, you will be distracted from
traffic conditions. You could also lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate the equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
ment when the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are driving when operating
the system.
General notes
Connection difficulties while the vehi-
cle is in motion
The connection may be lost if:
R
the mobile phone network coverage is insuf-
ficient
R
the vehicle has moved into a mobile phone
cell with no free channels
R
the SIM card used is not compatible with the
network available
Function restrictions
You will not be able to use the Mercedes-Benz
Apps and Internet connection, or will no longer
be able to use them, or may have to wait before
using them, in the following situations:
R
if the mobile phone is switched off
R
if your mobile phone has not been enabled for
Internet access
R
if the Bluetooth
®
function is switched off on
the multimedia system and the desired phone
is supposed to be connected via Bluetooth
®
R
if the Bluetooth
®
function is switched off on
the mobile phone and the phone is supposed
to be connected via Bluetooth
®
R
if the mobile phone is not connected via USB
and the phone is supposed to be connected
via USB
R
if neither the mobile phone network nor the
mobile phone allow simultaneous use of a
phone and an Internet connection
R
if the mobile phone has not been enabled for
Internet access via Bluetooth
®
and/or USB
The driver is not permitted to call up websites
while driving and use of the Mercedes-Benz
Apps is restricted.
i
It is possible that you may not be able to
receive calls when an Internet connection is
active. This depends on the mobile phone and
the mobile phone network used.
Conditions for access
USA: to use Mercedes-Benz Apps and Internet
access, mbrace must be activated and opera-
tional. Furthermore, mbrace must be activated
for Mercedes-Benz Apps and Internet access.
Take note of the connection priorities. An emer-
gency call has the highest priority. Whenaser-
vice call, e.g. a breakdown service call or the MB
Info Call, is active, an emergency call can still be
initiated. A service call, on the other hand, has
priority over a current Internet connection.
Therefore, you cannot establish an Internet con-
nection duringaservice call.
Canada: a mobile phone must be connected via
Bluetooth
®
(Y page 113) or USB(Y page 183)
with the multimedia system. Furthermore, you
need a valid mobile service contract withadata
142
Conditions for access
Online and Internet functions
option, which is used to calculate the associated
connection costs.
Conditions for a Bluetooth
®
connection
R
The mobile phone supports at least one of the
Bluetooth
®
profiles DUN (Dial-Up Network-
ing) or PAN (Personal Area Network).
The Bluetooth
®
profiles DUN and PAN enable
the Internet connection of the mobile phone
to be made available to the system.
Conditions for a USB connection
R
The mobile phone supports at least one of the
USB classes:
-
RNDIS (Remote Network Driver Interface
Specification)
-
CDC/NCM (Network Control Model)
-
CDC/ECM (Ethernet Control Model)
-
CDC/ACM (Access Control Model)
The USB classes enable the mobile phone
Internet connection to be made available to
the system.
The terms of use are shown when the system is
used for the first time and then once a year
thereafter. Only read and accept the terms of
use when the vehicle is stationary.
The driver is not permitted to call up websites
while driving and use of the Mercedes-Benz
Apps is restricted.
i
The availability of individual Mercedes-Benz
Apps may vary depending on the country.
Setting up an Internet connection
(Canada)
Procedure and general information
In order to set up a mobile phone for Internet
access, your mobile phone must be connected
to the multimedia system via Bluetooth
®
(Y page 113) or USB (Y page 170).
If you are using Internet access for the first time,
you must enable the connected mobile phone
for Internet access (
Y page 143). If the con-
nected mobile phone supports the Bluetooth
®
PAN profile or the USB classes RNDIS,
CDC/NCM or CDC/ECM, you do not need to
make additional settings. The Internet connec-
tion is established. If the connected mobile
phone does not support the named Bluetooth
®
profile or the named USB classes, predefined
(
Y page 144) or manual access data
(
Y page 144) must be set.
While initializing the mobile phone for the Inter-
net connection, access data which is already on
the mobile phone may be overwritten. You
should therefore check the settings on the
mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating
instructions).
Enabling the mobile phone for Inter-
net access
X
To display the main function bar: slide 5 the
controller.
X
To select ®: turn and press the controller.
The menu with the Internet functions is dis-
played.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Settings: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Configure Internet Settings:
turn and press the controller.
A message is displayed telling you that the
settings for the Internet functions depend on
your mobile phone network provider and your
mobile phone.
If a mobile phone has already been enabled,
the device list is displayed.
X
To select Start Search: turn and press the
controller.
Mobile phones are displayed that:
R
are connected to the multimedia system
R
fulfill the conditions for the Internet func-
tions
R
have not yet been set up for the Internet
function
Setting up an Internet connection (Canada)
143
Online and Internet functions
Z
X
To select a mobile phone from the device list:
turn the controller and press to confirm.
If the mobile phone supports the Bluetooth
®
PAN profile or the USB classes RNDIS, CDC/
NCM or CDC/ECM, Internet access is set up.
You can use the Internet functions.
If the connected mobile phone does not sup-
port the named Bluetooth
®
profile or the
named USB classes, predefined (
Y page 144)
or manual access data (
Y page 144) must be
set.
Setting access data of the mobile
phone network provider
Selecting the predefined access data of
the mobile phone network provider
X
To select Predefined Settings: turn and
press the controller.
A list of countries appears.
If the mobile phone network provider provides
multiple access data options, the relevant
access data still has to be selected. This
depends on the data package used, for example.
To check whether the predetermined dial-in
data corresponds with the dial-in data provided
by your mobile phone network provider, pro-
ceed as follows (
Y page 145) and select Man‐
ual Settings. The access data is displayed.
The access data for the mobile phone network
provider is selected once for the mobile phone
connected and is loaded again each time the
mobile phone is connected. Establishing a con-
nection (
Y page 146).
You must set the access data of the mobile
phone network provider who provides the SIM
card and the associated data package (access
settings) for the connected mobile phone. The
access data remains the same when you are in a
different country (roaming). The access data of
another network is not selected.
Manually setting the access data of the
mobile phone network provider
X
To select Manual Settings: turn and press
the controller.
An overview of the provider settings appears.
X
Set access data (Y page 144).
X
To confirm settings: select Confirm Set‐
tings and turn and press the controller.
The access data for the mobile phone network
provider is selected once for the mobile phone
connected and is loaded again each time the
mobile phone is connected. Establishing a con-
nection (
Y page 146).
You must set the access data of the mobile
phone network provider who provides the SIM
card and the associated data package (access
settings) for the connected mobile phone. The
access data remains the same when you are in a
different country (roaming). The access data of
another network is not selected.
Setting access data
Set the access data in accordance with your
data package. You can contact your mobile
phone network provider to obtain the precise
access data.
144
Setting up an Internet connection (Canada)
Online and Internet functions
Explanation of the access data
Input field Meaning
Phone Num‐
ber:
Access number for estab-
lishing the connection
The access number
depends on the mobile
phone used. For GSM/
UMTS mobile phones,
*99***1#
is used as a
standard.
Access
Point:
APN network access point
(Access Point Name)
You can obtain this infor-
mation from your mobile
phone network provider.
Entry is not necessary for
all mobile phone network
providers and mobile
phones.
PDP Type:
Internet protocol used.
You can obtain this infor-
mation from your mobile
phone network provider.
User ID:
The user identification can
be obtained from your
mobile phone network pro-
vider.
Entry is not necessary for
all mobile phone network
providers.
Password:
The password can be
obtained from your mobile
phone network provider.
Entry is not necessary for
all mobile phone network
providers.
Auto DNS:
Automatic allocation of
DNS servers is activated. If
the function is deactivated,
the DNS server addresses
must be entered manually.
DNS (Domain Name
Service).
DNS1:
DNS2:
Fields for entering the DNS
server addresses manually.
The address can be
obtained from your mobile
phone network provider.
Managing existing access data
Calling up the device list
X
To display the main function bar: slide 5 the
controller.
X
To select ®: turn and press the controller.
The menu with the Internet functions is dis-
played.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Settings: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Configure Internet Settings:
turn and press the controller.
The device list is displayed.
Editing the access data
The mobile phone must be connected with the
system for the access data to be changed.
When the Internet connection is active, you can-
not edit or delete the access data of the cur-
rently set mobile phone network provider.
X
Call up the device list (Y page 145).
X
To highlight the desired mobile phone in the
device list: turn the controller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Change Configuration: turn and
press the controller.
X
Select Predefined Settings or Manual
Settings.
The provider settings are displayed.
In order to edit the access data of the mobile
phone network provider you have two options:
R
Option 1: select the predefined access data of
the mobile phone network provider
(
Y page 144).
R
Option 2: manually set the access data of the
mobile phone network provider (
Y page 144).
Setting up an Internet connection (Canada)
145
Online and Internet functions
Z
Canceling Internet access permission
for a mobile phone
X
Call up the device list (Y page 145).
X
To highlight the desired mobile phone in the
device list: turn the controller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Delete Configuration: turn and
press the controller.
A prompt appears asking whether you wish to
delete the Internet configuration.
X
To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
The Internet access permission for the mobile
phone is now canceled. The mobile phone can
now no longer be used by the system for
Internet functions.
Setting automatic disconnection of
the Internet connection
If a preset time has elapsed during which the
Internet functions have not been used, the Inter-
net automatically disconnects.
X
Call up the device list (Y page 145).
X
To highlight the desired mobile phone in the
device list: turn the controller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Disconnect Automatically
When Inactive: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
To select 5 Minutes, 10 Minutes or 20
Minutes: turn and press the controller.
Managing all Internet devices
If multiple mobile phones have been enabled for
Internet usage, these can be given priorities.
The system then selects the mobile phone with
the highest priority to establish an Internet con-
nection.
X
Call up the device list (Y page 145).
X
To highlight the mobile phone: turn the con-
troller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Manage All Internet Devices:
turn and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To highlight a mobile telephone: turn the con-
troller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Change Device Priority: turn
and press the controller.
X
To move the desired mobile phone up or
down: turn and press the controller.
The mobile phone's priority is changed.
The priority of the mobile phones is deter-
mined by the hierarchy. The mobile phone at
the top of the list has the highest priority.
Establishing/ending the connection
Establishing the connection
Read the conditions for establishing a connec-
tion (
Y page 142).
A connection can be established, for example
by:
R
entering a web address (Y page 149)
R
calling up a Mercedes-Benz App
(
Y page 147)
R
calling up a favorite
R
establishing an Internet connection via a wire-
less networking device. The "Allow shared
WiFi usage" option must be activated in the
multimedia system for this (
Y page 43)
Ending the connection
X
Select Cancel in the connections window.
146
Establishing/ending the connection
Online and Internet functions
Connection status
:
Display of existing connection and signal
strength of the mobile phone network
In most cases, the current connection status is
then shown in the status bar when you switch to
another main function.
Detailed connection status
X
To display the main function bar: slide 5 the
controller.
X
To select ®: turn and press the controller.
The menu with the Internet functions is dis-
played.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Settings: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Connection Status: turn and
press the controller.
The following information is displayed:
R
the volume of transferred data
R
connection status
R
the device name of the mobile phone
Ending the connection
USA: you cannot cancel the connection your-
self. The Internet connection is automatically
terminated if the system does not recognize any
user input within a five-minute time period.
Canada:
X
To display the main function bar: slide 5 the
controller.
X
To select ®: turn and press the controller.
The menu with the Internet functions is dis-
played.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select ©: turn and press the controller.
If the mobile phone Internet connection is can-
celed, the multimedia system tries to reconnect.
You should therefore always end the connection
in the multimedia system.
Mercedes-Benz Apps
General notes
To be able to use Mercedes-Benz Apps, you have
to register and confirm the terms and condi-
tions.
Calling up Mercedes-Benz Apps
X
To display the main function bar: slide 5 the
controller.
X
To select ®: turn and press the controller.
X
To select Mercedes-Benz Apps: turn and
press the controller.
X
To call up the app: turn and press the con-
troller.
You can find further Mercedes-Benz Apps and
information under:
http://apps.mercedes-benz.com/apps/
i
The available features are country-depend-
ent.
License fees may be applicable.
Mercedes-Benz Companion
Introduction
The Mercedes Benz Companion app is available
in the USA.
The Mercedes-Benz Companion app enables
door-to-door navigation.
Door-to-door navigation means:
R
The current destination is transferred from
the vehicle's multimedia system to an exter-
nal device (iPhone
®
or Apple Watch
®
).
Mercedes-Benz Companion
147
Online and Internet functions
Z
This enables you to continue navigating to a
destination which is in a pedestrian zone, for
example.
R
Conversely, a destination can be selected on
the external device and transferred to the
vehicle's multimedia system.
Requirements
Observe the following requirements for using
Mercedes-Benz Companion:
R
The iPhone
®
must be switched on and logged
into a mobile phone network.
R
The iPhone
®
must have an IOS version higher
than version 8.0.
R
Mercedes-Benz Companion must be installed
on the iPhone
®
and activated (see the manu-
facturer's operating instructions).
R
The iPhone
®
must be connected to the mul-
timedia system (
Y page 113).
R
Mercedes-Benz Companion must be author-
ized on the multimedia system (
Y page 148).
R
To use door-to-door navigation, location
access must be enabled on the iPhone
®
.
R
The Apple Watch
®
must be connected to the
iPhone
®
(see the manufacturer's operating
instructions).
Authorizing Mercedes-Benz Compan-
ion
If you wish to use Mercedes-Benz Companion
with the multimedia system, you must first
authorize it.
If you wish to use door-to-door navigation, you
must first enable location finding on your
iPhone
®
.
On the multimedia system
X
Switch on the multimedia system.
A prompt appears asking for permission for
Mercedes-Benz Companion to connect with
the vehicle.
X
Give authorization.
On the iPhone
®
X
Call up Mercedes-Benz Companion
A prompt appears asking permission for
Mercedes-Benz Companion to access loca-
tion details.
X
Allow access.
Door-to-door navigation using Mercedes-
Benz Companion can now be used.
Door-to-door navigation (transferring
a destination from the vehicle to an
external device)
You can transfer the destination from the vehi-
cle to an iPhone
®
or Apple Watch
®
.
This way, you can navigate on foot to a destina-
tion that cannot be reached by vehicle.
In the vehicle
X
Switch off the engine and remove the Smart-
Key.
The current destination and the vehicle's
location are transferred from the multimedia
system to the iPhone
®
or Apple Watch
®
.
On the iPhone
®
X
Select the destination and select the pedes-
trian symbol.
X
Start navigation.
If using the iPhone
®
to navigate, you will be
guided to your destination via navigation dis-
plays and spoken instructions.
If you use an Apple Watch
®
, navigation is
done via the watch.
The Apple Watch
®
assists you with route guid-
ance by vibrating, emitting acoustic signals
and giving spoken commands.
Door-to-door navigation (transferring
a destination from an external device
to the vehicle)
You can transfer the destination from an exter-
nal device to the vehicle's multimedia system:
R
via the Apple Watch
®
R
via the iPhone
®
148
Mercedes-Benz Companion
Online and Internet functions
On the iPhone
®
X
Select Mercedes-Benz Companion.
X
Select Send a Destination.
X
Enter the destination.
A list of possible destinations is displayed.
X
Select the destination.
X
Transfer the destination to the vehicle.
On the Apple Watch
®
X
Select Mercedes-Benz Companion.
X
Select Send to Car.
X
Select Find destinations.
X
Say the destination.
X
Confirm the entered text with Done.
A list of possible destinations is displayed.
X
Select the destination.
X
Transfer the destination to the vehicle.
In the vehicle and on the multimedia system
X
Switch on the multimedia system.
The destination in the Apple Watch
®
or
iPhone
®
is transferred to the multimedia sys-
tem.
X
Accept the displayed destination.
Route guidance starts.
i
You also have the option of transferring des-
tinations or coordinates from other applica-
tions to Mercedes-Benz Companion.
Navigating to the vehicle
You can be guided to the vehicle's location:
R
via the Apple Watch
®
R
via the iPhone
®
On the iPhone
®
X
Select Send a Destination.
X
Select the vehicle location and the pedestrian
symbol.
X
Start navigation.
On the Apple Watch
®
X
Select Locate Car.
X
Select the car symbol.
X
Start navigation.
Displaying vehicle information
Mercedes-Benz Companion allows you to dis-
play vehicle data on the Apple Watch
®
or
iPhone
®
, for example:
R
Fuel level and range
R
Maintenance interval
R
Tire pressure
X
Select Mercedes-Benz Companion.
The vehicle information is displayed.
Web browser
Calling up a website
Function restrictions
Internet pages cannot be shown while the vehi-
cle is in motion.
Entering a web address
X
To display the main function bar: slide 5 the
controller.
X
To select ®: turn and press the controller.
The menu with the Internet functions is dis-
played.
Web browser
149
Online and Internet functions
Z
X
To select www: turn and press the controller.
An input menu for the web address is dis-
played.
X
Enter characters using the controller
(
Y page 34) or the number keypad.
X
To finish entry and call up a website: select
¬.
Selecting a web address from the list
X
When the character bar is displayed, slide
5 the controller.
X
To select the desired web address: turn and
press the controller.
The web address can still be changed as
desired.
X
To call up a website: select ¬.
The website is called up.
Navigating the website
Step Result
X
Turn the controller. Navigates from one
selectable item (e.g.
link, text field or
menu) to the next and
highlights the respec-
tive element on the
website.
Sliding the controller:
X
Left or right 1
X
Up or down 4
X
Diagonally 2
Moves the pointer on
the page.
X
Press the control-
ler.
Opens the selected
item.
X
Press %. Calls up the menu.
Menu functions
:
Closes the browser
;
Goes back/forward
=
Refreshes/cancels
?
URL entry
A
Favorites
B
Closes the window
C
Options
X
To show the menu: press the % button.
X
To call up the Options menu: select 3 by
turning and pressing the controller.
X
To close the website: select &.
X
To call up the previous website: select
t.
X
To call up the next website: select u.
X
To refresh the website: select Î.
The website is refreshed. This procedure may
take some time.
i
While the website is loading, a cross
appears in the menu. This can be used to can-
cel the loading procedure.
X
To enter a URL: select g.
X
Enter a web address (URL) (Y page 149).
X
Favorites: select f.
X
To close the active window: select h.
150
Web browser
Online and Internet functions
Options menu
Opening in a new window
In order to be able to use this function, the cur-
sor must be on a link.
X
To show the menu: press the % button.
X
To select 3: turn and press the controller.
X
Select Open In A New Window.
The website is opened in a new window.
Adding to bookmarks
Adds the current website to the favorites. The
website can then be called up using the menu.
You can store up to 20 favorites in the menu.
X
To show the menu: press the % button.
X
To select 3: turn and press the controller.
X
Select Add to Bookmarks.
X
Select Save As Global Bookmark or Save
As Local Bookmark.
Current URL
X
To show the menu: press the % button.
X
To select 3: turn and press the controller.
X
Select Current URL.
The URL appears.
Zoom
You can use this function to enlarge web pages.
X
To show the menu: press the % button.
X
To select 3: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears. The # dot indicates the cur-
rent setting.
X
Select Zoom.
X
To navigate on the web page: slide 1,
4 or 2 the controller.
X
To zoom in on the web page: turn the control-
ler.
Jumping from link to link
You can use this function to skip from one link to
the next on a website.
X
To show the menu: press the % button.
X
To select 3: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears. The # dot indicates the cur-
rent setting.
X
Select Jump From Link To Link.
If a website has been called up and the con-
troller is turned, the cursor jumps from link to
link.
Directional scrolling
You can use this function to scroll up and down
on the web page.
X
To show the menu: press the % button.
X
To select 3: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears. The # dot indicates the cur-
rent setting.
X
Select Directional Scrolling.
If a website has been called up and the con-
troller is turned, the cursor moves up or down
depending on the direction of the turn.
Settings
Settings overview
X
To show the menu: press the % button.
X
To select 3: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
Select Settings.
Web browser
151
Online and Internet functions
Z
You can activate/deactivate the following set-
tings:
R
Download Images Automatically
It may take some time to download the con-
tents of websites that contain a large amount
of images. Therefore, it may be useful to deac-
tivate this option.
R
Block Pop-Ups
Popups are windows (usually with advertise-
ments) which are displayed automatically
when you call up a website. You can block
these displays.
R
Activate Javascript
Javascript makes it possible to display and
interact with dynamic content on the website.
R
Allow Cookies
Some websites save information in small text
files (cookies) on your system. You can deter-
mine whether cookies may be stored.
R
Enable Internet Audio
You can switch the browser's audio playback
on or off here.
R
Hide Scroll Bars
You can show or hide the scroll bar here.
R
Show Link Target
You can display the link's URL here.
R
Character Size
You can select the font size which is used
when displaying the website.
R
Character Code
You can select a different character set here,
e.g. if the characters of a website appear dis-
torted.
Changing settings
X
To select the desired setting: turn and press
the controller.
Switch the setting on O or off ª.
Changing the character size or character
code
X
Select Character Size or Character Code.
X
To select the setting you require: turn and
press the controller.
i
If you change the settings, the websites may
not be displayed correctly.
Deleting private data
X
To display the main function bar: slide 5 the
controller.
X
To select ®: turn and press the controller.
The menu with the Internet functions is dis-
played.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Settings: slide 6, turn and press
the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Delete Private Data: turn and
press the controller.
X
To select the setting you require: turn and
press the controller.
or
X
Select Delete All Data On Exit.
Switch the setting on O or off ª.
Option Function
All
Deletes all personal
data.
Cache
Deletes data in the
cache.
Cookies
Deletes cookies that
are created by web-
sites which you have
called up.
URL History
Deletes all websites
visited (path).
O Delete All
Data On Exit
If this function is acti-
vated O, all personal
data is deleted when
you exit the Internet
browser.
152
Web browser
Online and Internet functions
i
If you reset the multimedia system to the
factory settings (reset function), this data and
the settings are deleted (
Y page 49).
Favorites
Introduction
Favorites are frequently visited websites.
Creating favorites
Adding a favorite in the menu
X
To display the main function bar: slide 5 the
controller.
X
To select ®: turn and press the controller.
The menu with the Internet functions is dis-
played.
X
Select www.
X
Enter the web address (URL) and name using
the character bar and press ¬.
Adding to favorites
X
To call up the menu: press the % button.
X
To select 3: turn and press the controller.
X
Select Add to Bookmarks (Y page 151).
Selecting favorites
X
To display the main function bar: slide 5 the
controller.
X
To select ®: turn and press the controller.
The menu with the Internet functions is dis-
played.
X
To select the Internet Favorites menu:
turn and press the controller.
The Favorites menu appears.
X
Select the desired bookmark.
The favorite is opened in a new window.
Editing favorites
X
To display the main function bar: slide 5 the
controller.
X
To select ®: turn and press the controller.
The menu with the Internet functions is dis-
played.
X
To select the Internet Favorites menu:
turn and press the controller.
The Favorites menu appears.
X
To bring the desired favorites to the front.
X
To select Edit: slide 6 and press the con-
troller.
An input menu appears.
X
Enter a web address (URL).
X
Press the touchpad or controller.
X
Select p.
X
Press the touchpad or controller.
X
Slide 6 the controller.
X
Enter a name.
Deleting favorites
X
To display the main function bar: slide 5 the
controller.
X
To select ®: turn and press the controller.
The menu with the Internet functions is dis-
played.
X
To select the Internet Favorites menu:
turn and press the controller.
The Favorites menu appears.
X
Select the desired favorites.
X
Select Delete.
A prompt appears.
X
Select Yes.
The favorite is deleted.
Closing the browser
X
Select % in the browser menu
(
Y page 150)
or
X
Press the % button for longer than two
seconds.
A prompt appears, asking whether you want
to close the Internet browser.
X
Select Yes.
The application is closed.
Web browser
153
Online and Internet functions
Z
Your multimedia system equipment
These operating instructions describe all the
standard and optional equipment of your multi-
media system, as available at the time of going
to press. Country-specific differences are pos-
sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not
feature all functions described here. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and func-
tions.
Read the information on qualified specialist
workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Switching on the radio
X
Press the $ button.
The Radio menu appears. You will hear the
last station played on the last waveband
selected.
Overview
:
Main function bar
;
Status bar with compass display
=
Main display field with available stations and relevant information
?
Display of radio station selected
A
Radio menu bar
B
Additional display area
The following functions are available using the radio main function bar:
R
HD Radio FM: HD FM radio mode
R
HD Radio AM: HD MW radio mode
R
Sat Radio: satellite radio
R
Radio Station Presets: 100 preset positions for radio stations
R
Info on Radio: information on radio in the Digital Operator's Manual
The following functions are available using the radio menu bar:
R
Options: radio options
R
è: searches for stations by name
R
Preset: station presets menu
R
Band: selects wavebands
154
Overview
Radio
R
Info: displays additional information about the current station (radio text)
R
à: sound settings, Burmester
®
sound
Switching HD Radio on/off
X
In radio mode: slide the controller 6.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
By selecting O or ª in front of HD Radio,
you determine whether HD radio is switched
on or off.
If HD radio is switched off, the system does not
switch to digital radio and it is not possible to
select any sub-channels.
i
HD Radio™ and the HD, HD Radio, and “Arc”
logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity
Digital Corp.
Setting the waveband
Button activation
X
Press the $ button.
A menu appears with a selection of HD
Radio FM, HD Radio AM, Sat Radio, Info
on Radio and Radio Station Presets.
X
To select the required waveband: turn and
press the controller.
Using the main function bar
X
In radio mode: slide 5 the controller.
The radio main function bar and menu bar
appear. Radio
is active.
X
Press the controller.
A menu appears with a selection of HD
Radio FM, HD Radio AM, Sat Radio, Radio
Station Presets and Info on Radio.
X
To select the required waveband: turn and
press the controller.
Using the menu bar
X
In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Band: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears with a selection of HD
Radio FM, HD Radio AM and Sat Radio.
X
To select the required waveband: turn and
press the controller.
Station
Selecting a station
Using the main display field
All currently available stations are displayed.
X
In radio mode: turn the controller until the
desired station is in the center.
Using the current station list
i
The station list is available in HD FM radio
mode or HD AM radio mode. It includes all
stations that can be received.
X
In radio mode: press the controller.
The station list appears with the stations cur-
rently available.
X
To select the desired station: turn and press
the controller.
Station
155
Radio
Using frequency entry
X
In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Enter Frequency.
An additional menu appears.
HD FM radio mode:
X
To select the HD FM Frequency option: turn
and press the controller.
X
Enter the frequency of the desired station in
the entry field.
HD MW radio mode:
X
To select the HD AM Frequency option: turn
and press the controller.
X
Enter the frequency of the desired station in
the entry field.
Satellite radio mode:
X
Select the SatRadio Channel option.
X
Enter the number of the desired channel in
the entry field.
Station presets:
X
Select the Radio Station Presets option.
X
Enter the station preset of the desired station.
Using the search function
X
In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
X
Select è and enter the first letters of the
required station using the controller.
X
Press OK to confirm.
The multimedia system displays a list of avail-
able stations.
X
To select stations from the list: turn the con-
troller and press to confirm.
Using station presets
X
Quick setting:
Briefly press a number key, e.g. l.
The station stored in second place is set.
Using the preset position
X
In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Preset: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
To select Enter Preset: turn and press the
controller.
X
Enter the station preset of the desired station.
Station list
X
In radio mode: press the controller.
The station list appears with the stations cur-
rently available.
Saving/deleting a station
Frequencies have already been stored in the
multimedia system. There are 100 preset posi-
tions available.
Quick save
X
Press and hold a number key, e.g. l, until
a tone sounds. The station is saved to second
place in the radio station presets.
Storing current stations
X
In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
The radio menu bar appears.
X
To select Preset: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
To select the Save Current Station/Chan‐
nel option: turn and press the controller.
X
To select the position of the required preset
entry: turn and press the controller.
or
X
Select the Edit Station Preset option.
X
Select the position of the required preset:
turn the controller.
This can also be a preset position that is
already occupied, which is then overwritten
by the current station.
X
Slide 9 the controller.
An additional menu appears.
156
Station
Radio
X
To select the Save Current Station/Chan‐
nel option: turn and press the controller.
The currently set station is stored in the selec-
ted preset position. A tone signals a success-
ful preset entry.
or
X
In the main display field, press and hold the
controller.
A list of current allocated preset positions
appears.
X
To select the position of the required preset
and confirm: turn the controller and press.
Moving highlighted stations
X
In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Preset: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
Select Edit Station Preset.
X
To select the required preset entry: turn the
controller.
X
Slide 9 the controller.
An additional menu appears.
X
To select Move Highlighted Station/
Channel: turn and press the controller.
The list of stored stations appears again.
X
To move the highlighted station to the new
position: turn the controller and press to con-
firm.
Deleting highlighted stations
X
In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Preset: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
Select Edit Station Preset.
X
To select the required preset entry: turn the
controller.
X
Slide 9 the controller.
An additional menu appears.
X
To select Delete Highlighted Station/
Channel: turn and press the controller.
X
If you really wish to delete the highlighted
station, select Yes
: turn and press the con-
troller. Otherwise, select No
: turn and press
the controller.
Activating/deactivating the station
presets display
You can use this function to change to the sta-
tion presets display.
Activating
X
In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Preset: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
To select Station Preset View: On: turn
and press the controller.
The station preset display appears.
X
To switch between the stored stations: turn
the controller.
Deactivating
X
In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Preset: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
To select Station Preset View: Off: turn
and press the controller.
A view of the last waveband you listened to
appears.
Tagging music tracks
This function allows you to transfer the music
track currently playing to an Apple
®
device and
then purchase it in the iTunes store
®
.
X
In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Tag This Track.
A message appears about storing the track
information.
Displaying station information
X
In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
You can determine whether or not the artist,
track or station name are shown in the main
display area with O or ª before Show
Sta‐
tion Information.
Calling up sound settings
X
In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select à: turn and press the controller.
The sound menu appears (
Y page 193).
Calling up sound settings
157
Radio
Displaying information
This function is available in HD FM radio and HD
AM radio mode.
Reception is only possible if the radio stations
provide the relevant information.
X
In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Info: turn and press the controller.
Information on the currently received pro-
gram is displayed.
If available, you will see:
R
the track that is currently being played
R
the artist of the track that is currently being
played
R
the album name
R
the channel abbreviation
R
the logo of the station or Artist Experience
®
Back to radio display:
X
To select Info: slide 6 and press the con-
troller.
Satellite radio
General notes
The satellite radio mode requires satellite radio
equipment and registration withasatellite radio
provider.
Note that the categories and channels shown in
the illustrations depend on the program content
offered by the provider. The illustrations and
descriptions in these operating instructions may
therefore differ from the channels and catego-
ries offered by the provider.
Satellite radio mode may be temporarily unavail-
able or interrupted foravariety of reasons.
These include environmental or topographical
conditions as well as other factors beyond the
control of Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. This means
operation may not be possible in certain areas.
These include:
R
tunnels
R
parking garages
R
locations inside or next to buildings
R
locations in the vicinity of other structures
Sirius XM
®
Satellite Radio offers more than 140
digital-quality radio channels, providing 100%
commercial-free music, sports, news and enter-
tainment.
Sirius XM
®
Satellite Radio uses a fleet of high-
performance satellites to broadcast around the
clock throughout the USA and Canada.
The satellite radio pro
gram is available fora
monthly fee. Details are available from the Sirius
XM
®
Service Center and at
http://www.siriusxm.com (USA) or
http://www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).
Your new Mercedes-Benz vehicle comes with
Sirius XM
®
Satellite Radio pre-installed at the
factory. This service is free forasix-month trial
period. About a month before the trial period
ends, information will be provided on how to
extend this subscription. An acoustic signal
sounds and a message is shown, describing how
the subscription can be extended.
i
Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos
are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its
subsidiaries. All other marks, channel names
and logos are the property of their respective
owners. All rights reserved.
Registering satellite radio
:
Phone number of provider
;
Sirius XM
®
ID of your satellite receiver
158
Satellite radio
Radio
X
Switch on satellite radio mode (Y page 159).
The satellite radio main menu appears show-
ing the preview channel. You cannot select
any other stations.
X
In satellite radio mode, slide 6 the control-
ler.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Service: turn and press the con-
troller.
The service information screen appears.
Once the telephone connection has been estab-
lished:
X
Follow the instructions of the service staff.
The activation process may take up to
10 minutes. If the activation is completed
successfully, the Updating Channels...
message appears in the display, followed by
the satellite radio main menu.
i
You can also have the satellite service acti-
vated online. To do this, visit
http://www.siriusxm.com (USA) or
http://www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).
i
If registration is not included when purchas-
ing the system, your credit card details will be
required to activate your account.
If the satellite receiver is not installed correctly,
the Device
Unavailable message will appear.
Switching to satellite radio
X
To show the main function bar: slide 5 the controller.
X
To select Radio: turn and press the controller.
The radio display appears. You will hear the last station played on the last waveband selected.
X
To select Radio in radio mode: slide 5 and press the controller.
The menu with the available radio modes appears.
X
To select Sat Radio: turn and press the controller.
The No Service
message appears if there is no signal.
Satellite radio overview
:
Preset
;
Channel name and channel number
=
Channel information
?
Station presets menu
A
Category list
Satellite radio
159
Radio
B
Keyword search
C
Options menu
D
Artist & track
E
Additional display area
Channel information = can be viewed in detail (
Y page 162).
Additional display area E shows the specific SIRIUS XM Satellite Radio logos of the different
channels.
Selecting a category
Satellite radio channels are sorted into catego-
ries. You can choose between various catego-
ries such as News/Discussions, Sports and
Country (if available). The category list is sorted
alphabetically. The content of the categories is
sorted by channel numbers.
X
To call up the category list: select Cate‐
gory in the menu bar by turning and pressing
the controller.
The category list appears.
X
To select a category: turn the controller and
press to confirm.
The category selected is shown in the display.
You hear the channel last selected for this
category.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
At the beginning of the category list, the All
Channels category appears. This category
enables you to browse all available channels.
Selecting a channel
Channel search
X
When the display/section window is selec-
ted, slide 8 or 9 the controller.
The multimedia system searches in both
directions (ascending and descending) and
stops at the next channel found in the selec-
ted category.
Entering channel numbers directly
X
In satellite radio mode, slide 6 the control-
ler.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
The satellite radio menu appears.
X
To select Direct Entry: turn and press the
controller.
An input menu appears.
X
To select a channel number: turn and press
the controller.
The multimedia system sets the selected
channel.
i
You can only select currently permitted dig-
its.
Selecting a channel via the satellite
radio station list
You can select the channel using the station list
displaying the artists and tracks that are cur-
rently playing.
X
In satellite radio mode, slide 6 the control-
ler.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
The satellite radio menu appears.
X
To select Current Station List with
Artist & Title: turn and press the control-
ler.
The channel list appears.
X
Select the desired channel
160
Satellite radio
Radio
Keyword search
X
In satellite radio mode, slide 6 the control-
ler.
X
To select the keyword search è in the
menu bar: turn and press the controller.
X
To enter the required search term: turn and
press the controller.
Direct and indirect results are shown.
X
Select the required result.
The relevant channel is played.
Memory functions
Quick save:
X
Set the desired channel in satellite radio
mode.
X
Press and hold the controller until the preset
list appears.
X
To select the preset number: turn and press
the controller.
A tone confirms that the storing process was
successful.
Saving a channel using the edit function:
X
In satellite radio mode, slide 6 the control-
ler.
X
To select Preset: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
To select Edit Station Preset: turn and
press the controller.
The list of saved channels appears.
X
To select the preset: turn the controller and
press for about 2 seconds.
The newly saved channel overwrites the exist-
ing preset.
i
There are 100 presets available.
Presets menu view
You can use this function to change to the sta-
tion presets display.
Activating
X
In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Preset: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
To select Station Preset View: On: turn
and press the controller.
The station preset display appears.
X
To switch between the stored stations: turn
the controller.
Deactivating
X
In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Preset: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
To select Station Preset View: Off: turn
and press the controller.
A view of the last waveband you listened to
appears.
Music and sports alerts
General notes
This function makes it possible to store a pro-
gram alert for your favorite artists, tracks or
sporting events.
You can store up to 30 music and sports alerts
(favorites).
Music alerts can only be saved whilstatrack is
being played. You can also specify sports alerts
via the menu option. The system then continu-
ously searches through all the channels. If a
match is found withasaved message, you will
be informed. A window appears with the respec-
tive information.
Setting a music alert
X
In satellite radio mode, slide 6 the control-
ler.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Alert for Artist, Track &
Sports Event: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
Select Add New Alert.
A window withaprompt appears.
X
Select Artist or Track.
The alert is set for the current artist or track.
i
If an alert cannot be set, the No Alerts
Available message appears.
Satellite radio
161
Radio
Setting a sports alert
X
In satellite radio mode, slide 6 the control-
ler.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Alert for Artist, Track &
Sports Event: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
Select Manage Sports Alerts.
A menu appears.
X
Select Select New Alerts.
A menu appears.
X
Select the desired team from a league, e.g.
college, NBA, NHL, NFL or MLB.
The alert function for the sports team is
added.
The music alert window appears
X
To select Change To or Ignore: turn and
press the controller.
If you select Change To
, the channel is
changed and the favorite artist or track is
played.
If you select Ignore
, the current channel will
continue playing.
Editing music and sports alerts
X
To select Alert for Artist, Track &
Sports Event: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
Select Manage Music Alerts or Manage
Sports Alerts.
A list of set alerts appears.
Tagging music tracks
If the channel supports this function, you are
able to transfer the music track currently playing
to an Apple
®
device. You can then purchase it in
the iTunes
®
store.
X
In satellite radio mode, slide 6 the control-
ler.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Tag This Track: turn and press
the controller.
A message about saving this music track on
the Apple
®
device appears.
Displaying information
X
In satellite radio mode, slide 6 the control-
ler.
X
To select Info: turn and press the controller.
Information on the currently received pro-
gram is displayed.
If available, you will see:
R
the channel logo
R
the channel abbreviation
R
the artist of the current track
R
the current track.
X
To return to the radio display: select Info
by sliding 6 and pressing the controller.
Displaying service information
The provider's customer service center is avail-
able by phone at any time to answer any general
questions or questions on the versions availa-
ble.
162
Satellite radio
Radio
X
In satellite radio mode, slide 6 the control-
ler.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Service: turn and press the con-
troller.
The provider's details appear.
X
To return to the main display: press the
% button.
Channel list updates
During reception of a new channel list, the
Updating Channels...
message is shown.
The channel last selected is switched to mute
until the update has been completed. Satellite
radio mode is not available during this process.
Once the update has been completed, the sat-
ellite radio basic menu appears. The channel
last selected will be played if it is still available.
Sound settings
Information on sound settings (Y page 193).
Satellite radio
163
Radio
Your multimedia system equipment
These operating instructions describe all the
standard and optional equipment of your multi-
media system, as available at the time of going
to press. Country-specific differences are pos-
sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not
feature all functions described here. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and func-
tions.
Read the information on qualified specialist
workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Activating media mode
General notes
There are several ways to activate media sour-
ces using the multimedia system.
The relevant sections of the Operator's Manual
describe the simplest way to activateamedia
source. This section describes all options for
activating media sources. If you wish to play
external media sources, the default display
must already be turned on.
Connections for external media sour-
ces
Connections in the storage compartment under
the armrest in vehicles with rear climate control
Connections in the storage compartment under
the armrest in vehicles without rear climate control
The following external media sources can be
used:
R
Apple
®
devices (e.g. iPhone
®
)
R
USB devices (e.g. USB stick, MP3 player)
Two USB ports are located in the stowage
space under the armrest.
R
CD
R
DVD video
R
SD cards
R
AUX cable
R
Devices with Bluetooth
®
connection
Activating media using the button
X
To call up the media menu: press the Õ
button.
The last media source you have set is dis-
played.
X
Press the Õ button again.
The menu appears with the available media
sources.
X
To select the media source: turn the control-
ler and press to confirm.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the fol-
lowing media sources will be available:
R
Disc
R
Memory Card
R
Media Register
R
Media Interface1
R
Media Interface2
R
Bluetooth Audio
R
Aux
If playable music files are found, they will be
played by the multimedia system.
164
Activating media mode
Media
Activating media using the main func-
tion bar
X
To display the main function bar: slide 5 the
controller.
X
To select Media: turn and press the controller.
The last media source you have set is dis-
played.
X
To select Media in media mode: slide 5 and
press the controller.
The menu appears with the available media
sources.
X
To select the media source: turn the control-
ler and press to confirm.
If the media source contains music or video
files, these will be played. The corresponding
basic menu will be shown.
Activating media using the number
keypad
i
If you touch a key in the touch-sensitive
number keypad, the number field is displayed
in the additional display area.
X
Touch any number key when in media mode.
The number field is shown. The active media
source is highlighted.
X
To select a media source: press the corre-
sponding number key.
If the media source contains music or video
files, these will be played. The corresponding
basic menu will be shown.
X
To select a track from the active media
source: press the g key on the number
keypad.
An input field appears.
X
To enteratrack number: use the number key-
pad to enter the desired numbers.
The track is played.
X
To show track information: press the s
key on the number keypad
An additional field appears with the track
information.
Activating media using the device list
X
In media mode, slide 6 the controller.
The media menu bar appears.
X
To select Devices: turn and press the con-
troller.
The available media sources will be shown.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
X
Select the media source.
If the media source contains music or video
files, these will be played. The corresponding
basic menu will be shown.
Switching on automatically
After inserting a CD or DVD, this media mode is
automatically switched on by the multimedia
system.
If playable music files are found, they will be
played by the multimedia system.
If a media function is already switched on in the
multimedia system, this will be interrupted and
the basic display of the CD/DVD mode will
appear. If another function, such as navigation,
is being operated, the basic display will not
change. Only the music from the last inserted
CD or DVD will be played.
Activating media mode
165
Media
Starting an application at a different
seat
X
In media mode, slide 6 the controller.
The media menu bar appears.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Start Application at Other
Seat.
An additional menu appears with the option of
switching the media source to SplitView
,
Rear Right
or Rear Left.
Use Additional Options…
to operate the
parental control screen for selected seats:
(
Y page 63).
X
To switch the media source to, e.g. Split‐
View: turn and press the controller
(
Y page 26).
Audio/video mode
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
The CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product.
If you open the housing of the CD/DVD drive,
there is a risk of exposure to invisible laser
radiation. This laser radiation could damage
your retina. There is a risk of injury.
Never open the housing. Always have main-
tenance and repair work carried out at a quali-
fied specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
Handling discs while driving may distract you
from traffic conditions. You could also lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
Handle discs only when the vehicle is station-
ary.
Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a
distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per sec-
ond.
Notes on audio/video mode
Permissible data carriers
R
CD-R, CD-A and CD-RW
R
DVD-R, DVD-V and DVD-RW
R
SD card
R
USB storage device
Permissible file systems
R
ISO 9660/Joliet standard for CDs
R
UDF for video DVDs
R
FAT16, FAT32, exFAT and NTFS for SD card
and USB storage media
Multisession CDs
For multisession CDs, the content of the first
session determines how the multimedia system
processes the CD. The multimedia system plays
only one session and gives priority to the audio
CD session.
File structure of a data carrier
When you create a disc with compressed music
files, the tracks can be organized in folders. A
folder may also contain subfolders. The disc
may contain no more than eight directory levels.
Files beyond the eighth level will not be recog-
nized by the system.
i
The multimedia system supports data carri-
ers with up to 50,000 files.
In the case of data media with more than
64 GB of stored data, only files in folders with
the following names are supported: Music,
Pictures, Video.
Track and file names
When you create a disc with compressed music
files, you can assign names to the tracks and
folders.
166
Audio/video mode
Media
If MP3 or WMA files are stored in the root direc-
tory itself, the root directory will also be treated
as a folder.
You should observe the following when assign-
ing track names:
R
track names must have at least one character
R
track names must have an extension of a sup-
ported audio or video format, e.g. .mp3, .aac
or .m4v.
R
there must be a dot between the track name
and the extension
Example of a correct track name:
"Track1.mp3".
Permissible formats
The multimedia system supports the following
audio and video formats:
Audio for-
mats
MP3, WMA, CDA, AAC for-
mats (.aac, .mp4, .m4a
and .m4b)
Video for-
mats
DVD-V, MPEG, WMV, M4V,
AVI up to 720p
Copy-protected iTunes
®
music files with
the .m4p file extension are not supported.
Permissible bit and sampling rates
The multimedia system supports MP3 and WMA
files of the following type:
Format Bit rates [kbit/
s]
Sampling
rates [kHz]
MP3 32-320
(fixed and varia-
ble bit rates)
8-48
WMA 5-384
(fixed bit rates)
8-48
The multimedia system does not support WMA
files of the following type:
R
DRM (Digital Rights Management) encrypted
files
R
files with variable bit rates
R
WMA Pro
R
5.1 surround sound
i
Only use tracks with a bit rate of at least
128 kbit/s and a sampling rate of at least
44.1 kHz. Lower rates can cause a noticeable
deterioration in quality. This is especially the
case if you have activated a surround sound
function.
Selecting an active partition (USB mass
storage devices only)
You can select this function for USB storage
devices if the storage device is partitioned. Up
to 9 partitions (primary or logical, FAT, FAT32
and NTFS) are supported.
Selecting an active partition
X
Select a USB storage device (Y page 164).
X
Slide 6 the controller.
The media menu bar is shown.
X
To select Options in the media menu bar:
turn and press the controller.
X
Select Select Active Partition.
Notes on copyright
Audio or video files that you create or reproduce
yourself for playback are generally subject to
copyright protection.
In many countries, reproductions, even for pri-
vate use, are not permitted without the prior
consent of the copyright holder.
Make sure that you know about the applicable
copyright regulations and that you comply with
these.
Notes on CDs/DVDs
!
Do not affix stickers or labels to the discs.
They could peel off and damage the drive.
The drive is designed to receive EN
60908 standard discs. Therefore, you can
only use discs with a maximum thickness of
1.3 mm.
If you insert thicker discs, e.g. those that con-
tain data on both sides (DVD on one side and
audio data on the other), they cannot be ejec-
ted and can damage the drive.
Do not use discs with an 8 cm diameter, even
when using an adapter. Only use round discs
with a 12 cm diameter.
Discs with copy protection are not compatible
with the audio CD standard and therefore may
not be able to be played.
Audio/video mode
167
Media
Z
Playback problems may occur when playing
copied discs.
There may be playback problems if you play CDs
that you have copied yourself with a storage
capacity of more than 700 MB.
i
The multimedia system is able to play back
audio CDs in multichannel audio format.
Inserting and removing a disc from
the single CD/DVD drive
Before inserting a CD or DVD, ensure that the
cup holder is empty and the protective flap is
open. Before removing a disc, be aware that the
CD or DVD can become hot.
Inserting
X
Press the þ button on the single drive.
If there is a disc already inserted, it will be
ejected.
X
Insert a disc into the disc slot with the printed
side facing up.
The drive closes and the disc is played.
If the CD or DVD is started in Media mode, the
corresponding basic menu will be shown. If
the CD or DVD is started from another appli-
cation (e.g. navigation), the display will not
change.
i
The drive may not be able to play discs with
copy protection.
Removing
X
Press the þ button.
The drive ejects the disc.
X
Remove the ejected disc from the slot.
If you do not take the disc out of the slot, it is
drawn in again automatically after a short
while.
Menu overview
:
Cover view (if available)
;
Artist and album
=
Main function bar
?
Media menu bar
A
Track display on the disc
168
Audio/video mode
Media
B
Track number and number of tracks in the track list
C
Numerical time display
D
Graphic time display
Inserting a CD/DVD into the DVD
changer
The DVD changer has a magazine with six trays.
Before inserting a CD or DVD, ensure that the
cup holder is empty and the protective flap is
open.
Inserting a CD/DVD into the magazine tray
X
Press the V button.
The magazine menu appears.
X
To select the magazine tray: turn the control-
ler and press to confirm.
The DVD changer switches to the selected
magazine tray.
The Please Wait...
message appears.
You will then see the Please
insert disc
1. message, for example.
X
Insert a disc into the disc slot with the printed
side facing up.
Loading all empty magazine trays
X
Press the V button.
The magazine menu appears.
X
To select Load Empty Slots: slide 6,turn
and press the controller.
The multimedia system switches to the next
empty magazine tray.
The Please Wait...
message appears.
You will then see the Please
insert disc
1. message, for example.
X
Insert a disc into the disc slot with the printed
side facing up.
Once the disc is loaded, the DVD changer
switches to the next empty tray.
If you take too long inserting the next disc, the
last inserted disc is played.
X
Repeat these steps until all magazine trays
are filled.
The DVD changer plays the last inserted disc.
Canceling the loading process
X
Press the V button.
or
X
To select % in the magazine menu: turn
and press the controller.
Inserting a CD/DVD into the DVD
changer
:
Active ejection
;
Disc name
=
Type of data medium
If you remove one disc while playing another
disc, the DVD changer interrupts playback. Play-
Audio/video mode
169
Media
Z
back continues once the disc has been ejected.
Before removing a disc, be aware that the CD or
DVD can become hot.
Ejecting a single disc
X
Press the V button.
The magazine menu appears. The current disc
is marked.
X
To select a disc: turn the controller and press
to confirm.
The DVD changer ejects the disc.
X
Take the disc out of the slot.
Ejecting all CDs/DVDs
X
Press the V button.
The magazine menu appears.
X
Select Eject All.
The last active disc is ejected.
A message appears, for example Please
remove disc 1..
X
Remove the disc.
X
Repeat the last step until the magazine is
empty.
If you take too long removing the disc, the disc
is re-loaded.
Exiting a menu:
X
Press the V button.
or
X
Select % in the magazine menu.
Inserting and removing an SD card
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
SD cards are small parts. They can be swal-
lowed and cause choking. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Keep the SD card out of the reach of children.
If a SD card is swallowed, seek medical atten-
tion immediately.
!
If you are no longer using the SD card, you
should remove it and store it outside the vehi-
cle. High temperatures can damage the card.
The multimedia system supports the following
memory cards:
R
SD cards (Secure Digital)
R
SDHC cards (Secure Digital High Capacity)
R
SDXC cards (Secure Digital eXtended Capac-
ity)
Inserting an SD card
X
Insert the SD card into the SD card slot until
the SD card engages. The side with the con-
tacts must face down.
Only if the memory card has been selected as
a media source, is the medium played and the
files loaded in the background. If there are no
supported audio or video files, you will see a
message to this effect.
X
Select the media source (Y page 164).
Removing an SD card
X
Press the SD card.
The SD card is ejected.
X
Remove the SD card.
Connecting USB devices
There are two USB ports located in the stowage
compartment in the center console
(
Y page 164).
X
Connect the USB device to the USB port.
The data medium will only be played and the
files will only be loaded in the background if
the corresponding media display is visible.
Otherwise, the system does not automatically
switch to USB. If there are no supported audio
or video files, you will see a message to this
effect.
X
Select the media source (Y page 164).
i
MP3 players must support Media Transfer
Protocol (MTP).
Selecting the playback option
X
In media mode, slide 6 the controller.
The media menu bar is shown.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
170
Audio/video mode
Media
Playing similar tracks
X
To select Play More Like This: turn and
press the controller.
The multimedia system automatically creates
and plays a track list with similar tracks. If
there are no comparable tracks on the data
carrier, you will see a message to this effect.
X
Select the required track.
Selecting Play mode
X
To select Playback Mode: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select Normal Track Sequence.
The current track list is played in the order it is
stored on the data medium.
X
Select Random Track List.
The current track list is played in random
order.
X
Select Random Medium.
All tracks on the data medium are played in
random order.
Skip to time
X
To select Skip to Time: turn and press the
controller.
A menu appears.
X
To set the time: turn the controller.
or
X
Set the desired time using the number key-
pad.
Selecting an active partition
X
To select Select Active Partition: turn
and press the controller.
With the Select
Active Partition option,
you can select a partition in the USB data car-
rier.
Saving files to Media Register
i
With the Save Files to Media Register
option, you can transfer supported audio,
image or video files to the multimedia system
hard drive.
X
To select the Save Files to Media Reg‐
ister option: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears (
Y page 175).
Managing Media Register
X
Delete or rename individual files in the Media
Register (
Y page 176).
X
Delete all files in the Media Register
(
Y page 177).
X
Call up information on the preset
(
Y page 177).
Starting the media source from a different
seat
X
To select the Start Application at
Other Seat function: turn and press the con-
troller.
The media source can be played back at a dif-
ferent seat: (
Y page 166).
Showing track information
X
To switch the function Show Track Infor‐
mation on O or off ª: turn and press the
controller.
You display or hide information for Track,
Artist and Album in the main display field.
Continuing/stopping playback
X
To stop playback: in audio or video mode,
slide 6 the controller.
The media menu bar is shown.
X
To select Ë in the media menu bar: turn
and press the controller.
Playback is interrupted. The display changes
to Ì.
X
To continue playback: in audio or video
mode, slide 6 the controller.
The media menu bar is shown.
X
To select Ì in the media menu bar: turn
and press the controller.
Playback is continued from the point of inter-
ruption. The symbol changes to Ë.
Audio/video mode
171
Media
Z
Selecting a track
Selecting a track using the current
track list
X
To display the current track list: press the
controller in the basic display.
The category list appears.
X
Select Current Tracklist.
X
To select a track: turn the controller and press
to confirm.
Selecting a track by skipping to a track
X
To skip forward or back to a track: turn or
briefly slide 1 the controller in the media
basic display.
Selecting a track using the number key-
pad
X
Press the ¯ key on the number keypad.
A numerical entry field appears. The number
of positions offered corresponds to the num-
ber of tracks in the current track list. Only
numbers that correspond to a track number in
the current track list can be entered.
X
To enter the track number using the number
keys: briefly press the desired numbers on the
number keypad.
The track plays after the last possible number
is entered.
i
Pressing and holding a number key for more
than two seconds completes the entry, and
the corresponding track is played.
Searching for a track
X
In media mode, slide 6 the controller.
The media menu bar is shown.
X
To select Search: turn and press the control-
ler.
The category list is shown.
X
Select a category, e.g. Artists.
Sub-categories appear with the selection of
the main category (depends on the multime-
dia system default settings and the music
tracks available).
X
Select a sub-category.
If the sub-category Artists
contains music
tracks, these will be displayed.
Gracenote
®
Media Database
General notes
This function is available in CD mode.
There is a version of
Gracenote
®
music recognition technology,
Emeryville, California, USA on the multimedia
system hard disk. You will recognize this by the
logo in the bottom right-hand corner of certain
audio displays.
If the audio CD does not contain any CD text
information, the multimedia system can use the
Gracenote
®
Media Database to identify
unknown audio tracks when in CD mode.
Carrying out an Internet update of met-
adata
The Updating Metadata Via Internet
option allows any missing metadata for an audio
CD (e.g. cover, track, album, artist) to be uploa-
ded retrospectively to the internal Gracenote
®
database.
An Internet connection is required for this
(
Y page 146).
Selecting Internet update of metadata
X
In media mode, slide 6 the controller.
The media menu bar is shown.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Updating Metadata Via Internet
in the selection list.
A connection with the Gracenote
®
data server
is established. The missing data is loaded,
saved and displayed in the main display field.
If there is no data found or there is no Internet
connection, a corresponding error message
will appear.
172
Audio/video mode
Media
Switching the Gracenote
®
data display
on/off
X
Activate CD mode (Y page 168).
X
To select Gracenote Media Database: turn
and press the controller.
X
Show Track Information: switch function
on O or off ª.
If the function is deactivated, Track 1
is
shown instead of the Gracenote
®
data in the
basic display, for example.
Media search
Starting the media search
X
In media mode, slide 6 the controller.
The media menu bar appears.
X
To select Search: turn and press the control-
ler.
The category list appears.
General notes
The multimedia system plays back files from the
following data media:
R
Disc (audio CD/DVD)
R
Memory card
R
Media Register
R
USB storage device
R
Apple
®
devices (folder, year and photos are
not available)
The categories are displayed according to the
data available.
Category list
X
In media mode, slide 6 the controller.
The media menu bar is shown.
X
To select Search: turn and press the control-
ler.
The category list is shown.
Depending on the connected media sources and
files, the following categories are listed:
R
Current Tracklist
R
Folder
R
Select By Cover
R
Keyword Search
R
Playlists
R
Artists
R
Albums
R
Track
R
Year
R
Genres
R
Composers
R
Videos
R
Photos
i
The categories are available as soon as the
entire media content has been read and ana-
lyzed.
If the same device is reconnected with
unchanged media content, these categories
are available more quickly.
When connecting Apple
®
devices, the cate-
gories “Folder”, “Year” and “Photos” are not
available.
Searching a track using the current
track list
X
To select Current Tracklist in the cate-
gory list (
Y page 173): turn and press the
controller.
The selection list appears.
X
Select the required track.
Searching for a track via a folder
Playable files can be searched for in the active
data medium's directories.
X
To select Folder in the category list
(
Y page 173): turn and press the controller.
The folder list appears.
X
Select the required folder.
The track list appears.
X
Select the required track.
Media search
173
Media
Z
Searching for a track via cover view
X
To select Select By Cover in the category
list (
Y page 173): turn and press the control-
ler.
A menu with cover views appears.
The multimedia system searches in all media
sources.
X
Select the required cover.
Track playback is started automatically.
Searching for a track via music genre
X
To select Genres in the category list
(
Y page 173): turn and press the controller.
The multimedia system searches in all media
sources. A selection list with Genre and media
sources appears.
X
Select the desired music genre.
A selection list with music tracks from the
selected genre appears.
X
Select a music track.
The track is played. The basic menu for the
active media source is shown.
X
To exit the selection list: press the % but-
ton.
Searching for a track via a keyword
X
To select Keyword Search in the category list
(
Y page 173): turn and press the controller.
The input field appears.
X
To select the required characters: turn and
press the controller for each one (
Y page 34).
Entering just part of the name of a track or
artist is enough. The search result then dis-
plays the entire text.
X
Select ¬.
The search results are displayed.
The numbers behind the results, for example
Tracks
(5/0), mean: 5 results that contain
the exact keyword searched for and 0 results
that are similar.
X
Select one of the results.
Keywords that have already been searched
for are displayed in the "Search history" with-
out having to enter them completely. They
can be accepted directly and displayed in the
search result.
X
Select an entry.
Albums and covers (if available) are shown.
The multimedia system searches in all media
sources.
X
Select an album.
The tracks are listed.
X
Select a track.
The basic display appears and playback
starts.
Media Register
General notes
You can store music files, photos or video files in
the Media Register. The memory capacity is
10.8 GB.
i
Keep your original music files, photos and
video files in a secure location. An error in the
multimedia system may result in the loss of
files stored in the Media Register. Mercedes-
Benz is not liable for any loss of data.
Switching on the Media Register
X
In media mode press the Õ button.
The menu appears with the available media
sources.
X
To select Media Register: turn and press
the controller.
Playback begins at the point last listened to.
If there are no files, you will see a message to
this effect.
Further options for switching on:
R
using the number keypad: (Y page 165)
R
using the main function bar: (Y page 165)
R
using the device list: (Y page 165)
R
using the Õ button: (Y page 164)
174
Media Register
Media
Media Register basic display
:
Main function bar
;
Artist and album
=
Display for the active data medium
?
Display of current track in the track list
A
Media menu bar
B
Numerical time display
C
Graphic time display
D
Cover view (if available)
Copying files to the Media Register
General notes
You can copy photos, music files and videos
from the following data mediums:
R
discs in a DVD changer or a single DVD drive
R
SD card
R
USB storage device
R
MP3
i
Data can be copied from an MP3 player if the
MP3 player can be configured as a mass stor-
age device.
Video files from DVD-V cannot be copied.
While copying, several functions will not be
available. If this is the case, you will see a
message to this effect.
1. Selecting a data medium
X
In media mode: press the Õ button.
The menu appears with the available media
sources.
X
To select the media source: turn the control-
ler and press to confirm.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
Media Register
175
Media
Z
X
Select Save Files to Media Register.
The media list appears. A data medium from
which files can be copied is selected auto-
matically.
i
The Save Files to Media Register
function can be reached from any media
application.
X
Select the displayed data medium.
The data medium is loaded.
If the data medium contains files that can be
copied, a selection menu appears.
2. Selecting files
X
To select All Media Files: turn and press
the controller.
This command copies all files from the selec-
ted data medium. The symbol next to All
Media Files is filled in. All subsequent
entries have a checkmark O beside them.
X
Select a folder.
A checkmark O next to the folder entry high-
lights the selection.
X
To select Continue: turn and press the con-
troller.
The copying menu appears.
3. Starting the copying process
In the example, files are copied from a USB stick
to the MEDIA REGISTER.
X
To select Start: press the controller.
i
The selection of a target folder is optional. If
there is no target folder given, the selected
files are saved to the main directory of the
Media Register.
X
To select Target Folder: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select a folder.
X
Select Continue.
X
To select Start: press the controller.
The copying procedure starts and is shown in
the progress bar.
It may take some time for the copying process
to be completed, depending on the amount of
data. If there is not enough memory space, a
message to this effect appears.
Once the copying procedure is complete, you
will hear the first track of the copied album.
You can now copy more files to the Media
Register.
X
To cancel copying: select Cancel.
Files are stored in the Media Register up until
the point of cancellation.
i
It is possible to change to a different func-
tion (e.g. radio) during the copying procedure.
The copying procedure continues in the back-
ground. While the copying procedure is taking
place, this is shown by a symbol in the status
bar.
Renaming/deleting files
X
In media mode: press the Õ button.
The menu appears with the available media
sources.
X
To select the media source: turn the control-
ler and press to confirm.
176
Media Register
Media
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Manage Media Register.
X
Select Rename / Delete Files.
The file list is displayed.
X
To highlight the file: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Slide 9 the controller.
You can select between Edit
and Delete.
i
Only folders can be renamed.
Renaming a file
X
To select Edit: turn and press the controller.
An input field appears.
X
Rename folder.
X
To save changes with ¬: turn and press
the controller.
Renaming a folder only changes the file name.
Depending on whether or not the Show
Track Information option has been selec-
ted, this change may not be seen in the main
display field.
Deleting a file
X
To select Delete: turn and press the control-
ler.
Deleting all files
!
In order to prevent malfunctions, do not use
COMAND during this time.
This function deletes all files from the Media
Register.
X
In media mode: press the Õ button.
The menu appears with the available media
sources.
X
To select the media source: turn the control-
ler and press to confirm.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Manage Media Register.
X
Select Delete All Media Files.
A message appears.
X
To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
All files are deleted.
Calling up memory space info
X
In media mode: press the Õ button.
The menu appears with the available media
sources.
X
To select the media source: turn the control-
ler and press to confirm.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Manage Media Register.
X
Select Memory Info.
Playback options
General notes
The following options are available:
R
Normal Track Sequence: the tracks are
played in the normal order (e.g. track 1, 2, 3
etc.).
R
Random Medium: all tracks on the data
medium are played in random order (e.g.
track 3, 8, 5 etc.).
R
Random Track List: the current track list is
played in random order (e.g. 3, 8, 5 etc.).
i
The Normal Track Sequence option is
automatically selected when you change the
disc you are currently listening to or when you
select a different medium. If an option is
selected, it remains selected after the multi-
media system has been switched on or off.
Media Register
177
Media
Z
Selecting Play mode
X
In media mode: press the Õ button.
The menu appears with the available media
sources.
X
To select Media Register: turn and press
the controller.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Playback Mode.
The options list appears. The # dot indicates
the current setting.
X
Select the desired option.
The option is switched on. For all options
except Normal Track Sequence
, a corre-
sponding icon appears in the main display.
Bluetooth
®
audio mode
Requirements
The Bluetooth
®
function must be activated in
the multimedia system (
Y page 45).
Bluetooth
®
audio mode requires a Bluetooth
®
-
capable audio device.
Check your Bluetooth
®
audio device for the fol-
lowing; see the manufacturer's operating
instructions:
R
Bluetooth
®
audio profile
The Bluetooth
®
audio device must support
the A2DP and AVRCP Bluetooth
®
audio pro-
files.
R
Bluetooth
®
visibility
Certain Bluetooth
®
audio devices do not just
require activation of the Bluetooth
®
function.
In addition, your device must be made "visi-
ble" to other devices.
R
Bluetooth
®
device name
This device name is predetermined but can
usually be changed. For a clear selection of
the Bluetooth
®
device, Mercedes-Benz rec-
ommends that you customize the device
name.
i
A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile):
Bluetooth
®
audio profile for audio data trans-
mission
AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control Profile):
Bluetooth
®
audio profile for audio data play-
back
i
The Bluetooth
®
device must be visible to the
multimedia system for authorization. After
authorization, the multimedia system even
finds the Bluetooth
®
device when it is not
visible.
General notes
Before using your Bluetooth
®
audio device with
the multimedia system for the first time, you will
need to authorize it.
When you authorize a new Bluetooth
®
audio
device, it is connected automatically. Connec-
tion involves first searching for a Bluetooth
®
audio device and then authorizing it.
You can authorize up to 15 Bluetooth
®
devices.
i
If you authorize a mobile phone that sup-
ports Bluetooth
®
audio, the A2DP and AVRCP
Bluetooth
®
audio profiles are connected
automatically.
The mobile phone is then entered:
R
in the Bluetooth
®
telephone list
(
Y page 115)
R
in the Bluetooth
®
device list
(
Y page 179)
Mercedes-Benz recommends authorizing a
mobile phone in Bluetooth
®
telephony
(
Y page 116).
Bluetooth
®
audio basic display
:
Audio transmission status (depending on
the Bluetooth
®
audio device, also title name
and artist)
;
Data medium position in the media list
178
Bluetooth
®
audio mode
Media
=
Sound settings
?
To connect the device
A
To stop Ë or start Ì playback
B
Name of the connected Bluetooth
®
audio
device (example)
C
Options menu
Switching to Bluetooth
®
audio
X
In media mode: press the Õ button.
The menu appears with the available media
sources.
X
To select Bluetooth Audio: turn and press
the controller.
The multimedia system activates the Blue-
tooth
®
audio device. The basic display then
appears. Playback starts.
If you see the No Bluetooth Audio Device
Connected message, you will need to authorize
the Bluetooth
®
audio device first (Y page 179).
i
If the connected Bluetooth
®
audio device
supports metadata and if the corresponding
data is available, then the artist, track and
album name can be displayed.
Searching for and authorizing a Blue-
tooth
®
audio device
Searching for a Bluetooth
®
audio device
X
Switch on Bluetooth
®
audio mode
(
Y page 179).
X
Slide 6 the controller.
The media menu bar is shown.
X
To select Connect Device: turn and press
the controller.
X
To select Search for Audio Devices:
press the controller.
A message appears.
X
Select Start Search.
The multimedia system searches for Blue-
tooth
®
audio devices within range and adds
them to the Bluetooth
®
device list.
The duration of the search depends on the
number of Bluetooth
®
audio devices within
range and their characteristics.
:
Bluetooth
®
audio player within range and
already authorized
;
Newly detected mobile phone with Blue-
tooth
®
audio mode in range
The Bluetooth
®
device list displays all author-
ized devices, whether they are within range or
not. After a device search, devices which are
within range but not authorized are also dis-
played.
If the multimedia system cannot find your Blue-
tooth
®
audio device, external authorization may
follow (
Y page 180).
Authorizing a Bluetooth
®
audio device
X
In the Bluetooth
®
device list, select a Blue-
tooth
®
audio device that has not yet been
authorized: turn and press the controller.
Authorization starts.
Depending on which Bluetooth
®
audio device
is being used, the device can be authorized
either by entering a passkey or by Secure
Simple Pairing. You can find information on
this in the "Authorizing (connecting) a mobile
phone" section (
Y page 116).
After successful authorization, the Blue-
tooth
®
audio device is connected and starts
playing.
i
With some Bluetooth
®
audio devices, play-
back must initially be started on the device
itself, so that the multimedia system can play
the audio data. Bluetooth
®
must also be given
as a media output location for the audio
device used.
i
The Bluetooth
®
audio device must support
Bluetooth
®
version 2.1 for connection via
Secure Simple Pairing. The multimedia sys-
tem creates a six-digit code which is dis-
played simultaneously on both devices that
are to be connected.
Bluetooth
®
audio mode
179
Media
Z
For some Bluetooth
®
audio devices, the pair-
ing must also be confirmed within 10 sec-
onds.
External authorization
If the multimedia system does not find your
Bluetooth
®
audio device, this may be due to
particular security settings on your Bluetooth
®
audio device. In this case, check whether your
Bluetooth
®
audio device can locate the multi-
media system.
The Bluetooth
®
device name of the multimedia
system is MB Bluetooth
.
X
Switch on Bluetooth
®
audio mode
(
Y page 179).
X
Slide 6 the controller.
The media menu bar is shown.
X
To select Connect Device: turn and press
the controller.
X
To select Connect via Audio Device: turn
and press the controller.
X
Start the authorization on your Bluetooth
®
audio device (see the manufacturer's operat-
ing instructions).
After successful authorization, the Blue-
tooth
®
audio device is connected and starts
playing.
With some Bluetooth
®
audio devices, playback
must initially be started on the device itself, so
that the multimedia system can play the audio
data.
Device-specific information on authorizing and
connecting Bluetooth
®
-capable mobile phones
can be found on the Internet at
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect.
Displaying details
X
To select a Bluetooth
®
audio device from the
Bluetooth
®
device list: turn the controller
(
Y page 179).
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Details: turn and press the con-
troller.
The following information concerning the
selected mobile phone is shown:
R
Bluetooth
®
name
R
Bluetooth
®
address
R
Availability status (shown after an update)
R
Authorization status
X
To close the detailed display: press the
% button.
Starting/stopping playback
X
To start playback: To select Ì: turn and
press the controller.
Playback starts. Ë is selected.
X
To stop playback: select Ë.
A message appears. Ì is selected.
X
To continue playback: select Ì.
A message appears. Ë is selected.
Starting playback if the Bluetooth
®
audio device has been stopped
During the search for mobile phones
(
Y page 115), the connection with the Blue-
tooth
®
audio device is terminated. The No
Bluetooth Audio Device Connected mes-
sage appears in the Bluetooth
®
audio basic dis-
play (
Y page 179). The Connect Last Used
Player message cannot be confirmed.
When the search is finished, the Bluetooth
®
audio device can be reconnected.
X
To confirm the Connect Last Used Player
message in the basic display: press the con-
troller.
Depending on the Bluetooth
®
audio device
used, playback starts immediately or you
must start playback manually.
180
Bluetooth
®
audio mode
Media
In this case, you will see the Bluetooth
Audio Device Paused message.
X
To select Start playback: Ì: slide 6
and press the controller.
Playback resumes from the beginning.
Selecting a track
The function is not supported by all Bluetooth
®
audio devices.
Some mobile phones impair function with
regard to the following criteria:
R
the number of tracks that can be selected.
R
the time period until the next or previous track
is played.
X
Use the multifunction steering wheel to
switch to the media menu in the on-board
computer; see the vehicle Operator's Manual.
X
To skip forward or back to a track: press
the 9 or : button on the multifunction
steering wheel.
X
Rapid scroll: press and hold the 9
or : button on the multifunction steering
wheel until the desired track is reached.
If you press and hold the 9 or : but-
tons, the rapid scrolling speed increases after
a short time.
i
During rapid scrolling, track names are not
displayed but only Track+1, Track+2, etc. (or
Track-1, Track-2, etc.). There are no playback
times shown for tracks that have been played.
This is available as an optional function start-
ing with AVRCP Version 1.3.
Playback options
General notes
If the Bluetooth
®
audio device supports the cor-
responding function, the following options are
available:
R
Normal Track Sequence: the tracks are
played in the normal order (e.g. track 1, 2, 3
etc.).
Audio data playback is determined by the
order in which the tracks are written to the
data medium. Alphabetical order is the most
common. Once all the tracks in a folder have
been played, the tracks in the next folder are
played.
R
Random Track List: the current track list is
played in random order (e.g. 3, 8, 5 etc.).
R
Random Medium: all tracks on the data
medium are played in random order (e.g.
track 3, 8, 5 etc.).
Playback options are optional functions and
are not, or only partially, supported by Blue-
tooth
®
audio devices.
Selecting the playback option
X
Slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Playback Mode.
A # dot indicates the current setting.
X
Select the desired option.
If you select Random Track List
, a corre-
sponding message appears in the display or
selection window.
Increasing the volume in the multime-
dia system
X
Slide 6 the controller in the Bluetooth
®
audio basic display (Y page 178).
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Volume: turn and press the control-
ler.
A menu appears. The # dot indicates the cur-
rent setting.
X
Select Standard or Boost.
Information on audio AUX mode
(
Y page 185).
i
If play back on the Bluetooth
®
audio player
is too quiet, the Boost
function may be used.
It is recommended, however, that you
increase the volume on the Bluetooth
®
audio
player directly.
Bluetooth
®
audio mode
181
Media
Z
Reconnecting a Bluetooth
®
audio
device
The Bluetooth
®
audio profiles are connected
automatically under the following circumstan-
ces:
R
one of the last two mobile phones to have
been connected has also been used as a Blue-
tooth
®
audio player (if this function is sup-
ported by the mobile phone).
R
the mobile phone is automatically connected.
The Bluetooth
®
audio player is then connec-
ted.
i
For an automatic connection with the mul-
timedia system, the mobile phone must be
within range.
For most Bluetooth
®
audio devices, the "auto-
matic connection" must be activated by tick-
ing a box. Depending on the device used, this
prompt often occurs during authorization (see
the manufacturer's operating instructions).
If the No Bluetooth Audio Device Connec‐
ted message appears, you have two options to
reconnect the Bluetooth
®
audio device.
Option 1:
X
To confirm the Connect Last Used Player
message in the basic display: press the con-
troller.
If the multimedia system can locate the Blue-
tooth
®
audio device, it will be connected and
start playing.
Option 2:
X
Slide 6 the controller.
The media menu bar is shown.
X
To select Connect Device: turn and press
the controller.
X
To select a Bluetooth
®
audio device: turn and
press the controller.
If the Bluetooth
®
audio device has been
authorized, playback starts.
Bluetooth
®
audio device and simulta-
neous search for mobile phones
i
When searching for a mobile phone
(
Y page 115) or a new Bluetooth
®
audio
device, the connection to an already activated
Bluetooth
®
audio device is separated.
In the Bluetooth
®
audio basic display, you will
see the No Bluetooth Audio Device Con‐
nected message, and the Connect Last
Used Player menu item cannot be selected.
De-authorizing (deregistering) a Blue-
tooth
®
audio device
X
To select a Bluetooth
®
audio device from the
Bluetooth
®
device list: turn the controller
(
Y page 179).
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Deauthorize: press the controller.
A prompt appears asking whether you really
wish to de-authorize this device.
X
Select Yes.
If you select Yes
, the device will be deleted
from the Bluetooth
®
device list.
i
Before re-authorizing the Bluetooth
®
audio
device, you should also delete the device
name MB Bluetooth
from your Bluetooth
®
audio device's Bluetooth
®
list (see the Blue-
tooth
®
audio device's operating instructions).
Operation with the Media Interface
General notes
Media Interface is a universal interface for the
connection of mobile audio and video devices.
Media Interface in the multimedia system has
two USB connections.
The USB ports are located in the stowage com-
partment under the armrest (
Y page 164).
182
Operation with the Media Interface
Media
Media Interface basic display
:
Cover view (if available)
;
Artist, album or name of the disc
=
Main function bar
?
Display for the active data medium
A
Media menu bar
B
Title display in the media list
C
Current track and number in the track list
D
Numerical time display
E
Graphic time display
Switching to Media Interface
X
Connect the data medium to USB port 1 or
USB port 2 (
Y page 170).
X
Select the basic menu for Media Interface 1 or
Media Interface 2 (
Y page 164).
If playable media files are found, they will be
played by the multimedia system.
If you remove a device, the No Device Con‐
nected message appears.
Supported devices
The following data media can be connected to
the multimedia system via Media Interface:
R
iPod
®
R
iPhone
®
R
iPad
®
R
MP3
R
USB devices
i
iPod
®
, iPhone
®
and iPad
®
are registered
trademarks of Apple Inc., Cupertino, Califor-
nia, USA.
i
Audio files, photos and video files can be
played back.
For details and a list of supported devices, visit
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect.
Then follow the instructions in the "Media Inter-
face" section.
Or call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) (for the USA) or Customer
Relations at 1-800-387-0100 (for Canada).
Supported data formats
Music MP3, WMA, AAC
Video MPEG, WMV, MOV,
AVI, MP4
Images JPG, JPEG, BMP, PNG
Operation with the Media Interface
183
Media
Z
i
Video files from Apple
®
devices cannot be
played using the USB port.
Selecting a music file
Selecting with the controller
X
To display the current track list: press the
controller in the basic display.
X
Select Current Tracklist.
The track list for the active data medium
appears.
X
To select a track: turn the controller and press
to confirm.
X
To skip forward or back to a track: turn the
controller in the basic display.
The selected track is played.
Selecting with fast forward/rewind
X
With the media source active in the basic dis-
play, slide 1 the controller and hold it
until the desired position has been reached.
Searching for a track
Selecting Search using media menu bar
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Search: turn and press the control-
ler.
The category list appears.
Overview
The following categories are listed:
R
Current Tracklist
R
Folder
R
Select By Cover
R
Keyword Search
R
Playlists
R
Artists
R
Albums
R
Track
R
Genres
R
Year
R
Composers
R
Videos
R
Photos
R
Podcasts
R
Audiobooks
i
The functions are available as soon as the
entire media content has been read and ana-
lyzed.
If the same device is reconnected with
unchanged media content, these functions
are available more quickly.
The audio books and podcasts categories are
only available for Apple
®
devices.
When connecting Apple
®
devices, the cate-
gories “Folder”, “Year” and “Photos” are not
available.
X
To select a category, e.g. Current Track‐
list: turn and press the controller.
The selection list appears.
X
Select the required track.
Searching for tracks via keywords
X
To select Keyword Search in the category
list: turn and press the controller.
X
Enter and confirm the characters of the
desired search using the controller
(
Y page 174).
Search results are sorted according to the
available categories, displayed and can then
be selected.
Selecting the playback option
X
In media mode, slide 6 the controller.
The media menu bar is shown.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select the desired playback option: turn
and press the controller.
Additional information on playback options
(
Y page 170).
Selecting video settings
If playable video files are found, they will be
played by the multimedia system.
X
To switch on full-screen mode: press the con-
troller in the basic display.
X
To show the video menu: slide 6 the con-
troller in full-screen mode.
The Media Interface menu bar appears.
184
Operation with the Media Interface
Media
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Video Settings.
X
Change the settings (Y page 189).
Audio AUX mode
Notes on audio AUX mode
External audio sources may have different vol-
umes, which can mean that system messages
such as traffic announcements and navigation
system announcements are much louder. If nec-
essary, deactivate the system messages or
adjust their volume manually.
AUX also provides the option of connecting a
Media Player to the multimedia system.
To connect an external audio source to the audio
AUX, you will require an audio AUX cable.
i
You will find further information online at
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect.
Or call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-
tance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) (for the USA) or Customer
Relations at 1-800-387-0100 (for Canada).
Switching to audio AUX mode
X
Connect an external audio source.
The AUX port is located in the stowage com-
partment in the center console.
The audio AUX is not selected automatically.
X
Press the Õ button.
The menu for the last accessed media source
appears.
X
To select Media: slide 5 and press the con-
troller.
The menu appears with the available media
sources.
X
To select Aux: turn and press the controller.
The medium is played if the audio source is
switched on and playback is activated.
i
Please see the manufacturer's operating
instructions for how to operate the external
audio source.
Setting the audio AUX options
X
To show the menu bar: slide 6 the control-
ler.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
A menu appears. You can set Mono/Stereo
or
Volume
.
Selecting Mono or Stereo
X
To select Mono/Stereo: turn and press the
controller.
A menu appears.
X
Select Mono or Stereo.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
Selecting volume settings
X
To select Volume: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
Select Standard or Boost.
Standard
: the volume of the external audio
source is adjusted to a standard value.
Boost
: the volume of the external audio
source is raised by approximately 10 dB.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
i
A device which is connected as an external
audio source may seem quieter or louder in
the vehicle, or the usual maximum volume
cannot be achieved. On some devices, it is
possible to adjust the volume separately. In
this case, start at a medium volume and
increase it gradually. This enables you to
determine whether the system is able to play
the music at high volume without distorting it.
Video AUX mode
Notes on video AUX mode
External video sources may have different vol-
umes, which can mean that system messages
such as traffic announcements and navigation
system announcements are much louder. If nec-
essary, deactivate the system messages or
adjust their volume manually.
Video AUX is another option for playing videos
via the multimedia system.
To connect an external video source to the video
AUX, you will require a video AUX cable.
i
If you only use an audio AUX cable, you will
only be able to hear the sound from the video
being played.
Video AUX mode
185
Media
Z
Videos cannot be shown on the driver's side
while the vehicle is in motion.
Switching to AUX video mode
X
Connect the external video source.
The video AUX port is located in the stowage
compartment in the center console.
The video AUX is not selected automatically.
X
Press the Õ button.
The last media source you have set is dis-
played.
X
To select Media: slide 5 and press the con-
troller.
The menu appears with the available media
sources.
X
To select Aux: turn and press the controller.
The AUX video menu appears.
X
To select Audio/Video in the menu bar: slide
6 and press the controller.
The Source
Type Selection menu appears.
X
To select Video: turn and press the controller.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
If the video source is connected and playback
selected, the image from the external video
source will appear if Video
is selected.
Please see the manufacturer's operating
instructions for how to operate the external
video source.
Information about sound settings
(
Y page 193)
Switching full-screen mode on/off
X
To switch on: in video AUX mode, slide 5
the controller.
The menu bars disappear.
X
The full-screen symbol appears: press the
controller.
The full screen appears.
X
To switch off: press the controller.
The menu is displayed.
Setting further options
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
A menu appears. You can set Video Set‐
tings, Mono/Stereo and Volume.
Selecting video settings
X
Select Video Settings.
X
Select the preferred screen format, such as
16:9
.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
The screen format is adjusted.
If the Automatic Daylight Adjustment
and Dynamic Image Enhancement ª func-
tions are deactivated, the following settings
can be made manually:
R
Bright.
R
Contrast
R
Color
Selecting mono/stereo:
X
To select Mono/Stereo: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select Mono or Stereo.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
Selecting volume settings
X
Select Volume.
X
Select Standard or Boost.
Standard
: the volume of the external audio
source is adjusted to a standard value.
Boost
: the volume of the external audio
source is raised by approximately 10 dB.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
186
Video AUX mode
Media
Video DVD mode
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
The CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product.
If you open the housing of the CD/DVD drive,
there is a risk of exposure to invisible laser
radiation. This laser radiation could damage
your retina. There is a risk of injury.
Never open the housing. Always have main-
tenance and repair work carried out at a quali-
fied specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
Handling discs while driving may distract you
from traffic conditions. You could also lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
Handle discs only when the vehicle is station-
ary.
Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h) your vehicle covers a
distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every
second.
General notes
Notes on discs
!
Do not affix stickers or labels to the discs.
They could peel off and damage the drive.
The drive is designed to receive EN
60908 standard discs. Therefore, you can
only use discs with a maximum thickness of
1.3 mm.
If you insert thicker discs, e.g. those that con-
tain data on both sides (DVD on one side and
audio data on the other), they cannot be ejec-
ted and can damage the drive.
Do not use discs with an 8 cm diameter, even
when using an adapter. Only use round discs
with a 12 cm diameter.
The variety of data media, writers and writing
software means that the multimedia system
may not be able to play discs that you have cop-
ied yourself.
DVD playback conditions
The multimedia system can play back video
DVDs produced according to the following
standards:
R
Region code 1 or region code 0 (no region
code)
R
PAL or NTSC standard
You will generally find the relevant details either
on the DVD itself or on the DVD case.
With DVDs that do not meet the standard
requirements, you may encounter playback
problems.
i Observe the following notes:
R
It is also possible to play video DVDs with a
different region code, provided that they
are produced in accordance with the PAL or
NTSC standard. If you insert a video DVD
with a different region code, a message to
this effect appears.
R
The multimedia system is set to region
code 1 at the factory. This setting can be
changed at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. The region code can be changed up
to five times.
R
If a DVD cannot be played back according
to national color transfer methods (PAL or
NTSC standards), problems with the image,
sound or playback may occur.
Control options
There are four control menus available in video
DVD mode.
Most DVDs have their own control menu. The
DVD is operated directly using the controller or
DVD functions.
Control menu and
function
Operation
R
DVD's control
menu
Selection of title,
scene, language,
subtitles ...
Operation with the
controller
R
Options menu
Selection of bright-
ness, contrast,
color, format
Operation using the
Options
menu bar,
video settings
Video DVD mode
187
Media
Z
Control menu and
function
Operation
R
Video menu
Selection of scene,
fast forward or
rewind
In full-screen mode,
slide 6 the control-
ler
R
DVD functions
Selection of title,
scene, language,
subtitles ...
In full-screen mode,
press the controller
Function restrictions
Depending on the DVD, certain functions or
actions may not function at all. The symbol K
appears in the display.
Switching on video DVD mode
R
Insert and eject a disc from the single drive
(
Y page 168)
R
Insert a disc into the DVD changer
(
Y page 169)
R
Eject a disc from the DVD changer
(
Y page 169)
Further options for switching on:
R
Using the number keypad (Y page 165)
R
Using the main function bar (Y page 165)
R
Using the device list (Y page 165)
R
Using the Õ button (Y page 164)
DVD overview
:
Main function bar
;
Main display field
=
Media menu bar
?
Additional display area with title, scene and time display
The DVD basic display can be shown in the following situations:
X
To show the DVD menu: press the % button.
X
To show it in the currently playing video: slide 6 the controller.
The video menu appears.
X
Press the controller.
The basic display appears.
188
Video DVD mode
Media
Switching on DVD full-screen mode
It is possible to switch from the DVD basic dis-
play to full screen mode as follows:
X
Slide 5 the controller.
The main function bar and menu bar are hid-
den. A full-screen symbol will be shown.
X
Press the controller.
The full-screen mode appears.
Selecting menu options
X
To select Options: slide 6 the controller
when in full-screen mode
The video menu appears.
X
Press the controller.
The DVD basic display appears.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
A menu appears.
Skip to time
X
To select Skip to Time: turn and press the
controller.
A menu appears.
X
To set the time: turn the controller.
or
Set the desired time using the number key-
pad.
X
To hide the menu: press the % button.
Displaying the DVD functions
X
To select DVD Functions: turn and press the
controller.
A menu appears (
Y page 190).
Starting an application at a different seat
X
To select Start Application at Other
Seat: turn and press the controller.
The menu appears: (
Y page 166).
i
Activating the parental control screen:
(
Y page 63).
Selecting video settings
X
Select Video Settings.
A menu appears.
Video settings
Dynamic image enhancement
The dynamic image enhancement function auto-
matically matches brightness, contrast and
color to the film being played.
X
Select Video Settings (Y page 189).
X
Switch Dynamic Image Enhancement on O
or off ª.
Manual image enhancement
In order to manually adjust the brightness, con-
trast and color, the dynamic image enhance-
ment function and the automatic daylight
adjustment feature must be switched off.
X
Select Video Settings (Y page 189).
X
To select Brightness , Contrast or
Color
: turn and press the controller.
A sliding menu appears.
X
To select the required value: turn the control-
ler.
X
To exit the sliding menu: slide 8 the con-
troller.
Video DVD mode
189
Media
Z
Setting the picture format
X
Select Video Settings (Y page 189).
The following screen format options are availa-
ble for the DVD currently being played:
R
Auto
R
16:9
R
4:3
R
Zoom
X
To set the picture format: turn and press the
controller.
The dot before the menu entry shows the
selected format.
Showing the DVD's control menu
Most DVDs have their own control menu which
can be operated using the controller.
Showing the DVD's control menu
X
To show DVD functions: in full screen video
mode, press the controller.
The DVD functions menu is shown.
X
To select Menu from the DVD functions menu:
turn and press the controller.
The DVD functions menu is hidden and the
DVD's menu entries (e.g. scenes, language,
trailers) are displayed.
X
To select a menu entry: turn and press the
controller.
Operating the video menu
:
Type of data medium
;
Current title
=
Shows the menu bars for the DVD basic dis-
play
?
Current scene
A
Track time
Operating the video menu
X
To show the video menu: slide 6 the con-
troller while the video is in full screen mode.
X
To hide the video menu: slide 5 the con-
troller.
X
To select the next or previous scene: turn the
controller clockwise/counter-clockwise.
X
To fast forward or rewind: slide 1 the
controller and hold until the desired position
has been reached.
X
To show the menu bars for the DVD basic dis-
play: press the controller.
The video menu is hidden and the DVD basic
menu appears.
DVD functions
Showing/hiding the DVD functions
X
To show DVD functions: in full screen video
mode, press the controller.
The DVD functions menu is shown.
X
To hide DVD functions: select % from the
DVD functions.
X
To show the DVD basic display: select ò
from the DVD functions.
Overview of DVD functions
:
Activates DVD control menu
;
Hides DVD functions
=
Shows the DVD basic display
?
Confirms entry in control menu
A
Navigates DVD lists
B
Jumps to the start of the scene
C
Displays camera perspectives
D
Shows subtitles
E
Selects language
190
Video DVD mode
Media
F
Stops playback
G
Pauses playback
Using the DVD functions
X
In full-screen mode, press the controller
The DVD functions menu is shown.
It is possible to navigate in the DVD's control
menu when the arrows in the upper menu bar
are activated.
X
To select the XZ¬Y arrow to navigate in the
menu: turn the controller.
The active arrow is highlighted.
X
To select a menu entry: press the controller.
The next menu entry in the direction of the
arrow is highlighted.
X
To call up a highlighted menu entry: turn the
controller until ¬ is highlighted.
X
Press the controller.
The selected DVD scene is played.
X
To hide DVD functions: select & using the
controller.
X
Press the controller.
The DVD functions menu is hidden.
If there are functions such as Display camera
perspectives on the DVD, these functions are
shown in the DVD functions menu.
X
To call up Display camera perspectives: turn
and press the controller
Continuing/stopping playback
Interrupting playback
X
Show the DVD functions (Y page 190).
X
To select É from the DVD functions menu:
turn and press the controller.
The Ë display changes to Ì. Playback
is stopped.
Continuing playback
X
Select Ì.
Playback continues from the point where it
was interrupted.
Stops playback
X
While playback is interrupted select É
again.
Restarting playback
X
Select Ì.
Playback restarts from the beginning.
Pausing/continuing playback
Pausing playback
X
Show the DVD functions (Y page 190).
X
Select Ë: turn and press the controller.
The Ë display changes to Ì.
Continuing playback
X
Select Ì.
Selecting a scene/chapter
If the film is divided into scenes and chapters,
you can select these directly while the film is
running or you can skip progressively through
them. This is not possible at certain points for
some DVDs (e.g. during the opening credits).
It may also be possible to select the scene or
chapter from the functions stored on the DVD.
X
To skip forward or back: in the video menu,
turn the controller.
The next or previous scene in the film is skip-
ped to.
i
The DVD functions can also be used to make
selections (
Y page 190).
Picture viewer
General notes
If there are pictures on the active data medium,
you can view them on the multimedia system.
The following data media and picture formats
are supported:
R
Data media: Media Register, CD, DVD, USB
devices, SD cards
R
Picture formats: jpeg, jpg, bmp, png
Picture viewer
191
Media
Z
The maximum image resolution is 20 megapix-
els.
It is not possible to view a picture from the driv-
er's side while the vehicle is in motion.
Displaying pictures
X
In media mode, slide 6 the controller.
The media menu bar is shown.
X
To select Search: turn and press the control-
ler.
The category list appears.
X
To select Photos: turn and press the control-
ler.
A directory list appears. Folders and picture
files can be shown.
X
Select a folder or picture.
If there is no picture on the data medium, an
empty list is shown.
Searching for pictures on other data media
X
You can search for pictures on other data
media.
In the directory list, slide 8 the controller.
The device list appears.
X
To select a data medium with picture files:
turn the controller and press to confirm.
A directory list appears. Folders and picture
files can be shown.
X
Select a folder or picture.
Starting a slide show
X
While viewing a picture, press the controller.
The image menu appears.
X
To select Start Slideshow: turn and press
the controller.
The slide show starts.
X
To end the slide show: press the controller.
The image menu appears.
X
Select End Slide Show.
Changing the picture view
X
Press the controller.
The image menu appears.
X
To select Turn Clockwise: turn and press
the controller.
The picture rotates 90 degrees.
X
Select Turn Counterclockwise.
The picture rotates 90 degrees.
X
Select Zoom In.
The size of the picture increases.
After you have zoomed into the picture, you
can move the section of the picture.
X
To move the section of the picture: slide 4
and 1 the controller.
X
To revert to the original size: press the con-
troller
or
X
Press the % button.
Closing the picture viewer
X
Press the controller.
The menu appears.
X
To select Close Picture Viewer: turn and
press the controller.
The multimedia system returns to the last
accessed media function.
192
Picture viewer
Media
Your multimedia system equipment
These operating instructions describe all the
standard and optional equipment of your multi-
media system, as available at the time of going
to press. Country-specific differences are pos-
sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not
feature all functions described here. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and func-
tions.
Read the information on qualified specialist
workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Sound settings
Calls up the sound menu
You can select various sound settings while in
radio mode or another media mode. It is possi-
ble to set more bass for radio mode than for
audio CD mode, for example. The respective
sound menu can be called up from the menu bar
of the desired mode.
X
Switch to radio mode (Y page 154).
or
X
Switch to media mode (Y page 164).
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select à: turn and press the controller.
The menu appears with the last setting
accessed, e.g. Balance/Fader
.
Sound menu overview
Function Options
Equalizer Sets treble, mid-
range and bass
Balance/fader Moves the sound
focus: right/left and
front/rear
Changing loud-
speaker source
Outputsaseat-based
media source on to
the entire sound sys-
tem
Setting treble, mid-range and bass
X
Call up the sound menu(Y page 193).
X
Turn the controller until Equalizer is brought
to the front.
X
To activate rotary menus for treble, mid-range
and base: slide 6 the controller.
X
To switch between the rotary menus: slide
8 or 9 the controller.
X
To make the desired Equalizer settings: turn
the controller.
Rotary menus show the set values.
X
To return to the menu: slide 5 the control-
ler.
X
To return to the basic menu: press the %
button briefly.
Adjusting the balance/fader
Balance moves the focus of the sound between
left and right.
Fader moves the focus of the sound between
front and rear.
X
Call up the sound menu(Y page 193).
X
Turn the controller until Balance/Fader is
brought to the front and then slide 6 the
controller.
Sound settings
193
Sound
X
To activate the menu for balance and fader:
press the controller.
X
To adjust the balance focus: slide 8 or
9 the controller.
X
To adjust the fader focus: slide 6 or 5 the
controller.
An image shows the sound focus set.
X
To exit the menu: press the % button.
Changing loudspeaker source
Select Sound Source specifies which seat-
based media source shall be output on the
speaker system.
Example: a media source is being listened to
using headphones in the left-hand rear seat.
Rear
Left must be selected in Select Sound
Source if the same media source is to be lis-
tened to using the sound system.
If the loudspeaker source is set to a seat where
no playback is activated, nothing can be heard
on the vehicle loudspeaker.
X
Call up the sound menu (Y page 193).
X
Turn the controller until Select Sound
Source is brought to the front.
X
To activate the rotary menu for the speaker
source: slide 6 the controller.
X
To set the desired speaker source: turn the
controller.
The segment, text and image show the selec-
ted setting.
X
To return to the menu: slide 5 the control-
ler.
X
To return to the basic menu: press the %
button briefly.
Burmester
®
surround sound system
General notes
The Burmester
®
surround sound system is avail-
able for all functions in the radio and media
modes.
The Burmester
®
surround sound system has a
total output of 590 watts and is equipped with
13 loudspeakers.
For the best sound, we recommend that the
Automatic Volume Adjustment
function is
deactivated (
Y page 46). For further information
on automatic volume adjustment, see
(
Y page 46).
If using Bluetooth
®
audio mode, we recommend
you select the Boost
setting (Y page 181).
Calling up the sound menu
You can select different sound settings in radio
mode and other media modes. It is possible to
set more bass for radio mode than for audio CD
mode, for example. The respective sound menu
can be called up from the menu bar of the
desired mode.
X
Switch to radio mode (Y page 154).
or
X
Switch to media mode (Y page 164).
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select à: turn and press the controller.
The menu appears with the last setting
accessed, e.g. Balance/Fader
.
Overview of Burmester
®
surround sound sys-
tem
Function Options
Equalizer Sets treble, mid-
range and bass
Balance/fader Moves the sound
focus: right/left and
front/rear
Changing loud-
speaker source
Outputs a seat-based
media source on to
the entire sound sys-
tem
Surround Optimizes sound
playback for all seats
194
Burmester
®
surround sound system
Sound
Setting treble, mid-range and bass
X
Call up the sound menu (Y page 194).
X
Turn the controller until Equalizer is in the
center.
X
Slide 6 the controller.
The rotary menus for treble, mid-range and
bass are activated.
X
To switch between the rotary menus: slide
8 or 9 the controller.
X
To make the desired Equalizer settings: turn
the controller.
The rotary menus show the set values.
X
To return to the menu: slide 5 the control-
ler.
X
To return to the basic menu: press the %
button briefly.
Adjusting the balance/fader
Balance moves the focus of the sound between
left and right.
Fader moves the focus of the sound between
front and rear.
X
Call up the sound menu (Y page 194).
X
Turn the controller until Balance/Fader is
brought to the front and then slide 6 the
controller.
X
To activate the menu for balance and fader:
press the controller.
X
To adjust the balance focus: slide 8 or
9 the controller.
X
To adjust the fader focus: slide 6 or 5 the
controller.
An image shows the sound focus set.
X
To exit the menu: press the % button.
Changing loudspeaker source
Select Sound Source specifies which seat-
based media source shall be output on the
speaker system.
Example: a media source is being listened to
using headphones in Rear Right
. Rear Right
must be selected in Select Sound Source if
the same media source is to be listened to using
the sound system.
X
Call up the sound menu (Y page 194).
X
Turn the controller until Select Sound
Source is in the center.
X
Activate the rotary menus for the Select
Sound Source. Slide 6 the controller.
X
To set the desired speaker source: turn the
controller.
The segment, text and image show the selec-
ted setting.
X
To return to the menu: slide 5 the control-
ler.
X
To return to the basic menu: press the %
button briefly.
Burmester
®
surround sound system
195
Sound
Setting surround sound
The setting optimizes the sound playback for the
selected seat position.
Switching on/off
X
Call up the sound menu (Y page 194).
X
Turn the controller until Surround is in the
center.
X
Slide 6 the controller.
The left-hand rotary menu to switch surround
sound on and off is activated.
X
To switch on Surround: turn the controller.
Setting the focus
X
Slide 9 the controller.
The right-hand rotary menu is activated.
X
To set Front, Rear or All Seats: turn the
controller.
The menu symbol, text and image show the
selected setting.
i
The focus can be set regardless of whether
or not surround sound is activated.
X
To exit the menu: press the % button.
Burmester
®
high-end 3D surround
sound system
General notes
The Burmester
®
high-end 3D surround sound
system is available for all functions in the radio
and media modes.
For the best sound, we recommend that the
Automatic Volume Adjustment
function is
deactivated (
Y page 46). For further information
on automatic volume adjustment, see
(
Y page 46).
If using Bluetooth
®
audio mode, we recommend
you select the Boost
setting (Y page 181).
Calling up the sound menu
You can select different sound settings in radio
mode and other media modes. It is possible to
set more bass for radio mode than for audio CD
mode, for example. The respective sound menu
can be called up from the menu bar of the
desired mode.
X
Switch to radio mode (Y page 154).
or
X
Switch to media mode (Y page 164).
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select à: turn and press the controller.
The menu appears with the last setting
accessed, e.g. Sound Profile
.
Overview of Burmester
®
high-end 3D surround
sound system
Function Options
Equalizer Sets treble, mid-
range and bass
Balance/fader Moves the sound
focus: left/right and
front/rear
Changing loud-
speaker source
Outputs a seat-based
media source on to
the entire sound sys-
tem
VIP & BAL selection Optimizes sound
playback for individ-
ual seats
Sound profile Five defined sound
settings: Pure
/
Easy Listening
/
Live
/Sur‐
round/3D-Sound
196
Burmester
®
high-end 3D surround sound system
Sound
Setting treble, mid-range and bass
X
Call up the sound menu (Y page 196).
X
Turn the controller until Equalizer is in the
center.
X
Slide 6 the controller.
Rotary menus for treble, mid-range and bass
are activated.
X
To switch between the rotary menus: slide
8 or 9 the controller.
X
To make the desired Equalizer settings: turn
the controller.
Rotary menus show the set values.
X
To return to the menu: slide 5 the control-
ler.
X
To return to the basic menu: press the %
button briefly.
Adjusting the balance/fader
You can use balance to move the focus of the
sound between left and right.
You can use fader to shift the focus of the sound
between the front and rear seats.
X
Call up the sound menu (Y page 196).
X
Turn the controller until Balance/Fader is in
the center and slide 6.
X
To activate the menu for balance and fader:
press the controller.
X
To adjust the balance: slide 8 or 9 the
controller.
X
To adjust the fader: slide 6 or 5 the con-
troller.
An image shows the sound focus set.
X
To return to the basic menu: press the %
button briefly.
Changing loudspeaker source
Select Sound Source specifies which seat-
based media source shall be output on the
speaker system.
Example: a media source is being listened to
using headphones in Driver
. Driver must be
selected in Select Sound Source
if the same
media source is to be listened to using the sound
system.
X
Call up the sound menu (Y page 196).
X
Turn the controller until Select Sound
Source is in the center.
X
Slide 6 the controller.
Rotary menus for the speaker source are acti-
vated.
X
To set the desired speaker source: turn the
controller.
The segment, text and image show the selec-
ted setting.
X
To return to the menu: slide 5 the control-
ler.
X
To return to the basic menu: press the %
button briefly.
Burmester
®
high-end 3D surround sound system
197
Sound
VIP & BAL selection
The VIP & BAL Selection setting can be used
to select sound optimization for a specific seat,
e.g. Rear Left
.
X
Call up the sound menu (Y page 196).
X
Turn the controller until VIP & BAL Selec‐
tion is in the center.
X
To activate the left-hand rotary menu to
switch VIP & BAL Selection
on and off:
slide 6 the controller.
X
To activate VIP & BAL Selection: turn the
controller until On
is active.
X
To activate the right-hand rotary menu: slide
9 the controller.
X
To set the desired VIP & BAL Selection:
turn the controller.
The segment, text and image show the selec-
ted setting, e.g. for Rear Left
.
X
To return to the menu: slide 5 the control-
ler.
X
To return to the basic menu: press the %
button briefly.
Setting the sound profile
With the Sound Profile setting, you can select
between five defined sound settings.
Sound profile for
high-end 3D sound
system
Description
Pure
Audiophile audio
playback without
additional effects
Easy Listening
Subtly mellowed
acoustics for laid-
back listening over
long periods
Sound profile for
high-end 3D sound
system
Description
Live
Spectacular sound
settings with live-per-
formance character-
istics
Surround
Enhanced surround
sound for mono and
stereo recordings
3D-Sound
Three-dimensional
listening experience
X
Call up the sound menu (Y page 196).
X
Turn the controller until Sound Profile is in
the center.
X
Slide 6 the controller.
The rotary menu to select the sound profile is
activated.
X
To select Sound Profile: turn the controller
until the desired sound profile is activated.
X
To return to the menu: slide 5 the control-
ler.
X
To return to the basic menu: press the %
button briefly.
198
Burmester
®
high-end 3D surround sound system
Sound
Your multimedia system equipment
These operating instructions describe all the
standard and optional equipment of your multi-
media system, as available at the time of going
to press. Country-specific differences are pos-
sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not
feature all functions described here. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and func-
tions.
Read the information on qualified specialist
workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
SIRIUS Weather
Introduction
This function is currently not available for Can-
ada.
For the reception of weather forecasts via sat-
ellite radio, you will need a SIRIUS XM Satellite
Weather subscription.
If the message: Please call SIRIUS to
activate the system at: 888-539-7474
ESN: SIRIUS ID appears along with the ID
number of the SIRIUS device, you will need to
have the weather service activated first.
X
To select Call or Cancel: turn and press the
controller.
If a mobile phone is connected to the multi-
media system(
Y page 113), when you select
Call
a call is placed to a member of the SIR-
IUS service staff. The ID number of the SIRIUS
device will be transferred to the telephone
display.
X
This will be followed by instructions from the
service employee.
The multimedia system can receive weather
forecasts for the USA (including Alaska and
Hawaii) via satellite radio. The received weather
data can be displayed as an information chart
(daily forecast, five-day forecast, detailed infor-
mation) or on the weather map.
The weather data received from the weather
station is stored for one hour in the multimedia
system. It can therefore be displayed again
immediately after restarting the engine (for
example after refueling).
Depending on which scale has been selected,
the weather map can display the following
weather data with symbols:
R
rain radar
R
storm characteristics
R
high and low-pressure areas, weather fronts
R
course of tropical cyclones (hurricanes,
typhoons)
R
storm warnings
R
wind direction and speeds
i
The rain radar cannot be displayed for
Alaska, Hawaii and Puerto Rico.
i
Hurricane: term used to describe the tropi-
cal cyclones that primarily develop in the
Atlantic, North Pacific and South Pacific
oceans. The wind speeds are above 74 mph
(118 km/h). Five categories are used to clas-
sify the strength of a hurricane.
Typhoon: term used to describe a tropical
cyclone that develops in the northwestern
Pacific. The wind speeds are in the category of
a hurricane.
Switching the SIRIUS Weather display
on/off
Activating
X
To display the main function bar: slide 5
the controller.
X
To select ®, turn and press the controller.
The online applications menu appears.
X
To select SIRIUS Weather, turn and press
the controller.
The information chart shows the daily fore-
cast at the current vehicle position.
SIRIUS Weather
199
SIRIUS Weather
You see the following information:
R
the date and time of the weather message
received last
R
information on the current weather (temper-
ature, cloud coverage) and a forecast for the
next three, six and twelve hours
R
the current highest temperature and fore-
casts
R
the current lowest temperature and forecasts
R
the probability of rain
Switching to the 5-day forecast:
X
To select Current: turn and press the con-
troller.
A menu appears.
X
Select 5-Day.
The information chart displays the forecast
for the next five days in the currently selected
location.
Returning to the current-day forecast:
X
To select 5-Day: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
Select Current.
The information chart shows the forecast for
the current day again.
Deactivating
X
Press %.
Displaying detailed information
Besides the current temperatures, you can dis-
play information such as wind speeds and UV
index.
X
To select Current or 5-Day in the current-day
or 5-day forecast: turn and press the control-
ler.
A menu appears.
X
Select Info.
The information chart shows detailed infor-
mation for the selected area.
Selecting the area for the weather
forecast
Introduction
You can select the following areas:
R
the current vehicle position
R
the vicinity of the destination
R
a winter sports area
R
an area within the USA
You can select a location in the information
chart (option 1) or in the map (option 2). You also
have the option of selecting a location from the
memory (
Y page 202). In order to select a loca-
tion from the memory, you must have previously
saved a location.
i
The multimedia system receives weather
data for the weather forecasts from the near-
est weather station to the selected location.
200
SIRIUS Weather
SIRIUS Weather
Option 1: selecting the area in the infor-
mation chart
X
To select Position in the information chart:
turn and press the controller.
X
To select the current vehicle position:
select Current Position
in the menu.
The multimedia system receives weather data
for the current vehicle position from the near-
est weather station and automatically dis-
plays the data.
Requirement for "Near destination": a route to a
destination has been calculated (
Y page 74).
The menu item is otherwise grayed out.
X
To select the vicinity of the destination:
select Near
Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
To select a winter sports area: select At
Ski Area from the menu: turn the controller
and press to confirm.
X
Select a state, e.g. Colorado.
X
Select a winter sports area from the menu.
The weather data and other information is
displayed for the winter sports area that has
been selected. The data is supplied by the
nearest weather station.
The information chart shows the following infor-
mation (if available):
R
ski slopes/ski lifts
R
snowboarding and nighttime opening
R
snow conditions (e.g. snow depth)
R
temperature
The status of a facility is indicated as follows:
R
green check mark - open
R
red cross - closed
R
question mark - not known
Example: city list with character bar
Entry limitation: searching for a location using
the character bar is not possible while driving.
X
To search for a location: select Search
Areas: turn the controller and press to con-
firm.
X
Select Other States or Current State
(ABC).
Depending on the selection, the list of states
or cities will appear with the character bar.
You can limit the search using the character
bar.
X
To select state/province or city: enter the
first few letters by turning and pressing the
controller.
X
To switch to the list without the character bar:
slide 5 the controller or select ¬.
X
To cancel an entry: highlight in the
character bar and press the controller.
Pressing briefly deletes the last letter
entered.
Pressing and holding longer deletes the entire
entry.
X
To select the state/province or city from the
list: turn and press the controller.
After selecting a state (or province) the list of
locations appears.
After selecting a location, the information
chart displays the weather forecast for the
selected location. The data is supplied by the
nearest weather station.
SIRIUS Weather
201
SIRIUS Weather
Option 2: selecting the area in the
weather map
X
Call up the weather map (Y page 202).
X
Move the weather map so that the crosshair is
over the desired area (
Y page 202).
X
Press the controller.
The information chart shows the weather
forecast for the selected area. The data is
supplied by the nearest weather station.
Memory functions
Storing the area in the weather memory
You can save locations that are called up fre-
quently in ten preset positions (0, 1-9) in the
weather memory.
X
In the weather memory: select the area for
the weather forecast (
Y page 200).
The selected location appears at the top in the
status bar.
X
To select Position in the information chart:
turn and press the controller.
X
Select Presets.
X
Select a preset using the controller.
X
Press and hold the controller until you hear a
tone.
The area is entered on the selected preset.
Equipment with telephone keypad
X
To store rapidly: in the daily forecast
(
Y page 199) press and hold a number key,
e.g. l, until the preset position number is
shown in the status bar in front of the area
name.
i
You can also use this function in the five-day
forecast (
Y page 199), and in the detailed
information view (
Y page 200).
Selecting an area from the weather
memory
X
Directly from the weather memory: select
Position
from the information chart: turn
and press the controller.
X
Select Presets.
X
Select the memory position which contains
the location you require.
The weather data for the selected area is dis-
played.
Equipment with telephone keypad
X
Quick select: if a location is stored in the
weather memory, for example when the cur-
rent forecast display is active, briefly press a
number key, e.g. l.
The weather data for the selected area is dis-
played.
Weather map
Calling up the weather map
X
To select Map in the information chart: turn
and press the controller.
The weather map is shown on a 500-mi (500-
km) scale.
Moving the weather map
X
Slide 4 or 1 the controller.
The weather map moves in the corresponding
direction under the crosshair.
Changing the scale
X
Turn the controller.
The scale bar appears.
X
Turn until the desired scale is set.
Showing/hiding the menu in the
weather map
X
To show: press the controller.
X
To hide: slide 5 the controller.
202
SIRIUS Weather
SIRIUS Weather
Selecting a weather station in the map
X
Move the weather map and crosshair to the
desired position (
Y page 202).
X
To show the menu: press the controller.
X
To select Weather Table: press the control-
ler.
The multimedia system receives weather data
for the selected position from the nearest
weather station and displays the data as a
current-day forecast.
Switching layers on the map on/off
You can switch on different layers, for example
to display the rain radar, weather fronts and the
course of tropical storms on the map.
X
Display the menu on the weather map
(
Y page 202).
X
To select View: turn and press the controller.
X
Select a layer.
Switch the display on O or off ª.
Explanation of the layers on the
weather map
R
Radar Map
Displays the rain radar as a colored area in all
map scales. For an explanation of the colors,
see the legend (
Y page 207).
R
Storm Characteristics
Displays the characteristics of a storm in all
map scales:
-
tornadic storm:
storm cell with strong winds (super cell),
from which a tornado can develop. Torna-
does are also known as twisters.
-
cyclone:
storm cells from which a tornadic storm
can develop
-
hailstorm
-
the likelihood of a hailstorm
R
Storm watch areas
Shows areas for which storm advisories have
been issued (red areas). These are shown in
map scales 50 mi (50 km), 200 mi (200 km)
and 500 mi (500 km).
R
Atmospheric Pressure
Shows the position of high and low-pressure
areas (H, L), weather fronts and isobars It is
shown in map scales 200 mi (200 km) and
500 mi (500 km).
R
Tropical Storm Tracking
Shows the direction and speed of propagation
(track) of a tropical storm in all map scales
with information on times and intensity.
R
Winds
Shows the wind direction and wind speed in
map scale of 5 mi (5 km).
SIRIUS Weather
203
SIRIUS Weather
Sample displays of weather data in the map
Displaying the rain radar:
X
Activate the Radar Map display level (Y page 203).
The rain radar image is then displayed if weather data is available.
i
You can call up the legend for the precipitation radar (Y page 207).
The transparency of the radar map display level can be adjusted in 5 stages.
Displaying storm characteristics:
X
Activate the Storm Characteristics display level (Y page 203).
If weather data is available, the weather map will then display the storm characteristics.
You can call up the legend for storms (
Y page 207).
The following information on a storm cell is displayed (if available):
R
characteristics of the storm cell
R
date and time of observation (time stamp)
R
directional movement speed and path
Displaying weather fronts:
X
Activate the Atmospheric Pressure display level (Y page 203).
If weather data is available, the weather map will then display the weather fronts.
The example shows the position of high and low-pressure areas (H, L), weather fronts and isobars.
Isobars are lines that show where the air pressure is the same.
204
SIRIUS Weather
SIRIUS Weather
Legend: weather fronts
Weather front Explanation
Cold front
(blue line with blue trian-
gles)
If a cold front moves in, the weather remains changeable and there
are often rain showers and thunderstorms. The air temperature
decreases.
Warm front
(red line with red semi-cir-
cles)
A warm front may cause more prolonged steady rain, more cloud
cover and a slow rise in temperature.
Stationary front
(red and blue line with red
semi-circles and blue trian-
gles)
The weather front moves minimally. The weather remains change-
able in this area.
Occlusion
(purple line with purple
semi-circles and triangles)
An occlusion arises when the faster cold front catches up and joins
the warm front ahead of it. The weather remains changeable and
rainy within an occlusion.
:
Position on the forecast path
;
Current position of the cyclone
=
Position on the previous path
Displaying storm tracking information:
X
Activate the Tropical Storm Tracking display level (Y page 203).
If weather data is available, the weather map will then display storm tracking information.
A dotted line shows the previous path and the forecast path of a tropical low-pressure area
(cyclone).
SIRIUS Weather
205
SIRIUS Weather
You can have more information about cyclones in the storm areas displayed (Y page 208).
The following information is shown (if available):
R
name of the tropical storm and category
R
time stamp
R
directional movement speed and path
R
maximum wind speed
Propagation speed: the speed at which the storm cell of a tropical cyclone is advancing.
A tropical storm is separated into different categories according to the location at which it develops.
Region of origin category
Atlantic, North and South Pacific
Oceans
Name of tropical low-pressure system (Tropical Low
Press. Sys.)
Atlantic, North and South Pacific
Oceans
Name of tropical storm (Tropical Storm)
Atlantic, North and South Pacific
Oceans
Name of tropical storm (Hurricane Category 3)
Displays hurricane categories 1 through 5
Northwestern Pacific Ocean
Name of tropical storm (Tropical Low Press. Sys.)
Northwestern Pacific Ocean
Name of tropical storm (Tropical Cyclone)
Northwestern Pacific Ocean
Name of tropical storm (Typhoon)
Northwestern Pacific Ocean
Name of tropical storm (Super-Typhoon)
You can also see the time stamp for the weather data on map scales of 50 miles and smaller.
The weather map shows wind directions and wind speeds.
206
SIRIUS Weather
SIRIUS Weather
Legend (precipitation radar and storms)
X
Display the menu on the weather map (Y page 202).
X
To select View: turn and press the controller.
X
Select Legend.
i
The symbol for a tornadic storm is also valid for a cyclone (mesocyclone).
Precipitation type Color scale
Rain
11 shades from light (light green) to heavy (red)
Mixed
Light (light violet) to heavy (violet)
Snow
Light (light turquoise) to heavy (turquoise)
Time stamp
The time stamp shows when the weather data was created by the weather station.
A time stamp corresponds to the time at the vehicle's current position. The changeover from sum-
mer time to standard time is performed automatically.
X
Display the menu on the weather map (Y page 202).
X
To select View: turn and press the controller.
X
Select Time Stamp.
Changing to the information chart
X
Display the menu on the weather map (Y page 202).
X
To select Weather Table: turn and press the controller.
SIRIUS Weather
207
SIRIUS Weather
Storm watch areas
Storm watch areas for which there are storm advisories are displayed as red areas on the weather
map.
Activating/deactivating the display of areas in red:
X
To call up the menu from the weather map display: press the controller.
X
To select View: turn and press the controller.
The list of display levels appears.
X
Select Storm Watch.
X
Select Show Symbols for Storm Areas On Map.
Depending on the previous setting, activate O or deactivate ª the display of areas in red.
Activating/deactivating the automatic display of warning popups:
X
Select Display Storm Watch Automatically.
Depending on the previous setting, activate O or deactivate ª the automatic display of warning
popups.
Setting the radius for the popups:
X
Select 5 Miles (5 km), 50 Miles (50 km) or 200 Miles (200 km).
Storm overview
Displaying the Storm Guide:
X
Display the menu on the weather map
(
Y page 202).
X
To select Guide: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears. The current storm is high-
lighted. There is information about the storm
in the status bar.
X
To select Next: turn and press the controller.
The next storm is marked.
X
Select Previous.
The previous storm is highlighted.
Showing storm details:
X
Select Details.
You see detailed information about the selec-
ted storm.
208
SIRIUS Weather
SIRIUS Weather
Your multimedia system equipment
These operating instructions describe all the
standard and optional equipment of your multi-
media system, as available at the time of going
to press. Country-specific differences are pos-
sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not
feature all functions described here. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and func-
tions.
Read the information on qualified specialist
workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Rear Seat Entertainment System
overview
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
The CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product.
If you open the housing of the CD/DVD drive,
there is a risk of exposure to invisible laser
radiation. This laser radiation could damage
your retina. There is a risk of injury.
Never open the housing. Always have main-
tenance and repair work carried out at a quali-
fied specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
If objects such as headphones/headsets or
external audio/video sources are not secured
in the passenger compartment, they can be
flung around and hit vehicle occupants. There
is a risk of injury, for example in the event of
sudden braking or a sudden change in direc-
tion.
Always stow these items or similar objects
carefully so that they cannot be flung around,
for example in a lockable vehicle stowage
compartment.
Components
The Rear Seat Entertainment System includes:
R
two screens for the rear behind the front-seat
head restraints
R
two remote controls for the rear compart-
ment
R
a CD/DVD drive in the rear compartment
R
AUX jacks
R
two USB ports
R
two sets of cordless headphones
General notes
R
You can only adjust the volume for the head-
phones supplied, directly on the headphones.
R
If media from different sources are used, they
can be used separately from each of the oper-
ating positions. Example: a film from the DVD
drive is played on the rear right-hand operat-
ing position. This means that another film
from the same DVD cannot be played sepa-
rately on the rear left-hand operating position.
However, all other media sources (e.g. radio,
Media Interface) or the online and Internet
functions can be used.
R
If you use the same medium on both sides,
you can both carry out the respective set-
tings. The "last one wins" principle applies
here, i.e. the last setting activated is favored.
R
The Internet can be used separately at all
operating positions.
R
The Internet can only be used if it is set up and
connected via a telephone(
Y page 142).
Rear-compartment screens
:
Display
;
Brightness sensor
Rear Seat Entertainment System overview
209
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Z
=
Switches the display on/off
?
Socket for headphones
Setting the display angle
X
Press the CAR button on the remote control.
X
Press the : button on the remote control.
X
Using the =Ì buttons on the remote
control, select Display
and confirm by press-
ing 9.
X
Select Tilt Display.
X
SelectUpward or Downward.
The display tilts upward or downward.
Remote control
Overview
:
Selects main menus
;
Selects the screen for the remote control
=
Selector wheel for selecting menus, radio
stations, music tracks and chapters
?
Buttons for selecting menus
A
Deletes an entry
B
Skip-back function, fast forward/rewind,
start/pause, menu selection, radio stations,
music tracks and chapters
C
Direct selection of radio stations, music
tracks and chapters using the number key-
pad
D
Volume, switches sound on/off (for corded
headphones)
E
Back button
F
Confirms a selection
G
Indicator lamp
H
Switches the screen on/off
i
Two remote controls are supplied for the US
and Canadian markets.
Selecting the screen for the remote con-
trol
You can use the remote control to operate one
of the two rear screens at a time. To do so, you
must switch the remote control to the desired
screen.
X
To select the left-hand screen: turn thumb-
wheel : until "L REAR" appears in the win-
dow.
X
To select the right-hand screen: turn the
thumbwheel until "REAR R" appears in the
window.
X
To select the COMAND screen: turn thumb-
wheel : until "COMAND" appears in the win-
dow.
Please be aware that using the thumbwheel to
select screens may cause unwanted changes to
the screens of your occupants.
Up to four remote controls can be used in the
vehicle at the same time.
210
Rear Seat Entertainment System overview
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Switching the screen on/off
The switched-on rear compartment screens
switch off after 30 minutes if:
R
the SmartKey is in position 0 or 1 in the igni-
tion lock
R
the SmartKey is not inserted
Before the screens switch off, they show a mes-
sage to this effect.
You can switch the screens back on. Please note
that this may cause the starter battery to dis-
charge.
X
Press button : on the remote control.
The respective rear-compartment screen
switches on or off.
i
You can only switch the screens on using the
remote control if the ignition is switched on.
Switching the button lighting on/off
X
Lighting of the remote control buttons is divi-
ded into three areas. The corresponding area
is activated every time you press a button. It
switches off again automatically 5 to 10 sec-
onds after the last button has been pressed.
Switching the sound on/off (corded
headphones only)
X
Press button : on the remote control.
The sound is switched on/off.
Selecting a menu
R
Buttons : are used to directly access the
corresponding main menu.
R
Using selector wheel = or the
=Ì9: buttons, select a menu.
To confirm your selection, press the 9 but-
ton.
Rear Seat Entertainment System overview
211
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Z
Indicator lamp on the remote control
The color of the indicator lamp shows whether
or not the entry has been correctly transmitted
every time you press a button. It also shows the
condition of the inserted batteries.
LED dis-
play
Status
Green
(flashes
once)
Entry being transmitted.
The batteries are fine.
Red
(flashes
once)
Entry being transmitted.
The batteries are almost dis-
charged.
Orange
(flashes
three
times)
Entry not correctly transmitted.
Unlit The batteries are discharged.
i
The function of the remote control may be
impaired by other radio-based electronic
devices such as mobile phones or laptops.
Operation via smartphone
:
Skip back button for selected rear compart-
ment displays
;
To select and display active rear compart-
ment displays
=
Controller
?
Remote control menu bar
A
To skip forward
B
To increase the volume in the vehicle interior
C
To reduce the volume in the vehicle interior
D
To show the number or alphabetical keypad
E
To skip back
F
To start/pause
You can also operate the Rear Seat Entertain-
ment System usingasmartphone.
In order to be able to use this function, you will
need to download an app from Google Play™
(Android) or the App Store
®
(iOS) and install this
on your smartphone.
Information on connecting and using smart-
phones with the multimedia system can be
found in the app description in Google Play™
(Android) or in the App Store
®
(iOS).
212
Rear Seat Entertainment System overview
Rear Seat Entertainment System
CD/DVD drive
:
CD/DVD slot
;
CD/DVD eject button
Depending on the vehicle model and equipment
level, the CD/DVD drive is found:
R
at the rear of the center console under the
automatic climate control panel or
R
between the parcel shelf and skibag
AUX jacks
:
AUX, right-hand (R) jack for audio signal
(red)
;
AUX, left-hand (L) jack for audio signal
(white)
=
AUX, video (V) jack (yellow)
Depending on the vehicle model and equipment
level, the AUX jacks are found:
R
in the stowage box between the rear seats or
R
in the rear-compartment armrest
USB ports
:
USB port 1
;
USB port 2
Depending on the vehicle model and equipment
level, the USB ports are found:
R
in the stowage box between the rear seats or
R
in the rear-compartment armrest
Rear Seat Entertainment System overview
213
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Z
Cordless headphones
Overview
X
To adjust the headphones: open both sides of the headphones.
X
Adjust the headphones by pulling the headphone band in the direction of the arrow.
X
To switch the headphones on/off: press on/off switch ;.
X
To adjust the volume: turn volume control = until the desired volume is set.
or
X
If you have connected corded headphones to a rear-compartment screen, you can adjust the
volume using the remote control (
Y page 210).
X
To check the battery condition of charge: check the state of the batteries using indicator
lamp :.
The headphones automatically switch off if they have not received an audio signal for approximately
three minutes. This preserves the batteries.
Indicator lamp on the cordless head-
phones
The color of the indicator lamp shows:
R
whether the device is switched on or off
R
the condition of the inserted batteries
LED dis-
play
Status
Green The batteries are fine.
Red The batteries are almost dis-
charged.
Lit continu-
ously
The headphones are switched
on and connected to a screen.
LED dis-
play
Status
Flashing The headphones are searching
for the connection to a screen.
No display
(dark)
The headphones are switched
off or the batteries are dis-
charged.
i
The function of the headphones may be
impaired by other radio-based electronic
devices such as mobile phones or laptops.
214
Rear Seat Entertainment System overview
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Selecting the screen for the head-
phones
X
Set switch : to L (left-hand screen) or R
(right-hand screen).
Connecting additional headphones
Up to two cordless headphones can be used at
the same time for each screen.
You can also connect one additional set of cor-
ded headphones to each of the two rear-com-
partment screens (
Y page 209). The socket is
designed for headphones with a 3.5 mm stereo
jack plug and an impedance of 32 ohms.
Replacing batteries
Notes
G
WARNING
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-
ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in
severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal
injury.
Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If
a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention
immediately.
H
Environmental note
Batteries contain dangerous
substances. It is against the
law to dispose of them with
the household rubbish. They
must be collected separately
and recycled to protect the
environment.
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally friendly
manner. Take discharged
batteries to a qualified spe-
cialist workshop or a special
collection point for used bat-
teries.
Batteries are required for the remote control
and for the two sets of cordless headphones.
The batteries can be replaced.
H
Environmental note
Dispose of discharged batteries in an envi-
ronmentally responsible manner.
Replacing the batteries of the remote
control
:
Battery compartment
;
Catch tab
=
Battery compartment cover
?
Retaining lugs
A
Batteries
Rear Seat Entertainment System overview
215
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Z
The remote control contains two type AAA, 1.5 V
batteries.
X
To open the battery compartment: remove
battery compartment cover = on the back of
the remote control.
X
Push catch tab ; down and take off battery
compartment cover =.
X
Remove discharged batteries A from the
tray.
X
Insert the new batteries. Observe the polarity
markings on the batteries and battery com-
partment when doing so.
Left-hand battery: the positive pole (+) must
face upwards.
Right-hand battery: the positive pole (+) must
face downwards.
X
To close the battery compartment: insert
battery compartment cover = starting with
retaining lugs ? into the battery compart-
ment and allow catch tab ; to engage in
place.
Replacing cordless headphone batter-
ies
The battery compartment is located on the left
headphone. The cordless headphones require
two type AAA, 1.5 V batteries.
X
To open the battery compartment: turn
battery compartment cover : counter-
clockwise and remove.
X
Remove the discharged batteries from the
tray.
X
Insert the new batteries. Observe the polarity
markings on the batteries and battery tray
when doing so.
X
To close the battery compartment: replace
battery housing cover : and turn it clock-
wise until it engages.
If the batteries have been inserted correctly,
the indicator lamp will light up green when the
headphones are switched on.
i
The operating duration of the headphones
with a set of batteries is up to 40 hours.
System settings
General notes
You can adjust all system settings individually
for each screen without affecting the other
screen. To do this, please use the remote con-
trol (
Y page 210).
Selecting the display language
X
Select Vehicle using the
9:=; buttons on the remote
control and press the 9 button to confirm.
X
Press the : button on the remote control.
A menu appears.
X
Select System Settings using
the :=; buttons on the remote
control and press the 9 button to confirm.
You see the System Settings
menu on the
selected rear screen.
X
Select Language using the 9: but-
tons and press the 9 button to confirm.
The list of languages appears. A # dot indi-
cates the current setting.
X
Select the language using the 9: but-
tons and press the 9 button to confirm.
The system activates the corresponding lan-
guage.
216
System settings
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Switching the display design
X
Select Vehicle using the
9:=; buttons on the remote
control and press the 9 button to confirm.
X
Select System Settings using
the :=; buttons on the remote
control and press the 9 button to confirm.
You see the System Settings
menu on the
selected rear screen.
X
Select Display using the 9: buttons
on the remote control and press the 9 button
to confirm.
X
Select Day Mode, Night Mode or Automatic
using the 9: buttons and press the 9
button to confirm.
The dot indicates the current setting.
Design Explanation
Day Mode
The display is set perma-
nently to day design.
Night Mode
The display is set perma-
nently to night design.
Automatic
The display design
changes depending on
the vehicle instrument
cluster illumination.
Setting the brightness
X
Select Vehicle using the
9:=; buttons on the remote
control and press the 9 button to confirm.
X
Select System Settings using
the :=; buttons on the remote
control and press the 9 button to confirm.
You see the System Settings
menu on the
selected rear screen.
X
Select Display using the :9 buttons
on the remote control and press the 9 button
to confirm.
X
Select Brightness using the 9: but-
tons and press the 9 button.
A scale appears.
X
Adjust the brightness using the 9:
buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.
The brightness bar moves up or down. The
picture becomes lighter or darker in accord-
ance with the scale.
Showing/hiding the picture
X
Select Vehicle using the
9:=; buttons on the remote
control and press the 9 button to confirm.
X
Press button : on the remote control.
A menu appears.
X
Select Display Off using the
9:=; buttons and press the
9 button to confirm.
X
To display the picture: press the 9 button.
Adjusting sound settings
You can select the sound settings in the radio,
audio CD/audio DVD/MP3, video DVD and AUX
modes.
X
Select a medium (e.g. CD mode)
(
Y page 221).
X
To show the menu: press the : button on
the remote control.
X
Select Sound using the :=; but-
tons on the remote control and press the 9
button to confirm.
X
Select sound settings using
the :=; buttons on the remote
control and press the 9 button.
X
Select the desired setting using the selector
wheel on the remote control.
X
To exit the menu: press the % button on
the remote control.
Picture settings
Overview
You can select the picture settings in video DVD
and AUX mode.
System settings
217
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Z
Adjusting the brightness, contrast and
color
X
Switch on video DVD mode(Y page 223).
X
To show the menu: press the 9 button on
the remote control.
X
Select ò using the =;buttons and
press the 9 to confirm.
A menu appears.
X
Select Options using the :=;
buttons and press the 9 button.
X
Select Video Settings using the :
=;buttons and press the 9 button.
X
Select Brightness, Contrast or Color
using the 9: buttons and press the 9
button to confirm.
An adjustment scale appears.
X
Select the setting using the 9: but-
tons and press the 9 button to confirm.
Changing the picture format
X
Switch on video DVD mode (Y page 223).
X
To show the menu: press the 9 button on
the remote control.
X
Select ò using the =;buttons and
press the 9 to confirm.
A menu appears.
X
Select Options using the :=;
buttons and press the 9 button.
X
Select Video Settings using the :
=;buttons and press the 9 button.
The dot in front of the 16:9
or 4:3 entry indi-
cates the currently selected format.
X
Select the format using the 9: but-
tons and press the 9 button to confirm.
Vehicle settings
You can change the vehicle settings from the
rear compartment.
You can make the following changes:
R
Extend seat heating to switch the arm rest
panel heating in the rear compartment on/off
R
Seat settings
X
To set vehicle settings: select Vehicle with
the 9=; buttons on the remote
control and press the 9 button to confirm.
You will see a menu with the available vehicle
functions.
X
Select Vehicle Settings or Seat Set‐
tings with the =; buttons.
X
Press the 9 button on the remote control.
Further information on seat settings
(
Y page 56).
Further information on panel heating
(
Y page 52).
i
The panel heating in the rear compartment
is available if the SmartKey in the ignition lock
is in position 1 or 2.
Climate control settings via the Rear
Seat Entertainment System
General notes
You can adjust the rear-compartment air condi-
tioning from the rear compartment. To do this,
please use the remote control (
Y page 210).
Settings in the climate control bar
Overview
You can set the most important climate control
functions such as temperature, airflow, air dis-
tribution and cooling using the climate control
bar. The climate control bar is visible in most
displays.
218
Climate control settings via the Rear Seat Entertainment System
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Calling up the climate control bar
X
Press the / button on the remote control.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
Press the : button on the remote control,
release and press again.
The climate control bar is active.
Setting the temperature
X
Call up the climate control bar (Y page 219).
X
To select the current temperature on left or
right-hand side: press the =; buttons
on the remote control.
X
Press the 9 button.
The temperature setting scale appears.
X
To change the setting: press the 9:
buttons on the remote control.
X
Press the 9 button.
Setting the airflow
X
Call up the climate control bar (Y page 219).
X
To select J: press the =; buttons
on the remote control.
X
Press the 9 button.
The airflow setting scale appears.
X
To change the setting: press the 9:
buttons on the remote control.
X
Press the 9 button.
Setting the air distribution
X
Call up the climate control bar (Y page 219).
X
To select the current air distribution display
on the left or right, e.g. O: press the
=; buttons on the remote control.
X
Press the 9 button.
The air distribution setting scale appears.
X
To change the setting: press the 9:
buttons on the remote control.
X
Press the 9 button.
Adjusting the cooling in the rear com-
partment
You can make the following settings for the rear
compartment climate control with ¿:
R
Switching rear compartment climate control
on and off
R
Switching automatic rear compartment cli-
mate control on and off
X
Call up the climate control bar (Y page 219).
X
To select ¿: press the =; buttons
on the remote control.
X
Press the 9 button.
A menu appears.
X
To select a function: press the 9:
buttons on the remote control.
To switch the function on O or off ª: press
the 9 button.
Navigation mode
Navigation functions such as the compass can
be used in the rear compartment.
X
To call up Drive Information: press the
Ø button on the remote control.
You will see the current navigation informa-
tion.
X
To call up the compass: press the Ø
button on the remote control.
X
Press the : button on the remote control.
A menu appears.
X
Select Menu using the remote control.
X
Select Compass using the remote control.
An Internet connection is required to use the
online map display (
Y page 142).
X
To call up the online map display: press the
Ø button on the remote control.
X
Press the : button on the remote control.
A menu appears.
X
Select Menu using the remote control.
X
Select Online Map Display using the
remote control.
Navigation mode
219
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Z
Online and Internet functions
Setting up an Internet connection (Y page 143).
Using Internet functions:
X
Press button ® on the remote control.
A menu appears.
X
Select the online/Internet function required.
Calling up the Internet functions menu:
X
Press the % button on the remote control
while using the Internet function.
Exiting the Internet functions:
X
Press the % button on the remote control.
A menu appears.
X
Select the Ü symbol in the menu and press
the 9 button on the remote control to con-
firm.
or
X
Select another function (e.g. Media or Radio).
Radio mode
X
To switch on: press the $ button on the
remote control.
Radio mode starts.
Further information on radio mode
(
Y page 154).
Media mode
Activating media mode
There are several ways to activate media sour-
ces using the multimedia system.
The relevant sections of the Operator's Manual
describe the simplest way to activate a media
source.
This section describes all options for activating
media sources.
Starting media playback using the
button
X
Press the Õ button on the remote control.
The last media source you have set is dis-
played.
If playable music files are found, they will be
played by the multimedia system.
X
To show the menu: press the Õ button on
the remote control.
X
To select the media source: turn the selector
wheel on the remote control.
or
X
Press the =; buttons on the remote
control.
The menu appears with the available media
sources.
X
Press the 9 button on the remote control.
If the disc contains music or video files, these
will be played. The corresponding basic menu
will be shown.
Starting media playback using the
main function bar
X
To show the menu: press the 9 button on
the remote control.
X
Select Media using the =; buttons on
the remote control and press the 9 button.
X
To select the media source: turn the selector
wheel on the remote control.
or
X
Press the =; buttons on the remote
control.
The menu appears with the available media
sources.
X
Press the 9 button on the remote control.
If the disc contains music or video files, these
will be played. The corresponding basic menu
will be shown.
Starting media using the device list
220
Media mode
Rear Seat Entertainment System
X
Press the Õ button on the remote control.
X
To show the menu: press the : button on
the remote control.
X
To select Devices: press the :=;
buttons on the remote control.
The discs/devices available are shown. The #
dot indicates the current setting.
X
Select the device/disc using the :9
buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.
If the device/disc contains music or video
files, these will be played.
Music search
X
Select the preferred media source.
X
Press the : button on the remote control.
The menu is shown.
X
Select Search using the =; buttons
on the remote control and press the 9 but-
ton.
Further information on the music search
(
Y page 173).
Audio/video mode
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
The CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product.
If you open the housing of the CD/DVD drive,
there is a risk of exposure to invisible laser
radiation. This laser radiation could damage
your retina. There is a risk of injury.
Never open the housing. Always have main-
tenance and repair work carried out at a quali-
fied specialist workshop.
General notes
You will find information on the following topics
in the Audio section:
R
Notes on CD/DVD discs (Y page 167)
R
Notes on MP3 mode (Y page 166)
R
Notes on copyright (Y page 167)
Inserting a CD/DVD
:
Disc slot
;
Disc eject button
Depending on the vehicle model and equipment
level, the CD/DVD drive is found:
R
at the rear of the center console under the
automatic climate control panel or
R
between the parcel shelf and skibag
The CD/DVD drive is a single disc drive. If there
is already a disc inserted, it must be ejected
before another is inserted.
Inserting a CD or DVD
X
Insert a disc into the disc slot.
The printed side of the disc must face up.
If neither side of the disc is printed, the side
you wish to play must face down.
The CD/DVD drive draws in the disc.
The CD/DVD drive plays the disc in the following
situations:
R
The disc has been inserted correctly
R
A permissible type of disc is being used
R
Disc operation has been activated
Data on an MP3 CD first needs to be loaded by
the drive. Loading may take some time, depend-
ing on the number of folders and tracks.
Switching to audio/video mode
X
Insert a CD or DVD (Y page 221).
The system loads the inserted disc and starts
playback.
or
X
Select Media using the 9=; but-
tons on the remote control and press the 9
button to confirm.
Audio/video mode
221
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Z
X
Select Disc using the =; buttons and
press the 9 button.
The system plays the disc.
X
To switch on other media: connect the
device with the corresponding port.
The system searches for files on the device
that can be played back, and then plays them.
Selecting a track
Selecting a track by skipping to a track
X
To skip forward or back to a track: press the
= or ; button on the remote control.
or
X
Press the E or F button.
The skip forward function skips to the next
track.
If the elapsed track time has passed eight
seconds, the function skips back to the begin-
ning of the track. If the elapsed time is
shorter, it will skip to the start of the previous
track.
If playback option Random Track List
or
Random Medium
has been selected, the
tracks will be played in a random order.
Selecting a track via the track list
In CD mode, the track list contains all tracks on
the disc currently playing.
In MP3 mode, the track list shows all tracks in
the currently active folder as well as the folder
structure, allowing you to select any track on the
MP3 CD.
X
Select Search using the :=; but-
tons on the remote control and press the 9
button to confirm.
X
Select Current Tracklist using the
9: buttons and press the 9 button.
The track list appears. The # dot indicates
the current track.
X
Select the track using the 9: buttons
and press the 9 button to confirm.
Selecting a track via the track number
This function is only available in Media mode.
X
Press the h button on the remote control.
The track entry display appears.
X
Example: track 2
Press number button 2.
X
Example: track 12
Press the corresponding number keys in rapid
succession.
X
Wait for approximately three seconds after
making the entry.
You will hear the track which has been
entered. The corresponding basic menu then
reappears.
i
It is not possible to enter numbers that
exceed the number of tracks on the CD or in
the currently active folder.
Fast forwarding/rewinding
X
With the display/selection window active,
press the = or ; button on the remote
control repeatedly until you reach the desired
position.
or
X
Press and hold the E or F button until
the desired position is reached.
Selecting a folder
This function is only available in MP3 mode.
X
Select Search using the :=; but-
tons on the remote control and press the 9
button to confirm.
X
Select Folder using the :=;
buttons and press the 9 button.
The folder content appears.
X
To switch to the next folder up: press the
= button on the remote control.
The display shows the next folder up.
X
Select the folder with the 9: buttons
and press the 9 button to confirm.
You will see the tracks in the folder.
X
Select the track using the 9: buttons
and press the 9 button to confirm.
The track is played and the corresponding
folder is now the active folder.
222
Audio/video mode
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Pausing/continuing playback
X
To pause playback: press the ; or Ë
button on the remote control.
The Ë display changes to Ì.
X
To continue playback: press the ; /
Ë button.
The Ì display changes to Ë.
Selecting playback options
X
Select Options using the :=;
buttons and press the 9 button.
X
The options list appears. The # dot indicates
the option currently selected.
X
Select Normal Track Sequence, Random
Track List or Random Medium using the
9: buttons and press the 9 button to
confirm.
The option is switched on. For all options
except Normal Track Sequence
, you will
see a corresponding display in the display or
selection window.
i
If you switch the data carrier which you are
currently listening to, the Normal Track
Sequence option is activated automatically. If
an option is selected, it remains selected after
the system is switched on or off.
Switching track information on/off
When the function is switched on, information
such as track, artist and album are displayed (if
available). If the function is switched off, the
names of the files and folders on the disc are
shown.
X
Select Options using the :=;
buttons and press the 9 button.
X
Select Show Track Information using the
9: buttons and press the 9 button.
The function is switched on O or off ª,
depending on the previous status.
Video DVD mode
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
The CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product.
If you open the housing of the CD/DVD drive,
there is a risk of exposure to invisible laser
radiation. This laser radiation could damage
your retina. There is a risk of injury.
Never open the housing. Always have main-
tenance and repair work carried out at a quali-
fied specialist workshop.
General notes
DVD playback conditions
Playback problems may occur when playing
copied discs. There is a large variety of discs,
DVD authoring software, writing software and
writers available. This variety means that there
is no guarantee that the system will be able to
play video DVDs you have copied yourself.
More information on the playback criteria
(
Y page 187).
Function restrictions
Depending on the DVD, certain functions or
actions may be temporarily blocked or not func-
tion at all. As soon as you try to activate these
functions, you will see the K symbol in the dis-
play.
Switching on video DVD mode
X
Insert a video DVD.
The system loads the disc.
If disc mode was the last mode selected, it will
now be active.
X
To manually switch to video DVD mode: press
the Õ button on the remote control
repeatedly until the video DVD mode is
switched on.
If the video DVD fulfills the playback criteria,
the film starts automatically or the DVD menu
Video DVD mode
223
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Z
appears. If the DVD menu appears, you must
start the film manually.
X
Select the corresponding menu item in the
DVD menu.
Video menu
:
Type of data medium
;
Current title
=
Shows the menu bars for the DVD basic dis-
play
?
Current scene
A
Track time
X
To show: press the 9 or : button on
the remote control.
X
To hide: press the 9 or : button.
or
X
Wait for approximately eight seconds.
Overview of DVD functions
:
Activates DVD control menu
;
Hides DVD functions
=
Shows the DVD basic display
?
Confirms entry in control menu
A
Navigates DVD lists
B
Jumps to the start of the scene
C
Displays camera perspectives
D
Shows subtitles
E
Selects language
F
Stops playback
G
Pauses playback
X
To show: press the 9 button on the remote
control.
X
To hide: press the % button on the remote
control.
Fast forwarding/rewinding
X
Press and hold the E or F button on
the remote control until the desired position
has been reached.
The control menu appears.
Pausing playback
X
To show the menu: press the 9 button on the
remote control.
X
To pause playback: select Ë and press
the 9 button.
The Ë display changes to Ì.
X
To continue playback: select Ì and
press the 9 button to confirm.
The menu is hidden.
Stops playback
X
To show the menu: press the 9 button on
the remote control.
X
To interrupt playback: select É and
press the 9 button to confirm.
The Ë display changes to Ì. The video
image is hidden.
X
To continue playback: select Ì and
press the 9 button to confirm.
Playback continues from the point where it
was interrupted. The menu is hidden.
224
Video DVD mode
Rear Seat Entertainment System
X
To stop playback: while playback is inter-
rupted, select É again and press 9 to
confirm.
Playback stops and returns to the beginning
of the DVD. Ì is highlighted.
X
To restart playback: select Ì and press
the 9 button to confirm.
Playback starts from the beginning of the
DVD.
Selecting a scene/chapter
General notes
Also observe the information on the video DVD
mode (
Y page 191).
Skipping forward/back
X
Press = or ; on the remote control.
The control menu appears for approximately
eight seconds.
Selecting a scene/chapter directly
The examples illustrate how to select scene/
chapter 5.
Option 1:
X
While the film is running, press the h but-
ton on the remote control.
X
Press the corresponding number key, such as
5.
Option 2:
X
Press the 9 button on the remote control
and show the menu.
X
Select Menu and press the 9 button.
The DVD menu appears.
X
Select Scene selection and press the 9 but-
ton to confirm.
X
Using the 9 or : button, select num-
ber 5 for example, and press the 9 button to
confirm.
In both cases, playback will begin from the 5th
scene or chapter after a brief pause.
Selecting a film/track
First selection option:
X
Press the 9 button on the remote control
and show the menu.
X
Select Menu using the 9:=;
buttons on the remote control and press the
9 button to confirm.
The DVD menu appears.
X
Select Track selection using the
9:=; buttons on the remote
control and press the 9 button to confirm.
X
To call up the selection list: press the 9 but-
ton.
X
Select a film/title.
Second selection option:
X
Example: selecting film 2
Press button 2.
After a brief pause, the second film is played.
DVD menu
Calling up the DVD menu
The DVD menu is the menu stored on the DVD
itself. It is structured in various ways according
to the individual DVD and permits certain
actions and settings.
In the case of multi-language DVDs, for example,
you can change the DVD language in the DVD
menu.
X
Press the 9 button on the remote control
and show the menu.
X
Select Menu using the 9:=;
buttons on the remote control and press the
9 button to confirm.
The DVD menu appears.
Selecting menu items in the DVD menu
X
Select a menu item using the
9:=; buttons on the remote
control and press the 9 button to confirm.
Video DVD mode
225
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Z
X
Select Select using the 9:=;
buttons on the remote control and press the
9 button to confirm.
The system executes the function or shows a
submenu.
X
If available, additional options can now be
selected.
The system then switches back to the DVD
menu.
i
Menu items which cannot be selected are
shown in gray.
Stopping a film or skipping to the begin-
ning or end of a scene
X
Select any menu item from the DVD menu.
The menu appears.
X
To stop the film: select the ¿ menu item
and press the 9 button on the remote control
to confirm.
X
To skip to the end of a scene: select the
F menu item and press 9 to confirm.
X
To skip to the start of a scene: select the
E menu item and press 9 to confirm.
Moving up one level in the DVD menu
X
Show the DVD menu.
X
Press the % back button on the remote
control or select the corresponding menu
item in the DVD menu.
Back to the movie
X
Press the % back button repeatedly until
you see the movie.
Setting the audio format
This function is not available on all DVDs. If it is
available, you can set the audio language or the
audio format. The number of settings is deter-
mined by the DVD content. It may also be pos-
sible to access the settings from the DVD menu.
X
Press the 9 button on the remote control
and show the menu.
X
Select Video DVD using the
9:=; buttons on the remote
control and press the 9 button to confirm.
X
Select DVD Functions and press the 9 but-
ton.
X
Select Audio Language and press the 9
button.
A menu appears after a short while. The # dot
in front of an entry indicates the currently
selected language.
X
Select the language using the 9: but-
tons and press the 9 button to confirm.
X
To exit the menu: press the = or ;
button.
Subtitles and camera angle
These functions are not available on all DVDs.
The number of subtitle languages and camera
angles available depends on the content of the
DVD. It may also be possible to access the set-
tings from the DVD menu.
X
Press the 9 button on the remote control
and show the menu.
X
Select Video DVD using the
9:=; buttons on the remote
control and press the 9 button to confirm.
X
Select DVD Functions and press the 9 but-
ton.
X
Select, for example Subtitles, and press the
9 button.
A menu appears. The # dot in front of an entry
indicates the current setting.
X
Select the setting using the 9: but-
tons and press the 9 button to confirm.
X
To exit the menu: press the = or ;
button.
Interactive content
DVDs can also contain interactive content (e.g.
a video game). In a video game, you may be able
to influence events by selecting and triggering
actions. The type and number of actions depend
on the DVD.
X
Select an action using the
9;:= buttons on the remote
control and press the 9 button to execute it.
A menu appears and the first entry, Select
is
highlighted.
X
Press the 9 button.
226
Video DVD mode
Rear Seat Entertainment System
AUX mode
General notes
You can connect an external video source in the
rear compartment.
Depending on the vehicle model and equipment
level, the AUX jacks are found:
R
in the stowage box between the rear seats or
R
in the rear-compartment armrest
(
Y page 213).
Please see the manufacturer's operating
instructions for how to operate the external
video source.
Please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for further information.
Connecting AUX equipment
X
Insert the audio plugs for the left and right
signals into the corresponding L and R jacks.
X
Insert the video plug into the V jack.
Activating AUX mode
X
Select Aux using the 9=; buttons
on the remote control and press the 9 button
to confirm.
The AUX source is switched on once the AUX
device is active.
AUX mode
227
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Z
228
225

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Mercedes S-Class Coupe 2017 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Mercedes S-Class Coupe 2017 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 8,67 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Mercedes S-Class Coupe 2017

Mercedes S-Class Coupe 2017 Gebruiksaanwijzing - English - 338 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info